SR-D100 User's Manual - E PDF

299GB
Table of Contents
General Cautions............................................................................... 2
Fixed Mount 2D Code Reader Safety Precautions ............................................................................ 2

Precautions on International Regulations and Standards ................. 3
SR-D100 Series Software License Agreement ............................................................ 4
User's Manual Rev.4.0 1-1

1-2
Package Contents and Product Lineup ............................................. 5
Part Names and Functions ................................................................ 6
1-3 System Configuration and Setup Flow .............................................. 7
Read this manual before use.
Keep this manual in a safe place for future reference. 2-1 Connecting the Control Cable and Wiring ......................................... 8
2-2 Connecting the Ethernet Cable and Light........................................ 10
2-3 How to Connect and Wire the SR-M80 ........................................... 10
3-1 Using the SR-D100 Series .............................................................. 11

3-2 Alternate Function ........................................................................... 12
3-3 Preset/Comparison Function ........................................................... 13
3-4 Test Mode........................................................................................ 14
3-5 Multi-I/O Function ............................................................................ 16
3-6 Matching level OK/NG Judgment Function ..................................... 17
3-7 Silent Mode...................................................................................... 18
3-8 Image Saving Function.................................................................... 18
3-9 Batch Setting Code.......................................................................... 20
3-10 Code quality verification function..................................................... 21
3-11 Edit data function/Edit image file name function.............................. 26
3-12 Duplicate reading prevention interval reset ..................................... 28
3-13 Changeover function ....................................................................... 28
Symbols
4-1 Read Operations ............................................................................. 30
This user's manual uses the following symbols that alert you to important
messages. Be sure to read these messages carefully. 4-2 Timing Mode.................................................................................... 30
4-3 Data Transmission Timing............................................................... 31
It indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result 4-4 Read Mode ...................................................................................... 32
DANGER
in death or serious injury.
It indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could
WARNING
result in death or serious injury. 5-1 Installing, Starting, and Shutting Down............................................ 35
5-2 Screen Layout ................................................................................. 39
It indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could
CAUTION 5-3 AutoID Network Navigator Operation .............................................. 41
result in minor or moderate injury.
5-4 Configuration ................................................................................... 41
It indicates a situation which, if not avoided, could result in 5-5 Sending/Receiving Configuration .................................................... 56
NOTICE
product damage as well as property damage. 5-6 Saving/Reading a Configuration File ............................................... 57
5-7 Quick Setup Code ........................................................................... 57
Important Cautions as to operation that is always performed are shown. 5-8 LiveView .......................................................................................... 58
5-9 ImageView....................................................................................... 59
5-10 FileView ........................................................................................... 59
Point Cautions as to operation that can be easily performed incorrectly 5-11 Terminal........................................................................................... 60
are shown. 5-12 Support Bank Function .................................................................... 61
5-13 Installation Guide............................................................................. 62
5-14 Export Reader Configuration ........................................................... 62
Reference Matters that will help the user improve understanding of the text and
5-15 Marking optimization function .......................................................... 63
useful information are shown.
5-16 Report Generator Function.............................................................. 64
5-17 Creating reports for the SR-D100 Series......................................... 65
The items and pages to be referred to in this document are shown.
6-1 Outline of the SR-M80 ..................................................................... 70

Introduction
6-2 Operation Screen of the SR-M80 .................................................... 71
This instruction manual describes the connection/wiring procedure, setting 6-3 System Mode of the SR-M80 .......................................................... 74
instructions, and precautions for using the "SR-D100 Series 2D Code Reader".
Please read this manual thoroughly before using the SR-D100 Series to ensure
7-1 Mounting the SR-D100 Series......................................................... 78
optimum performance. Keep this manual handy for quick future reference.
7-2 Installing the Dedicated Lighting for the SR-D100 Series ............... 80
7-3 Installing the Dedicated Monitor for the SR-D100 Series ................ 82
8-1 Communication of the SR-D100 Series........................................... 83

8-2 Data Communication Format........................................................... 84
8-3 RS-232C Communication................................................................ 86
8-4 Ethernet Communication ................................................................. 87
8-5 Socket Communication.................................................................... 88
8-6 FTP Communication........................................................................ 89
9-1 Details of Command Communication .............................................. 90

9-2 Operation Commands ..................................................................... 90
9-3 Details of Configuration Commands................................................ 94
10-1 PLC Link ........................................................................................ 100

10-2 Configuration ................................................................................. 100
10-3 Device Assignment........................................................................ 102
10-4 Reference Program ....................................................................... 105
1 E SR-D100 UM
10-5 PLC Link Error............................................................................... 106
General Cautions
11-1 Master/Slave function.................................................................... 107
11-2 Setting procedure .......................................................................... 107 • This product must not be used to protect the whole or part of
11-3 Multi drop link mode ...................................................................... 108 human body.
11-4 Multi head mode............................................................................ 108 WARNING • Since the SR-D100 Series is not intended for use in an
explosion-proof area, it must never be used in the explosion-
proof area.
12-1 EtherNet/IP.................................................................................... 109 • Be sure to check that the SR-D100 Series performs properly
12-2 Cyclic communication.................................................................... 110 before starting the work or operation.
CAUTION
12-3 Message Communication.............................................................. 116 • If the SR-D100 Series malfunctions, take adequate safety
12-4 Reference Program ....................................................................... 120 precautions to prevent various types of damage.
• It should be noted that functions and performances will not be
guaranteed if the SR-D100 Series is used in any way not
13-1 PROFINET .................................................................................... 124
specified or described in the product specifications or it is
13-2 Cyclic communication.................................................................... 124
NOTICE modified.
• When the SR-D100 Series is used in combination with other
14-1 Installing MultiMonitor.................................................................... 127 devices, functions and performance may be degraded,
depending on the operating conditions and environment.
14-2 Using MultiMonitor......................................................................... 128
15-1
15-2
Installing FileView.......................................................................... 129
Using FileView............................................................................... 130
Safety Precautions
16-1 SR-D100 Series Specifications ..................................................... 131 LED Product Precautions
16-2 SR-DR10/DR15/DS3 Specifications.............................................. 131
16-3 SR-M80 Specifications .................................................................. 131 • Use of controls, adjustment, or performance of procedures
16-4 Dimensions.................................................................................... 132 other than those specified herein may result in hazardous LED
16-5 Troubleshooting............................................................................. 134 radiation exposure.
16-6 Checksum Calculation Method...................................................... 135 • Make sure to observe the following precautions. Otherwise, it
16-7 ASCII Code List............................................................................. 136 may result in injuries to human body (eye or skin injuries).
16-8 Copyright indications ..................................................................... 136
• Do not stare at LED light and specular reflection of light.
CAUTION • This product is not equipped with a mechanism for stopping
radiation of LED light when disassembling. Never disassemble
the product.
• Do not look directly into the LED light using an optical
instrument. Observing the LED light using a certain type of
optimal instrument (for example, loupe, magnifying glass and
microscope) within the distance of 100 mm may be harmful to
the eyes.
E SR-D100 UM 2
Notes on Proper Use Precautions on International
• Do not use the SR-D100 Series from a power source other than Regulations and Standards
24 V DC. Otherwise, it may cause failure.
• Before connecting or disconnecting cables, make sure to turn
off power to the equipment connected to the SR-D100 Series. SR-D100 Series
Otherwise, it may cause the failure of the SR-D100 Series.
• Do not disassemble or modify the SR-D100 Series. Otherwise, it  CE marking
may cause failure.
• Keep the cables and the like as far away as possible from high We have verified that this product meets all essential requirements of the EC
tension wires and power source. Noise may cause failure or Directive based on the following requirements. When you use this product in a
malfunction. country within the EU, keep in mind the following requirements:
• Since the SR-D100 Series is a  EMC Directive (2004/108/EC)

precision machine, be careful not to • Applicable Standard EMI : EN61326-1, Class A
give an impact or drop it. Care should EMS : EN61326-1
be taken especially when it is carried • The length of all I/O cables should be 30 m or less.
or installed. However, these requirements do not guarantee that the entire machine equipment
in which this product is incorporated meets all essential requirements of the EC
• Do not carry it by holding the cables. Directive. It is the responsibility of the machine equipment manufacturer to verify
It may cause a break in the cable or that the entire machine equipment meets the requirements.
make contact with the unit, resulting
in breakage.  Low Voltage Directive (2006/95/EC)
• Applicable Standard EN62471
• Install the product indoors.
 CSA Certification
This product meets the following CSA Standards and UL Standards and obtained
the CSA certification.
• Keep the scanner free of water, dust or oil. Otherwise, it may
cause read errors. Gently wipe off contamination with a soft, • Applicable standards : CAN/CSA C22.2 No.61010-1
dry cloth. (Do not soak the cloth in alcohol or the like.) UL61010-1
When you use this product as the CSA recognized or listed product, keep in mind
• Do not turn off the power to the SR-D100 Series during file the following requirements:
access.
• Overvoltage category
It may corrupt internal data.
• Use the product under Pollution Degree 2 environmental condition.
• Do not use SR-DR10/DR15/DS3 for other than the SR-D100 • Install it at an altitude of 2000 m or less.
Series. Otherwise, it may cause failure. • Install the product indoors.
• Before connecting or disconnecting cables, make sure to turn • When using this product, use any of the following power sources.
off the power to the SR-D100 Series. Otherwise, it may cause • CSA recognized power source or UL recognized power source with Class 2
NOTICE failure of the SR-DR10/DR15/DS3 and SR-D100. output specified in CEC (Canadian Electrical Code) and NEC (National
• Do not disassemble or modify SR-DR10/DR15/DS3. Otherwise,
Electrical Code).
it may cause failure.
• CSA recognized or UL recognized power source that was assessed as a
• Keep the cables and the like as far away as possible from high
limited power source specified in CAN/CSA-C22.2 No.60950-1/UL60950-1.
tension wires and power source. Noise may cause failure or
malfunction.
• Since the SR-DR10/DR15/DS3 are SR-DR10/DR15/DS3
precision machines, be careful not to
give an impact or drop them. Care  CE marking
should be taken especially when they
We have verified that this product meets all essential requirements of the EC
are carried or installed.
Directive based on the following requirements. When you use this product in a
country within the EU, keep in mind the following requirements:
• Do not carry them by holding the
cables. It may cause a break in the  EMC Directive (2004/108/EC)
cable or make contact with the unit, • Applicable Standard EMI : EN61326-1, Class A
resulting in breakage. EMS : EN61326-1
• The length of all I/O cables should be 30 m or less.
However, these requirements do not guarantee that the entire machine equipment
in which this product is incorporated meets all essential requirements of the EC
Directive. It is the responsibility of the machine equipment manufacturer to verify
that the entire machine equipment meets the requirements.
 Low Voltage Directive (2006/95/EC)
• Do not use the SR-M80 Series from a power source other than
24 V DC. Otherwise, it may cause failure. • Applicable Standard EN60825-1
• Before connecting or disconnecting cables, make sure to turn • Install the product indoors.
off power to the equipment connected to the SR-M80.
Otherwise, it may cause the failure of the SR-M80.  CSA Certification
• Do not disassemble or modify the SR-M80. Otherwise, it may This product meets the following CSA Standards and UL Standards and obtained
cause failure. the CSA certification.
• Keep the cables and the like as far away as possible from high • Applicable standards : CAN/CSA C22.2 No.61010-1
tension wires and power source. Noise may cause failure or
UL61010-1
malfunction.
When you use this product as the CSA recognized or listed product, keep in mind
• Since the SR-M80 is a precision machine, be careful not to give
the following requirements:
an impact or drop it. Care should be taken especially when they
are carried or installed. • Overvoltage category
• Gently wipe off contamination with a soft, dry cloth. (Do not • Use the product under Pollution Degree 2 environmental condition.
soak the cloth in alcohol or the like.) • Install it at an altitude of 2000 m or less.
• Install the product indoors.
299GB 3 E SR-D100 UM
SR-M80 Software License Agreement
 CE marking
NOTICE TO USER: PLEASE READ THIS SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT
We have verified that this product meets all essential requirements of the EC (THIS "AGREEMENT") CAREFULLY. BY USING ALL OR ANY PORTION OF THE
Directive based on the following requirements. When you use this product in a SR-H3W (THIS "SOFTWARE"), YOU ARE AGREEING TO BE BOUND BY ALL
country within the EU, keep in mind the following requirements: THE TERMS AND CONDITONS OF THIS AGREEMENT. IF YOU DO NOT
 EMC Directive (2004/108/EC) AGREE TO ANY TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT, DO NOT USE THIS
SOFTWARE. If you have paid for this Software and/or for the KEYENCE product
• Applicable Standard EMI : EN61326-1, Class A
that was acquired with this Software and cannot be used without this Software, and
EMS : EN61326-1
you return this Software unopened together with the the statement of delivery
• The length of all I/O cables should be 30 m or less.
within sixty (60) days from the date you acquired the Software, KEYENCE will
• When you install the SR-M80, make sure to install it on the conductive enclosure
refund the fees (if any) that you have paid for this Software and/or for the related
(control panel or the like).
KEYENCE product.
• Ferritic core used
1. Definition
For the Ethernet cable and supply terminal cable, install the following ferritic core
1.1 "use" or "using" means to access, install, download, copy or otherwise
in the location within 100 mm from the SR-M80 unit.
benefit from using the functionality of this Software.
Port Ferritic core
Number
Cable 1.2 "This Software" means the software and all associated documentation
of turns provided by KEYENCE.
Ethernet port 2 Cable with shield 2. Grant of License.
TDK-made ZCAT3035-1330
Supply terminal KEYENCE-made OP-84289 3 Twist cable
Conditioned upon compliance with all of the terms and conditions of this
block Agreement, KEYENCE grants you a nonexclusive and nontransferable
However, these requirements do not guarantee that the entire machine equipment license to install this Software on all computers used by your entity in order to
in which this product is incorporated meets all essential requirements of the EC use the KEYENCE product. You may make one copy of this Software for
Directive. It is the responsibility of the machine equipment manufacturer to verify backup or archive purposes only.
that the entire machine equipment meets the requirements. 3. Restrictions.
3.1 Except for installation of updates or new functions provided by
 UL Certification KEYENCE, you may not modify or add any function to this Software.
3.2 You may not reverse engineer, decompile or disassemble this Software.
The SR-D100 Series is a UL/C-UL Listed/Recognized product.
3.3 You may not create derivative works based on this Software.
• UL File No.: E207185
3.4 Other than expressly stated by KEYENCE, you may not resell,
• Category: NRAQ/NRAQ7
retransfer, rent or otherwise redistribute this Software to any third parties.
When you use this product as the UL listed/recognized product, keep in mind the
4. Intellectual Property Rights.
following requirements:
Except as expressly stated herein, KEYENCE reserves all right, title and
• Make sure to use the UL recognized power source or CSA recognized power
interest in this Software, and all associated copyrights, trademarks, and other
source with Class 2 output specified in CEC (Canadian Electrical Code) and NEC
intellectual property rights therein.
(National Electrical Code).
5. Disclaimer.
• Use the product under Pollution Degree 2 environmental condition.
Keyence is licensing this Software to you "AS IS" and without any warranty of
• For SR-M80 power cable connection, use the AWG#14-20 copper strand wire
any kind. In no event will KEYENCE or its suppliers be liable to you for any
with rated temperature of 60°C or more.
damages, claims, costs or any lost profits caused by using this Software.
• When carrying out wiring, apply a tightening torque of 0.5 N•m (5 kgf•cm).
6. Termination.
• For the SR-M80, the enclosure type 1 is used when installing the control panel.
6.1 Your license under this Agreement will terminate automatically if you
destroy this Software and the copy of this Software in your possession or
voluntarily return this Software to us.
6.2 Your license under this Agreement will terminate automatically without
any notice from KEYENCE if you fail to comply with any of the terms and
conditions of this Agreement. Promptly upon termination, you shall cease
all use of this Software and destroy all copies, full or partial, of this
Software in your possession or control.
6.3 You will compensate KEYENCE for costs or any lost profits caused by
your violation or breach of any term of this Agreement.
7. Governing Law.
7.1 This Agreement will be governed by and construed in accordance with
the substantive laws of Japan without regards to the principles of
conflicts of law.
7.2 If any part of this Agreement is found void and unenforceable, it will not
affect the validity of the balance of this Agreement, which shall remain
valid and enforceable according to its terms and conditions.
E SR-D100 UM 4
1-1 Package Contents and  SR-D100 Series dedicated light (SR-DR10/DR15/DS3)
 SR-DR10/DR15
Product Lineup Main unit (either of them) 1 Light mounting bracket Mounting screws 8
SR-DR10 (large) L and R
The packages of the SR-D100 Series, dedicated light, dedicated monitor, and
configuration software contain the following components. Check that you have all
the package contents before use.
 SR-D100 Series (Fixed mount 2D code reader)

Instruction Manual
Main unit
1 copy
SR-D100/D110/D130/ Light port cover Mounting screws (M3) 3
D100H/D100HA 1
Light mounting bracket
SR-DR15
(small) L and R
Ethernet port
cover 1
Diffuser plate for main unit Mounting brackets Instruction Manual

A and B 1 each A and B 1 each Cable holder 1
A: pale, B: dark * Use for managing

Set screws for diffuser cords.
plate 8
 SR-DS3
Main unit 1 SR-DS3 dedicated Mounting screws 4
Hexagonal wrench for
mounting screws 2
installing the diffuser plate 1
Instruction Manual
SR-DS3 dedicated 1 copy
mounting nuts 2
When the Ethernet cable and dedicated light are not used, be sure
to install the Ethernet port cover and light port cover. If the port SR-DS3 dedicated
NOTICE
covers are not installed, it does not meet the requirements of the mounting bracket 1 Mounting bracket on the
protective structure. SR-D100 side 1
 SR-D100 Series Main unit options

Control cable Control cable Control cable (NFPA79- Anti-slip hardware 1
* Incorporated into the mounting
(Power supply I/O RS-232C) (NFPA79-compliant) compliant) with D-Sub9 pin Cable clamping hook 1 bracket on the SR-D100 side.
OP-87224: 2 m cable (Power supply I/O RS-232C) (Power supply I/O RS-232C)
OP-87225: 5 m cable OP-87353: 2 m cable OP-87527: 2 m cable
OP-87226: 10 m cable OP-87354: 5 m cable OP-87528: 5 m cable
OP-87355: 10 m cable OP-87529: 10 m cable
 SR-DR10/DR15 options
SR-DR10 diffuser SR-DR15 diffuser Douser Mounting screws
plate plate (M3) 3
OP-87233 OP-87234
Ethernet cable Ethernet cable Pointer lens
OP-87227: 2 m cable (NFPA79-compliant) OP-87235
OP-87232: 10 m cable
* The douser and mounting screws are
packed with each of OP-87233 and
OP-87234.
 SR-D100 Series dedicated monitor SR-M80

Main unit 1 Monitor mounting Instruction Manual
brackets 4 1 copy
5 E SR-D100 UM
 Configuration software SR-H3W LED indicator status by operating condition of the main unit
SR-D100 Series configuration software
LED of the SR-D100 Series
AutoID Network Navigator LED1 LED2 LED3 LED4 LED5
operates as follows depending on
CD-ROM··· 2
operating conditions:
PWR IN1 OK/NG ENET ENET

/FILE /IN2 /ERR ACT LINK
 Other options  During normal operation

Conversion cable for external light OP-87236
Operating condition Lighting status
* Used to connect the SR-D100 Series with LED light
After power is turned on, the "green" LEDs 1-5 turn
CA Series manufactured by KEYENCE.
on.
(Entire length: 90 mm) On power-up Then, the "orange" LEDs 1 to 5 turn on in turn.
When startup is complete, LED indicator during
1-2 Part Names and Functions When power is ON

During file access
normal time turns on.
The "green" LED1 turns on.
The "orange" LED1 turns on.*1
This section describes the part names and functions of the SR-D100 Series, At the time of IN1 ON The "green" LED2 turns on.*2
dedicated light, and dedicated monitor. At the time of IN2 ON The "red" LED2 turns on.*2
Normal When OK output is ON The "green" LED3 turns on.
time When NG output is ON The "orange" LED3 turns on.
SR-D100 Series
When ERR output is ON The "red" LED3 turns on.
When the Ethernet data is
The "green" LED4 turns on.
sent/received
When connected to Ethernet The "green" LED5 turns on.
PWR IN1 OK/NG ENET ENET
/FILE /IN2 /ERR ACT LINK When Ethernet communication BOOTP
The "green" LED2 and LED3 flashes.
is operating
Each time 1 code is read, "green" flash increases in
(1) PWR/FILE LED (3) OK/NG/ERR LED (5) ENET LINK LED order starting with LED1.
When reading the quick setup code
When the code is read while all of LED1 to 5 are
(2) IN1/IN2 LED (4) ENET ACT LED
flashing, only LED1 flashes.
State of factory-shipped RS-232C
LEDs 1, 3 and 5 flash.
communication settings
(6) Scanner
*1 Do not turn off power during file access.

(7) TEST button NOTICE Memory in which the file being accessed may be formatted,
which may erase all the files saved.
(9) Light port
Important *2 Lights up when "IN LED synchronization" setting is set to

"Enable".
Factory setting ··· IN1: ON, IN2: OFF
(8) Power supply
and control port (10) Ethernet port
 When an error occurred.

Number Name Function
Operating condition Lighting status
• When the power is turned ON, the "green" light turns on.
(1) PWR/FILE LED PLC link error The "red" LED1 flashes.
• When accessing a file, the "orange" light turns on.
• At the time of IN1 ON, the "green" light turns on. Send buffer overflow The "orange" LED1 flashes.
(2) IN1/IN2 LED
• At the time of IN2 ON, the "red" light turns on. File system error The "red" LED2 flashes.
• When OK output is ON, the "green" light turns on.
Main unit system setting error The "orange" LED2 flashes.
(3) OK/NG/ERR LED • When NG output is ON, the "orange" light turns on.
• When ERR output is ON, the "red" light turns on. The "red" LED3 flashes.
When the Ethernet data is sent/received, the "green" light turns When an error Main unit error Since an abnormality of the main unit is
(4) ENET ACT LED occurred. possible, contact the nearest sales office.
on.
(5) ENET LINK LED When connected to Ethernet, the "green" light turns on. Error when the main unit
The "orange" LED3 flashes.
system is updated
(6) Scanner Reads 2D codes.
IP address duplication The "red" LED4 flashes.
This button allows you to operate as follows:
• Press this switch once briefly to run 1 reading operation. PROFINET error The "red" LED5 flashes.
• Press it twice briefly to cause the pointer to emit light. Script error The "orange" LED5 flashes.
• Start and stop Test Mode
• Start reading all of the quick setup code  Display in test mode
(7) TEST button
• Stop PLC link error
When the SR-D100 Series test mode is used, the display is shown as follows:
• Clear PROFINET error
• Clear script error Description of test
Description
• Start Ethernet communication BOOTP connection LED status
of display Reading rate Processing time Position
• Set the RS-232Ccommunication settings to the default values.
Power supply and 5 LEDs
(8) Connect the control cable. 81 to 100% Up to 99 LEVEL5
control port LED1 LED2 LED3 LED4 LED5 turn on
(9) Light port Connect the dedicated light cable.
4 LEDs
61 to 80% 100 to 199 LEVEL4
(10) Ethernet port Connect the Ethernet cable. LED1 LED2 LED3 LED4 LED5 turn on
3 LEDs
41 to 60% 200 to 299 LEVEL3
LED1 LED2 LED3 LED4 LED5 turn on
2 LEDs
21 to 40% 300 to 399 LEVEL2
LED1 LED2 LED3 LED4 LED5 turn on
1 LED
1 to 20% 400 or more LEVEL1
LED1 LED2 LED3 LED4 LED5 turns on
No LED
Reading error
LED1 LED2 LED3 LED4 LED5 turns on
E SR-D100 UM 6
SR-D100 Series dedicated light 1-3 System Configuration and
 SR-DR10/15
(1) Irradiator
Setup Flow
System Configuration
(2) Code
The SR-D100 Series is used with the following devices.

(3) Connector
SR-D100 Series Host
PC
RS-232C
(4) Location where
the unit is installed
I/O terminal
Number Name Function Ethernet PLC

(1) Irradiator The LED emits light.
(2) Cord Cord length 0.3 m.
(3) Connector Connect to the SR-D100 Series.
Location where the unit
(4) Used to install the light and the SR-D100 Series.
is installed
Monitor
 SR-DS3
SR-M80
Light port
(2) Cord
(1) Irradiator (3) Connector
Configuration tool External light
SR-DR10 SR-DR15
PC
(1) Irradiator The LED emits light.
(2) Cord Cord length 0.4 m.
(3) Connector Connect to the SR-D100 Series.
SR-DS3
SR-D100 Series dedicated monitor AutoID Network Navigator OP-87236
 SR-M80 +
CA Series
• Front view of the main unit • Back of the main unit
Setup flow
(1)
(2)
(3)
This section describes setup flow before staring operation of SR-D100 Series.
(4)
1 After unpacking the package, first check the package contents.

Shows the read image.
(1) Display and touch panel Press the displayed button to switch images or perform read
test.
(2) POWER indicator light Lights up when power is turned on.
(3) Ethernet port Used to connect the Ethernet cable. 2 Connect the SR-D100 Series to a communication unit or a PC.
(4) Supply terminal block The terminal is used to connect power supply (24 V DC±10%).
Use the AutoID Network Navigator to configure and send settings to the
3 SR-D100 Series.
4 Install the SR-D100 Series according to the location.
5 Adjust the reading conditions of the SR-D100 Series.
Start operation.
7 E SR-D100 UM
2-1 Connecting the Control Control cable (NFPA79-compliant) with D-Sub9 pin
z RS-232C wire
Cable and Wiring The tip of the RS-232C wire is a D-sub9-pin.
Connect the control cable to the SR-D100 Series. 5 4 3 2 1 D-sub9 pin (Female)
DTE specifications (Terminal definition)
Control cable connection method #4-40 screw
9 8 7 6
1 Align the projections on the power control port with the indentations
in the cable connector and fit the cable into the main unit. Pin No. Symbol Description Signal direction
2 TXD Data Send Output
3 RXD Data Receive Input
Engage the projections
in the indentations 5 SGND Signal GND -
to fit in place.
z Control wire (Input/Output signal wire)

The tip of the control wire is a rod terminal.
2 Tighten the connector screw by turning clockwise. Set the screw
tightening torque to 1.5 - 2.0 N•m.
1 mm
10 mm
Wire color Symbol Description

Green IN1 IN1 Input
Gray IN2 IN2 Input
White and blue INCOM Input common
• If the connector is not inserted correctly, pins may break or Pink OUT1 OUT1 Output
insertion mistake may occur, resulting in damage of the Aqua blue OUT2 OUT2 Output
main unit and lighting system. White OUT3 OUT3 Output
• When connecting the connector, insert it so it does not tilt, Black OUTCOM Output common
and then tighten firmly. If it is not tightened firmly, the
NOTICE connector may become loose due to vibration, etc. and
connection failure may occur. z Power wire (Input/Output signal wire)
Also, if tightening is insufficient, the protection rating The tip of the power wire is a Y-shape terminal.
specifications may not be satisfied.
* After tightening firmly with hand, tighten with additional
angle of 90 to 120 degrees using pliers. This is a guideline.
6.6 mm 4.3 mm
Control cable color and the meaning of signal

The following different color lead wires are drawn out of the control cable. Solder 11 mm
the lead wire to the connector using the wire attached to the device to be
connected. Wire color Symbol Description
Brown 24 V +24V Power supply
Wire color Symbol Description Signal direction AWG size
Blue 0V Power supply GND
+24 V power
Brown 24 V Input 26 Black tube FG FG
supply
Power supply
Blue 0V ― 26
GND
Connecting the power cable
RS-232C
Orange RXD Input 28
Receive
Yellow TXD RS-232C Send Output 28
Purple SGND RS-232CGND ― 28 +24 V Brown 24 V DC ±10%
+
Green IN1 IN1 Input Input 26
Gray IN2 IN2 Input Input 28 0V Blue
Input common
White and blue INCOM ― 28
mode voltage
Pink OUT1 OUT1 Output Output 28 • Use a steady power supply voltage of 24 V DC ±10%.
Aqua blue OUT2 OUT2 Output Output 28 • Do not use the SR-D100 Series from a power supply other than
24 V DC. Otherwise, it may cause failure.
White OUT3 OUT3 Output Output 28
• Before connecting or disconnecting cables, make sure to turn
Output common NOTICE
Black OUTCOM ― 28 off power to the equipment connected to the SR-D100 Series.
mode voltage
Otherwise, it may cause the failure of the SR-D100 Series.
Black tube FG FG ― ― • When obtaining the UL Standards, use NEC Class 2 output
power supply.
Be sure to connect or disconnect the control cable when power is
NOTICE
turned off.
E SR-D100 UM 8
Connecting the FG wire Wiring the RS-232C signal line
Be sure to provide Class D ground for the FG wire. Connect to host devices (PC, PLC, etc.) as illustrated below:
Connection to a PC
FG Black tube
PC SR-D100 Series
RxD 2 Yellow TxD

TxD 3 Orange RxD
IN1/IN2 wire connection GND (SG) 5 Purple SGND
RTS 7
• The IN1 (timing) input means the input that causes the SR-D100 Series to start CTS 8
DTR (ER) 4
reading (allow the illuminating light source to emit light). DSR (DR) 6
• The IN2 (preset) input means the input that causes the SR-D100 Series to
D-Sub 9 pin
register preset data. (female)
The IN1/IN2 input is implemented through induced voltage input. #4-40 screw
Contact
or
Connection to the handheld programmer for the
non-contact
Photocoupler isolation KEYENCE KV Series
10kΩ
IN1 (Green)
IN2 (Gray)
Internal circuit
Handheld programmer SR-D100 Series
+ RD 3 Yellow TxD
5.6kΩ
SD 5 Orange RxD
INCOM SG 4 Purple SGND
(White and blue)
Modular
Connector
• Input rating : 15 - 26.4 V DC

• Repetitive peak off-state current : 0.2 mA Connection to the KV-L21V/L20V/L20R/N10L
Connecting a photoelectric sensor manufactured by KV-L20V/L20R (Port 1) SR-D100 Series
KV-N10L
KEYENCE Yellow
RD 2 TxD
For this connection, the IN1 terminal is used as the trigger input terminal. SD 3 Orange RxD
RS 7 Purple SGND
INCOM IN1
CS 8
(White and blue) (Green) Photoelectric Sensor (NPN)
ER 4
Brown (red) DR 6
SG 5
Black (white)
D-Sub 9 pin
Blue (black) (female)
#4-40 screw
KV-L20V/L20R (Port 2) SR-D100 Series

Connecting the OUT1/OUT2/OUT3 wires
SD 3 Yellow TxD
RD 5 Orange RxD
• The OUT1 (OK) output is used as an output for successful reading and Purple
SG 1 SGND
comparison of OK as a result of checking against the preset data.
• The OUT2 (NG/ERROR) output is used as an output for reading failure and
comparison of NG reading as a result of checking against the preset data. Connection to the QJ71C24N/-R2
• OUT3 (BUSY) is output any time the trigger input cannot be accepted. For
QJ71C24N/-R2 SR-D100 Series
example, a busy signal will be output at initial start-up, reading operation, etc.
2 Yellow
The output form of each signal is photo MOS relay. RD TxD
SD 3 Orange RxD
RS 7 Purple SGND
OUT1 (Pink),
CS 8
Internal circuit
OUT2 (Aqua blue),

OUT3 (White) ER 4
Load DR 6
OUT COM
SG 5
+
(Black) CD 1
D-Sub 9 pin
(male)
M2.6 screw
• Maximum rated load : 30 V DC (100 mA)
• Leakage current when OFF : 0.1 mA or less
• Residual voltage when ON : 1 V or less
Connection to the SYSMAC Series PLC
CJ1W-SCU(-V1)
Connection with KEYENCE PLC (programmable logic CS1W-SCU-V1
controller) CS1W-SCB-V1
CP1W-CIF01
OUT OUT OUT OUT PLC SR-D100 Series
COM 1 2 (Aqua 3
(Black) (Pink) blue) (White) SD 2 Yellow TxD
PLC RD 3 Orange RxD
RS 4 Purple SGND
0002
CS 5
0001
SG 9
0000
C D-Sub 9 pin
(male)
M2.6 screw
9 E SR-D100 UM
2-2 Connecting the Ethernet 2 Tighten the connector screw by turning clockwise. Set the screw
tightening torque to 1 - 1.5 N•m.
Cable and Light
Connect the Ethernet cable and light to the SR-D100 Series.
Ethernet cable connection method
1 Align the 3 indentations in the Ethernet port on the main unit with the
3 projections on the connector on the cable and fit the cable into the
main unit. • If the connector is not inserted correctly, pins may break or
insertion mistake may occur, resulting in damage of the
main unit and lighting system.
in the indentations
• When connecting the connector, insert it not to lean toward
to fit in place. one side and securely tighten it. Under-tightening can lead
NOTICE to loose connector due to vibrations, resulting in poor
contact.
Insufficient tightening may not meet the requirements of the
2 Tighten the connector screw by turning clockwise. When connecting
protective structure.
* To get a rough idea, after tightening it by hand, retighten it
the connector, insert it not to lean toward one side and push in to approximately 45° - 60° using a tool such as pliers.
securely tighten it.
* The conversion cable for the external light can be connected to the SM
(2)
(1) Tighten the screw. connector of the LED Light CA Series as it is.
(2) If the screw stops halfway, press in the cable and retighten it.
(1)
Repeat the steps (1) and (2) until you cannot tighten it by hand any
more, then retighten it using a tool such as pliers. Tightening torque
and the amount of retightening are as follows:
2-3 How to Connect and Wire
the SR-M80
OP-87227/87228/87229··· Tightening torque: 0.6 N•m Amount of
retightening: 15 - 30°
OP-87230/87231/87232··· Tightening torque: 0.8 - 1.0 N•m Amount
of retightening: 5 - 10°
This section describes the method for connecting power supply terminals and
wiring as well as the Ethernet cable connection method.
3 Finally, verify that the clearance between the Ethernet port on the
 Connecting power supply terminals
SD-R100 Series and the cable connector is 1 mm or less.
 Terminal specifications
Item Description
Wire size AWG14-20
Tightening torque 0.5N•m {5kgf•cm}
Wire material Copper
24 V DC±10% N.C
Wire type Stranded wire
1 mm or less
Electric wire
60°C
temperature rating
• If the connector is not inserted correctly, pins may break or

insertion mistake may occur, resulting in damage of the Connect the 24 V DC ±10% power supply to the power supply terminal as shown in
main unit and lighting system. the figure below:
• Under-tightening connector cable can lead to loose
NOTICE
connector due to vibrations, resulting in poor contact or
Noise
detachment of the cable. Insufficient tightening may not Power supply
filter
Main unit
meet the requirements of the protective structure.
DC24V±10%
Securely tighten the cable by performing the above steps. Twist
Wrap a ferritic core (CAT3035-1330 manufactured by TDK or OP-84289 by

Method for connecting conversion cables for
KEYENCE) by taking three turns around the power line within 100 mm from the
dedicated light and external light terminal block.
 Connecting the Ethernet port

1 Align the projections on the light port with the indentations in the
cable connector and fit the cable into the main unit. Use a "straight cable" when connecting the SR-M80 to a hub and use the SR-D100
dedicated Ethernet cable when connecting it to the SR-D100 Series.
SR-M80 HUB
in the indentations
to fit in place.
Straight cable
SR-D100 Series
Dedicated cable for the SR-D100
* Use Category 5 or higher cable.

* The extended length must not exceed 100 m.
The SR-M80 does not support PoE (Power over Ethernet).
NOTICE
Be sure to supply 24 V DC power to the power terminal.
E SR-D100 UM 10
3-1 Using the SR-D100 Series TEST Button Operation Procedure
Operating the TEST button activates the following operations:
This section describes basic uses for performing reading operation using the SR-
D100 Series.  TEST Button Operation
The TEST button procedure and operations are as follows:
Basic steps To finish each operation, press the TEST button once briefly again.
Operation LED display Operation
Before using the SR-D100 Series, register codes and conduct read test by
Press once briefly
performing the following steps: Runs 1 read operation.
(2 seconds or
fewer).
LED1 LED2 LED3 LED4 LED5 When the code is read, the light turns off.*1
(1) Setting reading conditions
Press twice
Perform tuning operation on the SR-D100 Series. Use the AutoID briefly.
The pointer emits light.
LED1 LED2 LED3 LED4 LED5
Network Navigator for tuning operation.
Hold for 2
• "5-4 Configuration" (Page 41) seconds and Runs the reading rate measurement test mode.
(2) Read test release.
After tuning is complete, check if stable reading can be performed. Hold for 3
Activate the read test mode of the SR-D100 Series to check reading seconds and LED1 LED2 LED3 LED4 LED5
Runs the read time test mode.
release.
stability and reading tact.
Hold for 4
• "3-4 Test Mode" (Page 14) seconds and The Quick Setup Code read mode is activated.
• "5-8 LiveView" (Page 58) release.
(3) Determination of operation BOOTP connection mode is activated.

Consider how to use the SR-D100 Series. Hold for 5 LED1 LED2 LED3 LED4 LED5 When you enter BOOTP connection mode to
The SR-D100 Series features the functions that lead to stable seconds and connect to the AutoID Network Navigator in the
release. operation process, you can assign a temporary IP
reading and reduction in control man-hours.
address.
 Functions that lead to stable reading
Hold for 6
Preparations
• "3-2 Alternate Function" (Page 12) seconds and

Set the communication parameters of the RS-232C
• "3-4 Test Mode" (Page 14) LED1 LED2 LED3 LED4 LED5 to default settings.*2
release.
 Functions that lead to reduction in control man-hours
*1 When the code cannot be read, press the TEST button again, then the light will
• "3-3 Preset/Comparison Function" (Page 13)
turn off.
• "3-5 Multi-I/O Function" (Page 16)
*2 The factory communication parameter settings of the RS-232C are as follows:
• "3-7 Silent Mode" (Page 18)
Baud rate : 115200 bps Header : None
• "3-11 Edit data function/Edit image file name function" (Page 26)
Data bit length : 8 bits Terminator : CR
• "3-12 Duplicate reading prevention interval reset" (Page 28)
Parity : Even Stop bit length : 1 bit
• "3-13 Changeover function" (Page 28)
 Connection with control devices
• "2-1 Connecting the Control Cable and Wiring" (Page 8) Operation of I/O terminals
• "8-1 Communication of the SR-D100 Series" (Page 83)
 Communication with control devices The default settings of the I/O terminals of the SR-D100 Series are as follows:
• "9-1 Details of Command Communication" (Page 90)
Terminal Function
• "10-1 PLC Link" (Page 100)
IN1 Trigger input
• "12-1 EtherNet/IP" (Page 109) Input terminal
IN2 Preset input
• "13-1 PROFINET" (Page 124)
OUT1 OK
(4) Start of Operation
OUT2 NG/ERROR
The SR-D100 Series has the functions and devices that are useful
Output terminal TRG BUSY
for analyzing reading errors or the like that occur during operation.
LOCK BUSY
• "3-6 Matching level OK/NG Judgment Function" (Page 17) OUT3
MODE BUSY
Operation
• "3-10 Code quality verification function" (Page 21)

Start of
ERR BUSY
• "8-2 Data Communication Format" (Page 84)
• "3-8 Image Saving Function" (Page 18)  Steps of operation
• "8-6 FTP Communication" (Page 89)
When reading codes using the I/O terminals of the factory-configured SR-D100
• "6-1 Outline of the SR-M80" (Page 70)
Series, the following mode of operation is activated:
• "14-1 Installing MultiMonitor" (Page 127)
(1) When the trigger input (IN1) turns on, the SR-D100 light flashes.
(2) During timing ON, the BUSY signal (OUT3) turns on.
(3) When the code is read, the light turns off and the Read OK (OUT1) turns on.
(4) If the code cannot be read, the Read Error Signal (OUT2) turns on when the
trigger input (IN1) turns off.
(5) Upon switching off the light, the BUSY Signal (OUT3) turns off.
11 E SR-D100 UM
 Default timing diagram Alternate Function Operations
(When reading is successful) (When reading failed)
The following flow chart illustrates operations that occur during the alternate
Trigger input (IN1) function:
Code Start reading
Emission of light
Select parameter bank
Data communication*
OK ERROR Scanning
Reading OK/error
(OUT1) (OUT2)
BUSY signal (OUT3)

Decoding
* Read data and read error data are output regardless of Default configuration. To
check data, start the AutoID Network Navigator terminal. NO YES
3-2
Was reading
Alternate Function
successful within YES
Within internal bank
retry count? decode timeout
period?
This section describes the alternate function. NO
Level trigger turned off?

or
Parameter banks NO
One-shot
timeout?
The SR-D100 Series sets parameters necessary for code recognition such as scan
conditions and filter conditions. YES
Location where this setting is stored is called a "Parameter Bank". Read error Reading success
The SR-D100 Series has 16 parameter banks. Multiple optimal parameters can be
* Reading starts from the bank set as the "Alternate start bank".
registered according to work conditions and printing conditions.
The following settings are stored in the parameter bank.

Important Since the alternate function continues reading by changing the
• Code type··· Set the version of the code to be read, the number of parameter banks one at a time, it requires a longer time to select
codes, and the output length limitation function. the parameter bank with optimum settings. (The processing time
• Internal light/External light··· Set the lighting patterns and light intensity. depends on the decode timeout period setting.)
• Scan conditions··· Set exposure time, gain, and dynamic range. The alternate function is turned off by default. The function is
• Filter··· Select filter function and filter count. enabled after settings are registered with any of the parameter
• Others··· Set read conditions, alternate setup, and algorithm. banks.
The alternate function is disabled in the following cases:
* For information on parameter bank items, refer to "5-4 Configuration" (Page • When the alternate function is turned off for all parameter banks
41). • When the bank specify trigger input command (LON01 to 16) is
sent to directly specify the parameter bank for reading. Refer to
( "Operation Commands (Page 90)").
Alternate Function
The SR-D100 Series can switch between multiple parameter banks that are
registered for the code to be read while performing the read operation.  Bank prioritizing function
The "Alternate Function" automatically switches between parameter banks to When the bank prioritizing function is set to "Enable" and reading is completed
perform a stable read operation using optimal parameters. successfully, the next reading starts using the parameter bank for successful
Even when there are fluctuations in printing conditions or reading distance, since it reading.
operates by switching between multiple parameter banks during a single read When codes with the same reading conditions are repeatedly decoded due to a
operation, a stable read operation is provided. change in lot or the like, the reader can begin reading based on the previous
By default, read operation is performed using the parameter bank 0 (bank for read successful bank parameters, which may result in a shorter reading time.
quick setup code).
Operation of the bank prioritizing function when parameter banks 1 to 3 are
used
The reading order is changed to start reading from the parameter bank of the
previous successful reading.
Reading Parameter bank Reading Parameter bank
order No. order No.
1 1 1 3
2 2 2 1
Reading
3 3 Success
3 2
Point
The bank prioritizing function is effective only in Operation mode.
The reading order is reset to the default setting when one of the
following operations is performed:
• Stopping the power supply
• Entering the test mode
• Sending the reset command (RESET)
E SR-D100 UM 12
 Bank support function Functions of "!" and "?" in the preset data (wild cards)
The SR-D100 Series has the function of automatically assigning settings between
registered parameter banks after calibrating reference work (printing) and limit Registering "!" or "?" with the preset data increases the flexibility when comparing
work (printing) and registering with the specified parameter bank. and comparing the code data against the preset data.
This function is called bank support function which provides reduction in man-hours "!" .......This character represents an unlimited number of digits and can be used
of calibrating all the differences in assumed read conditions. when any character for any number of digits is OK. If the preset data is "A B
C!", all codes that begin with "ABC" are compared as a match. If the preset
The bank support function offers the following 2 types of support: data is "!ABC", all codes that end with "ABC" are compared as a match. A
• Brightness support ········· Create parameter bank settings so that the brightness maximum of 1 "!" can be registered with the preset data.
between 2 parameter banks can be supplemented. "?" ......This character represents 1 digit and can be used when any one character
• Partial lighting support ··· Create parameter bank settings so that the lighting is OK. If the preset data is "A B??5 6", any 2 characters positioned in ?? are
block patterns of the can be supplemented. compared as a match. By default, the PRESET output is not assigned to
any of the OUT1 to OUT3 terminals. To connect the PRESET OK output to
* For more information on the bank support function, refer to "5-12 Support an external device, you need to assign the PRESET OK output to an
Bank Function" (Page 61). appropriate OUT terminal.
Reference If no preset data is registered, the SR-D100 Series automatically
3-3 Preset/Comparison Function

assumes that "!" is registered as the preset data. Consequently, it
outputs OK when it reads a 2D code successfully and outputs ERROR
when it fails reading, regardless of the data of the 2D code.
This section describes the preset/comparison function.
Sequence Comparison Function
Preset/Comparison Function This function is used to compare numerical values by adding/subtracting a certain
value to/from the preset value after every comparison.
This function allows the SR-D100 Series to compare the read code data against When the comparison is OK, a value is added to/subtracted from the preset value.
the registered code data (preset data), and output an OK/NG signal to indicate When the comparison is NG, neither addition nor subtraction is performed.
whether or not they match. This allows the SR-D100 Series to perform simple This function allows comparison of codes including numerical values which
detection of different codes without a sensor or other devices. increase/decrease by 1, such as work piece serial numbers.
One set of preset data can be stored in the SR-D100 Series (maximum 494 digits). When the sequence comparison is set, a specified value is added to or subtracted
The starting digit (starting position) and range (number of digits) for the comparison from the first numerical value read after the setup or power-on, and the resulting
can be set in the preset data, so even codes with more than 494 digits can be value is used as the preset data.
verified. When the PRESET input terminal is turned on during the automatic increment
comparison, the current preset value is cleared, and the data to be loaded next is
Point The comparison starts at the specified starting position on the used as the first load data.
preset data and continues for the specified number of digits. Data
cannot be verified at multiple points. The sequence comparison requires the following settings:
• Comparison method........Select "Auto increment".
• Starting digit ....................Set the number of digits where the comparison starts
Registering preset data • Increment ........................Enter a value used to add to or subtract from the read
code value.
Use one of the following procedures to register preset data with the SR-D100 • No. of digits .....................For the numerical comparison, the acceptable number
Series: of digits is 1 to 9 digits.
• Read a target code by turning on the external input terminal.
(You need to assign the preset data registration function to the external input The following is the operation example when the starting digit is the third one, two
terminal in advance.) "Functions assigned to the input terminals" "3-5 Multi-I/O digits are referenced and an increment of +2 is specified:
Function" (Page 16) First reading Reading + Comparison Reading + Comparison Reading + Comparison
• Set with the AutoID Network Navigator "5-4 Configuration" (Page 41)
• Set with a setup command "9-3 Details of Configuration Commands" (Page Data A0 96 B A0 98 B A0 96 B A0 00 B
94) Preset value Comparison Comparison Comparison
+2 Numerical value Numerical value
+2 +2
 Output data format for the preset registration result Preset value 98 98 00 00
The following output data format is used when the preset data is registered. "Comparison
OK"
"Comparison
NG"
"Comparison
OK"
PR nn : Result data nn = Preset registration result (00 to 05)

Point The following restrictions are placed on the sequence comparison
function:
nn Description Result data • The comparison results in NG when a value other than a
00 Preset registration success Read data numerical value is read.
• The preset data cannot be registered through communication.
01 Preset read failure Read error data
02 The preset effective digit is specified as 0.
The number of digits of read data is less

03
than the number of digits for preset start.
The preset registration is not possible [null]

04 because the operation mode is set to multi
2 or multiple read.
05 Two or more "!" exist in preset data.
Output terminal operation

The output terminals perform the following operation:
• Reading successful and matches preset data ............. OK is output
• Reading successful but does not match preset data ... NG is output
• Read error.................................................................... ERROR is output
• Preset data is registered successfully.......................... PRESET OK is output
Point By default, the PRESET OK output is not assigned to any of the

OUT1 to OUT3 terminals. To connect the PRESET OK output to an
external device, you need to assign the PRESET OK output to an
appropriate OUT terminal.
13 E SR-D100 UM
3-4 Test Mode Test Mode Measurement Status
When the SR-D100 Series test mode is used, the display is shown as follows:
This section describes the test mode of the SR-D100 Series.
Description of test
Description
LED status Code position
of display
SR-D100 Series Test Mode Reading rate Read time test
measurement
Function Description 5 bars lit 81 to 100% Up to 99 LEVEL5

Scans codes 10 times and measures the reading
Offline rate according to the number of times that the code 4 bars lit 61 to 80% 100 to 199 LEVEL4
was read correctly. LED1 LED2 LED3 LED4 LED5
Reading rate test mode
This test mode checks the number of successful
Offline decodes against the number of decodes attempted 3 bars lit 41 to 60% 200 to 299 LEVEL3
while the trigger input is turned ON.
This test mode measures the amount of time that it 2 bars lit 21 to 40% 300 to 399 LEVEL2
Offline takes to read a code and outputs the result of LED1 LED2 LED3 LED4 LED5
decoding 10 times.
Read time test mode 1 bars lit 1 to 20% 400 or more LEVEL1
This test mode measures the amount of time that it
Offline takes to read a code and outputs the result when
the trigger input turns OFF.
No bar lit Read error
Code position In this test mode, the level that indicates how far the LED1 LED2 LED3 LED4 LED5
measurement test Offline code shifts from the center of the field of view is
mode measured.
Test Mode Details
For more information about the TEST button operation of the SR-D100 or the
multiple LED status display, refer to "3-1 Using the SR-D100 Series" (Page 11). This section describes the advanced details of each test mode.
Reference It is also possible to perform the test mode by specifying a parameter
bank. Reading rate test mode
( "9-2 Operation Commands" (Page 90))
If no parameter banks have setting values, the test mode is performed This test mode measures the reading rate according to the number of times that
for the parameter bank 0 (bank for read quick setup code). the code was read correctly.
The offline mode measures the reading rate based on the number of times that the
Online and offline modes code was read correctly out of 10 readings.
The offline test mode outputs the reading rate which is obtained from the number of
decodes against the number of decodes attempted while the trigger input is ON.
 Offline mode
Offline mode is used to determine whether the installation location and distance The parameter bank switches while scanning, just as when reading with the
present any problem before actually installing the equipment. alternate function. When reading is successful, the parameter bank used for
The results from the beginning to the end of the test (through TEST command or reading is fixed and the reading rate is calculated.
TEST button operation) are displayed in offline mode. When a read error occurs, the test mode switches to another parameter bank and
The test result data is output in real time. continues the measurement.
Activate the test. Stop the test.
 Starting reading rate test mode
The following procedures can be used to start the reading rate test mode:
Test operations
• Operate the button (hold for 2 seconds).
Testing
Testing Press the button once briefly.
• Send the TEST1 (#TEST1) command from the computer.
 Online mode Send the QUIT command (#QUIT) from the computer.
• Assign "Start test mode" and "Reading rate test mode" to the IN terminals and
After installing the SR-D100 Series, online mode is used to determine if there are
turn on the input terminals.
any problems with the installation location or distance, reading time, or other
Turn off the input terminal.
operations.
After switching to online test mode, the test displays the results obtained after the
trigger input is turned on until it is turned off.
The test result data is output when the trigger input turns off.
The online test mode must be activated through the command input.
Activate the test. Stop the test.
Test commands Timing ON Timing OFF
Timing operation
Testing
Testing
E SR-D100 UM 14
 Reading rate test mode output data  Read time test mode output data
Offline mode Offline mode
In offline mode, data is sent to the computer in the following format after 10 read In offline mode, data is sent to the computer in the following format after 10
operations: successful decodes or after every error decode:
Online mode
Read data : a : b % : d
In online mode, data is sent to the computer in the following format when the trigger
input is turned OFF:
a = Parameter bank No.
(00 to 16)
b = Reading rate (The format is the same for offline and online modes.)
(1 to 100: Zero suppress)
d = Matching level Read data : a : now = b ms : max = c ms : min = d ms
(0 to 100)

(00 to 16)
b = Latest reading time
c = Maximum read time
(Maximum value of the read
operation from starting the read time
Online mode test mode to outputting data)
In online mode, data is sent to the computer in the following format when the trigger d = Minimum read time
(Maximum value of the read
input is turned OFF: operation from starting the read time
test mode to outputting data)
Read data : a : b % : c : d * The values for b, c, and d will be
zero suppressed.
a = Parameter bank No. Reference • When starting test mode, the data addition function is inactive.
(00 to 16)
b = Reading rate • When TEST2nn (#TEST2nn) (nn: Parameter bank No.) is sent, the
(1 to 100: Zero suppress) read time test mode is run for the bank with the specified parameter
c = No. of decodes/No. of scans
(1 to 65535/1 to 65535) bank number.
d = Matching level • When the TEST2nn (#TEST2nn) command is sent or when there is
(0 to 100)
only 1 parameter bank for reading, the specified decode timeout
period is ignored and read operation is performed with a decode
timeout period of 2550 ms. If it has been determined that the image
Reference • When starting test mode, the data addition function is inactive. cannot be decoded, measurement of the image is stopped without
• When TEST1nn (#TEST1nn) (nn: Parameter bank No.) is sent, the waiting for the decode timeout period expiration.
reading rate test mode is run for the bank with the specified
parameter bank number. Code position measurement test mode
Read time test mode This test mode measures the level that indicates how far the code shifts from the
center of the field of view.
This test mode measures the amount of time that it takes to read a code and This test mode can be used to perceive the amount of displacement and adjust
outputs the result. both the code position and the SR-D100 Series installation location.
The parameter bank switches while scanning, just as when reading with the Ideal position (LEVEL5) Shifted position (LEVEL1)
alternate function. If reading is successful, the amount of time required from the
start of reading until the completion of reading is measured and output. If the
decoding fails, the read time becomes 0 ms.
 Starting read time test mode

The following procedures can be used to start read time test mode:
• Operate the button (hold for 3 seconds).
Press the button once briefly to finish.
• Send the TEST2 (#TEST2) command from the computer. The center of the code should coincide with The code is displaced from the center of the
Send the QUIT command (#QUIT) from the computer to finish. the center of the field of view. field of view.
• Set "Start test mode" and "Reading rate test" to the IN terminals and turn on the
input terminals.
 Starting code position measurement test mode
Turn off the input terminal. The following procedures can be used to start code position measurement mode:
• Send the TEST3 command from the computer.
Send the QUIT command from the computer.
• Assign "Start test mode" and "Position measurement mode" to the IN terminals
and turn on the input terminals.
Turn off the input terminal to finish.
15 E SR-D100 UM
 Code position measurement test mode output data  IN LED synchronization
During code position measurement test mode, data of the average of 10 scans (the Users can set the SR-D100 Series to illuminate its IN1/IN2 LED when the IN1 or
fractional portion is dropped) is sent to the computer in the following format after IN2 terminal turns on. (By default, only the IN1 terminal synchronizes with the
scanning 10 times: LED.)
Read data : a : level = b  Input polarity setting

The polarity of the input terminal can be selected from "N.O. (normally open)
(00 to 16)
contact" or "N.C. (normally closed) contact".
b = Position level (0 to 5) (By default, "N.O. contact" is selected.)
The same input polarity is set for IN1 and IN2.
 ON at power-on setting
Normally, the input terminal recognizes the change in the input signal (ON/OFF)
after the SR-D100 Series is turned on and its operation stabilizes.
Even if the input signal turns ON, the input terminal does not operate before the
Reference • When starting test mode, the data addition function is inactive. operation stabilizes (approximately five seconds after power on).
• The code position measurement test mode does not run in online When "ON at power-on" is enabled, the SR-D100 Series recognizes the input ON
mode. status during the start-up period, and after the operation stabilizes, it performs the
• When TEST3nn (nn: Parameter bank No.) is sent, the code position operation specified for the input signal.
test mode is run for the bank with the specified parameter bank (By default, "ON at power-on" is disabled.)
number.
 Input time constant setting
3-5 Multi-I/O Function Users can set the "Input time constant", which is the period required for the ON of
the input terminal to be recognized. The function assigned to the input terminal is
activated after the input stays on for the time specified with "Input time constant" or
You can assign various operating conditions to the I/O terminals of the SR-D100 longer.
Series. This section describes operations available with the Multi-I/O function. (Input time constant setting range: Selectable from 1 ms, 2 ms or 10 ms; default
setting is 2 ms.)
Function and Operation of the Input Terminals (IN1 and IN2) Operation of Norm. open and Norm. closed
Functions assigned to the input terminals  Norm. open (Normally open)
Only 1 of the following functions can be assigned to each of the input terminals IN1 • Normal
and IN2:
• Trigger input: Use as the input terminal to start/stop reading codes. Timing input
ON
• Preset data input: Use as the input terminal to register preset data.
Reading operation
• Start test mode: Use as an input terminal to activate the specified test mode.
(This function cannot be used to start the online test mode.)
• Capture: Use as an input terminal to capture 1 image with the specified  Norm. closed (Normally closed)
parameter bank number.
• Normal
• Stop PLC link error: Use as an input terminal to stop the PLC link error.
• Trigger lock: Use as an input terminal to forcefully stop all read and scan
Timing input
operations. ON
• Read the quick setup code: Use as an input terminal to read the quick setup Reading operation
code created by the AutoID Network Navigator.
• None: Select this option when the terminal is not used as an input terminal. • Power-on trigger setting
Use AutoID Network Navigator or setup command to change the setting or assign
the desired function. Timing input
ON
* By default, the functions are assigned as follows: Reading operation
IN1: Trigger input

IN2: Preset input
Function and Operation of the Output Terminals (OUT1, OUT2, and OUT3)
Input terminal status and operation
Functions assigned to the output terminals
The table below shows the relationship between the status of the input terminal
and operation of the assigned function: The following functions can be assigned to the output terminals (OUT1 to OUT3).
You can assign 1 or more functions to each output terminal.
Function assigned to
ON OFF • OK .................... This signal is output when a bar code is read successfully or
the input terminal
Stop reading (at the time of level
when comparison/verification against preset data matches.
Trigger input Start reading • NG.................... This signal is output when comparison/verification against the
trigger)
Finish preset data input (at the
preset data does not match.
Preset input Start preset data input • ERROR ............ This signal is output when a read error occurs.
time of level trigger)
Start test mode Activate the test mode Quit the test mode
• STABLE............ This signal is output when reading is stable ("Matching level
assessment function" or "Code quality verification function" is
Capture Start capturing images ―
enabled and the matching level or Code quality verification result
Stop PLC error Stop error ―
exceeds the set threshold).
Trigger lock Forced trigger lock Release forced trigger • UNSTABLE ...... This signal is output when reading is unstable ("Matching level
Read the quick setup Start the quick setup code Quit the quick setup code assessment function" or "Code quality verification function" is
code reading reading. enabled and the matching level or Code quality verification result
* When the trigger input measurement method is specified for "One-shot trigger", falls below the set threshold).
the functions of operating only for the time of measuring one-shot trigger are • PRESET OK .... This signal is output when the preset data is registered
"Trigger input" and "Preset registration". successfully.
* The other functions, "Start test mode", "Capture", "Trigger lock", "Quick setup
code reading" are active based on the level signal trigger regardless of the
measurement method setting for the trigger input.
E SR-D100 UM 16
• TRG/LOCK/MODE/ERR BUSY ....This signal is output to notify the user that the SR-
D100 Series cannot read codes because it is 3-6 Matching level OK/NG
performing a specific operation.
Depending on the operation, the output can be Judgment Function
assigned to the following functions:
TRG BUSY ..... During the start-up period, trigger This section describes the matching function of the SR-D100 Series.
input, preset data registration, or
quick setup code reading
LOCK BUSY ....Forced trigger lock is being applied Matching level
MODE BUSY ... During online test
Matching level is a reference value for determining how easy it is for the SR-D100 to read
ERR BUSY ..... Error occurred (Buffer full, PLC
the code for successful image reading when the SR-D100 reads the code successfully.
link error)
It can be used to check the reading allowance or it can also be used as correlation
• FILE BUSY....... This signal is output when image files are being saved to ROM.
index of a parameter bank when calibrating.
NOTICE Do not turn off the SR-D100 Series during FILE BUSY.
Point Since the QR code and DataMatrix have the error correcting symbol,
Point
data can be restored even if the code is partially corrupted. Therefore,
The result output (OK/NG/ERROR/STABLE/UNSTABLE/PRESET
the reading rate may become 100%. However, because the matching
OK) and operation output (TRG/LOCK/MODE/ERR/FILE BUSY)
level is a value that represents ease of code reading, the matching
cannot be assigned to the same terminal.
level varies depending on code marking, corruption condition, and
difference in read conditions even if the reading rate is 100%.
By checking the matching level, the function can be used as an
Output terminal operation index for determining optimum marking conditions for reading
when specifications of code marking conditions are considered.
The output terminals operate differently depending on the assigned function. There
are 2 types of operations as follows:
 OK, NG, ERROR, STABLE, UNSTABLE and PRESET OK Matching level OK/NG judgment function
output
Matching level OK/NG judgment function notifies about changes in code marking
The above signals turn on the output for the specified output ON time when the conditions and changes in read conditions by determining whether the matching level is
respective event occurs. high or low against the set threshold. Before a serious problem occurs due to reduced
ON
stability of reading, this function can be used as information to take an appropriate action.
Event occurrence Criteria for judging matching level

OK/NG/ERROR ON
STABLE/UNSTABLE/ Criteria for judging the matching level is as follows:
PRESET OK
Period of time set for output ON time
High: Matching level >= Threshold
Low: Matching level < Threshold
* For the above output functions, a higher priority is assigned to the output of the
function which occurred last. Functions that use the matching level OK/NG judgment
Consequently, when the next operation occurs during the output ON time of the previous function
operation, the signal is switched to output the signal of the higher priority function.
The following 4 types of functions can be used by enabling the matching level OK/
Timing diagram (When OUT1 outputs an OK signal and then OUT2 outputs a NG signal)
NG judgment function.
ON  STABLE terminal output, UNSTABLE terminal output

OUT1 STABLE terminal output ......... Output when the matching level exceeds the threshold.
(OK)
UNSTABLE terminal output.... Output when the matching level falls below the threshold.
ON
( "Page 16 Function and Operation of the Output Terminals (OUT1, OUT2, and
OUT3)")
OUT2
(NG) Period of time set for output ON time
 Saving unstably read images
Point If the same operation occurs repeatedly within the period of the When the matching level is lower than the threshold, save it in accordance with the
output ON time, the output turns off for 10 ms and then turns on scan image settings (when set to FTP transmission, send to the destination).
again to output the signal of the next operation. (If the same ( "Page 18 Image Saving Function")
operation occurs continuously at short intervals, the output turns
on for at least 10 ms before it turns off and then turns on again.)  Silent Mode
When the matching level is higher or lower than the threshold, data communication
Timing diagram (When OUT1 outputs signals continuously)
can be restrained using silent mode.
ON
OUT1 10 ms 10 ms 10 ms ( "Page 18 Silent Mode")
(OK)
 Function to append matching level
Other than the example described above, the signal is switched
Matching level can be appended to read data.
when any of the following events occurs:
( "Page 84 Details of Appended Data")
• Change to Test/Read quick setup mode
• Error
• Buffer full
Procedures for setting the matching level OK/NG
judgment function
 TRG BUSY, LOCK BUSY, MODE BUSY, ERR BUSY, and The following 2 procedures for setting the matching level OK/NG judgment function
are available:
FILE BUSY output
• Setting using the AutoID Network Navigator ( "5-4 Configuration" (Page 41))
The above signals are retained until the corresponding event ends. • Setting with a setup command ( "9-3 Details of Configuration Commands"
(The period of time set for the output ON time is not reflected.) (Page 94))
Event occurrence Event end
Point When the matching level OK/NG judgment function is enabled, the
Event
occurrence
decode time becomes longer than when it is disabled.
TRG BUSY/
Perform calibration after enabling the matching level OK/NG judgment
LOCK BUSY/
ON
function or set the decode timeout period required for reading.
MODE BUSY/
ERR BUSY/
Check if it presents any problem to read time for operation using
FILE BUSY Period of time set for output ON time the read time test mode.
( "3-4 Test Mode" (Page 14))
* If all BUSY outputs are assigned to 1 output terminal, the output signal does not
turn off until all events finish.
17 E SR-D100 UM
3-7 Silent Mode Data subject to data communication restraint
By configuring the SR-D100 Series, the following data communication can be
This section describes the silent mode of the SR-D100 Series. restrained.
 Setting items and setting details using the AutoID

Silent mode
Network Navigator
The 2D code reader usually outputs data of the result when the code is read or the
read error code when it is not read. Setting item Data subject to output restraint
The SR-D100 Series can be configured to restrain data communication and not to Comparison OK, Read OK Read data
output the result data to the host computer. Read data judged as Comparison OK as a result of preset
comparison
This function is called "Silent mode".
For example, this function can be used as a code check sensor which outputs an Comparison NG Preset Comparison NG data
Read data judged as Comparison NG as a result of preset
OK signal when the code is read successfully or outputs an ERROR signal when
comparison
reading failed. In addition, it can also be used for collecting data to analyze factors
Read ERROR Read error data
of a comparison error, for example, when "Preset/Comparison function" is used,
comparison OK is not set but read data which was determined as comparison NG Stable Reading (OK/NG) Stable reading data
Read data whose matching level or Code quality verification
when comparison NG occurs is sent.
result is judged as more than the threshold
By configuring the SR-D100 Series not to send all data, it eliminates the need for
Unstable Reading (OK/NG) Unstable reading data
checking the time of data communication and data on the host computer.
Read data whose matching level or Code quality verification
Therefore, the effect of reducing the read time of the entire code reading task can result is judged as less than the threshold
be expected.
Preset Result Preset registration result data
Reference Silent mode is the function of restraining output of the read result data. Test Mode Data in test mode
Therefore, the OUT terminals to which OK/NG/ERROR/STABLE/
UNSTABLE/PRESET OK signals or other BUSY signals are not
restrained.
This function is effective for operation to control I/O and usage for
reducing volume of network communication with a host computer.
3-8 Image Saving Function
This section describes the image saving function of the SR-D100 Series.
 Timing diagram (when OK/NG/ERROR data is restrained)
(When reading is successful) (When reading failed) Image Saving Function
Trigger input
The image saving function is used to save the scan image into RAM/ROM of the
Code SR-D100 Series based on the image saving mode settings or to send to PC via
FTP communication.
Scanning + decoding The image saved can be used as information useful for analyzing causes of read
error or unstable reading.
Data communication
• AutoID Network Navigator setting screen
OK/NG ERROR
OK/NG/ERROR output
TRG BUSY output
Only data is not sent as shown above, but the OUT output terminal performs
normal operation.
Silent mode setting procedure

The following 2 procedures for setting silent mode are available:
• Setting using the AutoID Network Navigator
AutoID Network Navigator setting screen
Image save mode

The following 3 image save modes are available:
• Save final bank image
• Save images after timing input ON
• Save images after timing input OFF
This section describes each mode.
Save final bank image
 Type of images to be saved

The following 5 types of images are saved:
• OK image ............ Images when reading is successful and comparison is OK
(when preset comparison is implemented)
• NG image ............ Images when reading is successful and comparison is NG
Check the box to enable silent mode and set. (when preset comparison is implemented)
• Setting with a command ( "9-3 Details of Configuration Commands" (Page • Error image ......... Images when a read error occurs.
94)) • Unstable image ... Images when the matching level is lower than the threshold
* The matching level OK/NG judgment function needs to be
enabled.
• Captured image .. Images when captured
E SR-D100 UM 18
 Procedure for saving images • In Multi 1 read mode
The set number of images to be saved are continuously saved, starting with the
The image to be saved is determined at the timing of judging reading OK/NG/
image for the parameter bank used first after the trigger input is turned on, or the
ERROR.
image scanned following the previous image successfully read. However, the
Images to be saved are as follows:
image, which is not judged as a successfully read image, will not be saved,
• Reading OK/NG (when read successfully)
regardless of whether it was successfully read due to the duplicate reading
When reading is successful, the images of the parameter bank are saved.
prevention function.
Example) When scanned in the order 1, 2, 3, 1, 2 of the parameter banks while
the trigger input is ON Trigger input
• Single/Multi1/Burst read mode
Code The 1st code The 2nd
code
Trigger input
OK/NG
Code
Reading Reading
OK/NG
Scan image Reading
error
Reading
error
Reading
success
success success
Reading
error
Reading
error
Reading
success
..........
(Same code) (Same code)
The image to be saved as 1 read The image was scanned while the The image to be saved as 1 read operation.
Scan bank Bank 1 Bank 2 Bank 3 Bank 1 Bank 2 operation. Saved within this image duplicate reading prevention function Saved within this image based on settings.
based on settings. was enabled. This image is not saved.
Images to be saved
• In Multi 2 read mode Save images after timing input OFF

Timing input  Type of images to be saved
Code Images to be saved are saved as captured images.
OK/NG  Procedure for saving images

The image to be saved is determined at the timing of judging reading OK/NG/
Scan bank Bank 1 Bank 2 Bank 3 Bank 1 Bank 2 ERROR.
Up to the number of images equivalent to the setting for the number of images to
Images to be saved be saved can be saved.
• Read ERROR
• Single/Multi 2/Burst read mode
The latest images for all the parameter banks used for reading are saved.
The set number of images to be saved are saved retroactively, starting with the
Example) When scanned in the order1, 2, 3, 1, 2 of the parameter banks while
image for the parameter bank used last after the trigger input is turned off.
the trigger input is ON
Example) When reading is successful
• All read mode
Trigger input
Trigger input
Code
Code
OK/NG
ERROR
Scan bank
Scan bank Bank 1 Bank 2 Bank 3 .......... Bank 3 Bank 1 Bank 2
Bank 1 Bank 2 Bank 3 Bank 1 Bank 2
Images to be saved The set number of images to be saved is saved

retroactively, starting with the image last scanned
after the trigger input was turned off.
Save images after timing input ON • In Multi 1 read mode

The images successfully read equivalent to the set number of images to be
 Type of images to be saved saved are saved retroactively, starting with the image for the parameter bank
used first after the trigger input is turned on or the image successfully read from
Images to be saved are saved as captured images. those scanned following the previous image successfully read. However, the
image, which is not judged as a successfully read image, will not be saved,
 Procedure for saving images
regardless of whether it was successfully read due to duplicate reading
The image to be saved is determined when judging reading OK/NG/ERROR. prevention function.
Up to the number of images equivalent to the setting for the number of images to
be saved can be saved. Trigger input

Code The 1st code The 2nd
• Single/Multi 2/Burst read mode code
The set number of images to be saved are continuously saved, starting with the OK/NG
image for the parameter bank used first after the trigger input is turned on.
Example) When reading is successful Scan image Read Read Reading Reading Reading Read Read Reading ..........
success success
error error success (Same code) (Same code) error error success
Trigger input
The image to be saved as 1 read The image was scanned while the The image to be saved as 1 read operation.
operation. Saved within this image duplicate reading prevention function Saved within this image based on settings.
Code
based on settings. was enabled.This image is not saved.
OK/NG
Scan bank Bank 1 Bank 2 Bank 3 .......... Bank 3 Bank 1 Bank 2
The set number of images to be saved is continuously

saved after the trigger input is turned on.
19 E SR-D100 UM
Image file name 3-9 Batch Setting Code
The image file name is set in the following format:
This section describes the quick setup code.
Image type
Saved file number _ Identification _ Bank No. .bmp
character
Quick Setup Code
• Saved file number: 3-digit image file serial number
Users can print the settings specified with AutoID Network Navigator as 2D code
• Image type identification character : Character that indicates the image type
and read the code with the SR-D100 Series to change all the settings at once.
S … Images successfully read
When printing the quick setup code, use the AutoID Network Navigator quick setup
N … Image NG
code printing function.
E … Read error images
Since the settings of the SR-D100 Series can be changed by just reading the quick
W … Unstable images
setup code, you can change the settings even in a location where a computer
C … Instant Capture
cannot be used.
• Bank No: Bank number used to obtain the image.
Example) Successfully read file name with the bank No. 1
 Print image
001_S_01.bmp
 When the edit image file name function is enabled

When sending images via FTP transmission with [Edit image file name] – [Use
script] set to Enable, image file names can be freely changed.
For the edit image file name function, refer to "3-11 Edit data function/Edit
image file name function" (Page 26).
Image save destination

This section describes the image save destination.
 Saving into RAM

A maximum of 80 images can be saved into RAM. If 80 images have already been
saved when saving a new image, the oldest images are deleted in order.
Saved file number: 000 to 999
 Save into ROM

A maximum of 1000 images can be saved into ROM. If 1000 images have already
been saved when saving a new image, the oldest images are deleted in order. Point • When reading the quick setup code with the high-resolution type
Saved file number: 000 to 999 unit (SR-D100H), you must use a printer with high print quality.
When a printer with low print quality is used, the cells in the 2D
 FTP transmission
code may bleed and become unreadable.
When sending an image via FTP, the area prepared for the image to be sent will be • The high-resolution type unit (SR-D100HA) cannot use this
RAM. function because the quick setup code does not fit inside the
( "8-6 FTP Communication" (Page 89)) field of view.
Procedure for reading the quick setup code

Use the following steps to read the quick setup code:
 Reading using the TEST button

Operate the TEST button on the SR-D100 Series to read the quick setup code.
Operation procedure is as follows:
1 Hold down the TEST button on the SR-D100 for four seconds.
2 Read the quick setup code.
The LED lights up in response to the code reading status.
3 When reading of all codes is complete, the OK/NG/ERR LED on the

SR-D100 lights up in green.
4 Press the TEST button once briefly to exit the quick setup code read
mode.
* When reading the quick setup code, the TRG BUSY output turns on.
E SR-D100 UM 20
 Reading using the external input Code quality verification function settings
Assign the quick setup code reading to the IN terminal of the SR-D100 Series and
read the quick setup code using the external input signal. This section describes the setting method of the Code quality verification function
and the setting items.
1 Turn on the IN terminal to which the quick setup code reading
function was assigned. Setting method for the Code quality verification
2 Read the quick setup code. function
To use the Code quality verification function, you need to enable the verification
3 When reading of all codes is complete, the OK/NG/ERR LED on the settings you wish to use.
SR-D100 illuminates green. (1) Setting using the AutoID Network Navigator.
4 When the input signal turns off, the quick setup code read mode is Press the "Code quality verification" button on the "Operation" tab in the
Settings view, and then check the desired verification standard.
finished.
* When reading the quick setup code, the TRG BUSY output turns on.
 Reading using the operation command

Send the operation command and read the quick setup code.
1 Send the quick setup code reading start command.

Send command RCON
Response OK, RCON
2 Read the quick setup code.

(2) Setting using the setup commands
3 When reading of all codes is complete, the OK/NG/ERR LED on the Send commands that enable the verification functions you wish to use.
SR-D100 lights up in green. "9-3 Details of Configuration Commands - Reading behavior configuration
(Page 96)"
4 Send the quick setup code reading quit command to exit the quick
setup code read mode. Point When the Code quality verification function is enabled, the decode
Send command RCOFF time becomes longer than when it is disabled.
Response OK, RCOFF Perform calibration after enabling the Code quality verification
* When reading the quick setup code, the TRG BUSY output turns on. function or set the decode timeout period required for reading.
Use the tact measurement test mode to confirm there is no
3-10 Code quality verification

problem with reading time for operation.
( "3-4 Test Mode" (Page 14))
function
Append Code quality verification result data
This section describes the Code quality verification function.
To append the Code quality verification result data, the additional data setting and
Code quality verification function for the SR-D100 Series data format setting are required.
The Code quality verification function evaluates the level (High/Low) of total grade  Additional data setting
based on the verification result output and the set threshold by verifying the 2D Select "Operation" - "Additional data" on the "Table" tab in the Settings view, and
code scanned with the SR-D100 Series according to the marking quality evaluation then set verification results you wish to append as data to "Enable".
specified by a third-party institution. "5-4 Configuration - Table (Page 51 or later)"
The SR-D100 Series provides the following 2D code verifications according to the "3-10 Code quality verification function - Verification items description (Page 23
Code quality verification standards. or later)"
Standards Description
 Data format setting
This is the 2D code marking quality evaluation standard
ISO/IEC15415 established by International Organization for Standardization. Make the setting relating to the data format.
This is mainly used to evaluate 2D codes printed on labels. Set the following three items.
This is the DPM (Direct Part Marking) 2D code marking quality • Select expression of grades : Set the grade indication of the verification
evaluation standard established by Automatic Identification result to either Alphabet or Numeric.
ISO/IEC TR 29158 Manufacturers. (ISO/IEC15415 and ISO/IEC TR 29158
(AIM DPM-1-2006) This is based on ISO/IEC15415. (AIM DPM-1-2006) only)
This was also standardized by International Organization for • Append detailed verification result : Set whether to append verification items of
Standardization in 2011.
each standard to the total grade.
This is the DataMatrix code marking quality evaluation (ISO/IEC15415, ISO/IEC TR 29158 (AIM
SAE AS9132 standard established by SAE (Society of Automotive
DPM-1-2006) and SAE AS9132 only)
Engineers) and used by the aerospace industry.
• Append values : Set whether to append evaluation values of
This is the DataMatrix code marking quality evaluation
each verification item used for verification
standard established by SEMI (Semiconductor Equipment and
SEMI T10-0701 result evaluation.
Materials International) and printed on semiconductor-related
materials. (ISO/IEC15415, ISO/IEC TR 29158 (AIM
DPM-1-2006) and SAE AS9132 only)
"8-2 Data Communication Format (Page 84)"
Important Note that this Code quality verification function is designed to
evaluate marking quality of the standards-compliant 2D codes of
the images scanned with the SR-D100 Series, but cannot be used
as an official 2D code verification device.
21 E SR-D100 UM
Code quality verification function Evaluation standard Installation method for Code quality verification and lighting patterns
Evaluation by the Code quality verification function is made for the total evaluation This section describes the installation method and lighting patterns for more
grade. precise Code quality verifications.
Evaluation standards are as follows.
Installation method
 ISO/IEC15415, ISO/IEC TR 29158 (AIM DPM-1-2006)
High: Verification result >= Threshold value For Code quality verification, set the camera in front of the code and irradiate the
Low: Verification result < Threshold value 2D code with the angle of 45° as standard. (Verification is possible by irradiating
with the angle of 30° as necessary.)
 SAE AS9132 Install as below using the SR-DR15/DR10.
High: Verification result = Pass
Low: Verification result = Fail
Important SEMI T10-0701 does not offer total evaluation grade and cannot
make evaluations.
This means that functions that can be used after evaluation
cannot be used with SEMI T10-0701.
Functions that can use evaluation results of the Code

quality verification function
 STABLE terminal output, UNSTABLE terminal output

STABLE terminal output......... This is output when the total evaluation grade is the
threshold value or more.
UNSTABLE terminal output ... This is output when the total evaluation grade is less
than the threshold value. Focal distance
( "3-5 Multi-I/O Function (Page 16)") Lighting irradiation
SR-DR15/10 setting angle: X (°)
distance: Y (mm)
 Saving images of unstable reading
When the total evaluation grade is less than the threshold value, scanned images
are saved according to the setting (If the FTP transmission is set, images are sent
to the connection destination.).
( "3-8 Image Saving Function (Page 18)")
 SR-DR15/10 setting distance: Ymm  SR-D100 Series focal distance
 Silent mode
SR-D130 : 300 mm
Lighting angle
When the total evaluation grade is more or less than the threshold value, data X°
SR-DR15 SR-DR10 SR-D110 : 150 mm
communication can be restrained using the silent mode. SR-D100 : 100 mm
45° 61 mm *1 39.5 mm
( "3-7 Silent Mode (Page 18)") SR-D100H : 85 mm
30° 35.2 mm 22.8 mm
SR-D100HA : 40 mm
Point When multiple verifications are in process, these functions
operate in priority to the result which is less than the threshold * Set the SR-D100 Series with the focal distance.
value. * SR-D130 cannot be set in this distance due to the shortage of the length of the
light mounting bracket.
*1 SR-D100HA is not applicable because the setting distance of the light is longer
than the focal distance.
Note when using the Code quality verification function
Reference Verification is also possible with the lighting angle of 90° (=X°). In this
case, use coaxial epi-illumination.
Code quality verification results may change according to the setting of the
parameter bank for scanning. If the color or contrast of the 2D code and
background change, consider preparing the parameter bank setting used as
standard and performing the Code quality verification using the setting.
E SR-D100 UM 22
SR-DR15/DR10 lighting patterns Modulation MOD (Modulation)
Evaluates the variation degree in cell
Description
 Standard lighting patterns brightness.
• For SR-DR15 Each cell's MOD = 2  (abs (R-GT)/SC)

Calculation R : Brightness value ―
Light up the outer circle and outermost circle only.
formula GT : Binarization threshold value
SC : Symbol contrast
Criterion ―
Reflectance margin RM (Reflectance Margin)

Description brightness with black and white of the correct
cell considered.
[White cell]
R >= GT  MARGIN = 2  (R-GT)/SC
• For SR-DR10
R < GT  MARGIN = 0
Light up the center circle and outer circle only. [Black cell]
―
Calculation R < GT  MARGIN = 2  (GT-R)/SC
formula R >=  MARGIN = 0
MARGIN : Margin of each cell
R : Brightness value
GT : Binarization threshold value
SC : Symbol contrast
Criterion ―
Fixed pattern damage FPD (Fixed Pattern Damage)

Evaluates the degree of the fixed pattern
 Special lighting patterns Description damage (area on the right) dependent on the
code type.
For DPM code with hairline background, the lighting may have to be set in one
direction. In this case, set with the lighting angle of 30° and use any of the lighting Calculation
―
patterns below. formula
• For opposed lighting (fig. SR-DR15)
(1) (2) Criterion ―
FID
Format information damage
(Format Information Damage)
Evaluates the format information damage
Description
degree of QR code.
• For partial lighting (fig. SR-DR15)
(1) (2) (3) (4) Calculation
―
formula
Criterion ―
VID
Version information damage
Verification items description (Version Information Damage)
Evaluates the version information damage
ISO/IEC 15415 Description degree of QR code (Model 2, version 2 and
later versions).
Decode success/failure DEC (Decode) Calculation

―
Description Evaluates whether decoding is possible or not. formula
Calculation
― ―
formula
Criterion ―
Criterion ―
Symbol contrast SC (Symbol Contrast)

Evaluates the difference between the
maximum brightness value (Rmax) and
Description
minimum brightness value (Rmin) in the code
area.
SC = (Rmax-Rmin)/255
Calculation
Rmax : Maximum brightness value
formula
Rmin : Minimum brightness value
A : more than 0.70
B : 0.55 to 0.70
Criterion C : 0.40 to 0.55
D : 0.20 to 0.40
F : less than 0.20
23 E SR-D100 UM
Axial nonuniformity AN (Axial Nonuniformity) ISO/IEC TR 29158 (AIM DPM-1-2006)
Evaluates the distortion degree in vertical and
Description
horizontal size of the code. Decode success/failure DEC (Decode)
AN = abs (Xavg = Yavg)/((Xavg = Yavg)/2) Description Evaluates whether decoding is possible or not.
Xavg : Average cell size in horizontal
Calculation Calculation
direction ― ―
formula formula
Yavg : Vertical cell size in horizontal
direction Criterion ―
A : less than 0.06

Cell contrast CC (Cell Contrast)
B : 0.06 to 0.08
Criterion C : 0.08 to 0.10 Evaluates the difference between the average
D : 0.10 to 0.12 Description brightness value of bright cell (ML) and
F : more than 0.12 average brightness value of dark cell (MD).
CC = (ML - MD)/ML
Grid nonuniformity GN (Grid Nonuniformity) ML : Average brightness value of bright
Calculation
Evaluates the maximum position slip of each cell
formula
Description MD : Average brightness value of dark
cell.
cell
GN = Hmax/X
Calculation A : more than 0.30
Hmax : Maximum position slip amount
formula B : 0.25 to 0.30
X : Cell size
A : less than 0.38
D : 0.15 to 0.20
B : 0.38 to 0.50
F : less than 0.15
D : 0.63 to 0.75
Cell modulation CM (Cell Modulation)
F : more than 0.75
Description
UEC brightness
Unused error correction
(Unused Error Correction) [White cell]
Evaluates the ratio of error correction unused CM = (R - GT)/(ML - GT) (When R  GT)
Description [Black cell]
at the time of decoding.
CM = (GT - R)/(GT - MD) (When R  GT)
UEC = 1.0 - ((e + 2t)/(d - p))
Calculation R : Brightness value ―
e : Number of code words that cannot be
formula GT : Binarization threshold value
Calculation read
ML : Average brightness value of bright
formula t : Number of error code words
cell
d : Number of error corrected code words ―
MD : Average brightness value of dark
d : Number of error detected code words
cell
A : more than 0.62
Criterion ―
B : 0.50 to 0.62
D : 0.25 to 0.37 Reflectance margin RM (Reflectance Margin)
F : less than 0.25 Evaluates the variation degree in cell
Description brightness with black and white of the correct
PGH cell considered.
Print growth (horizontal)
(Print Growth Horizontal) [White cell]
Evaluates the mark cell growth in the R >= GTMARGIN = (R-GT)/(ML-GT)
Description horizontal direction. R < GT  MARGIN = 0
This item is not included in the total evaluation. [Black cell]
―
(D - 0.5)/0.15 Calculation R < GTMARGIN = (GT-R)/(GT-MD)
D : On the horizontal clock pattern
formula R >=  MARGIN = 0
Calculation
formula Ratio of the number of pixels of mark MARGIN : Margin of each cell
cell R : Brightness value
GT : Binarization threshold value
A : -0.50 to 0.50
CC : Cell contrast
B : -0.70 to -0.50 or 0.50 to 0.70
Criterion C : -0.85 to -0.70 or 0.70 to 0.85 Criterion ―
D : -1.00 to -0.85 or 0.85 to 1.00
F : less than -1.00 or more than 1.00 Fixed pattern damage FPD (Fixed Pattern Damage)
Evaluates the degree of the fixed pattern
Print growth (vertical) PGV (Print Growth Vertical) Description damage (area on the right) dependent on the
Evaluates the mark cell growth in the vertical code type.
Description direction.
This item is not included in the total evaluation. Calculation
―
formula
(D - 0.5)/0.15
Calculation D : On the vertical clock pattern
formula Ratio of the number of pixels of mark
Criterion ―
cell
A : -0.50 to 0.50
B : -0.70 to -0.50 or 0.50 to 0.70
FID
Criterion C : -0.85 to -0.70 or 0.70 to 0.85 Format information damage
(Format Information Damage)
D : -1.00 to -0.85 or 0.85 to 1.00
F : less than -1.00 or more than 1.00 Evaluates the format information damage
Description
degree of QR code.
Calculation
―
formula
Criterion ―
E SR-D100 UM 24
VID SAE AS9132
Version information damage
(Version Information Damage)
Evaluates the version information damage
Quiet zone QZ (Quiet Zone)
Description degree of QR code (Model 2, version 2 and
later versions). Evaluates if multiple cells of quiet zone exist
Description
around the code.
Calculation
― Calculation
formula ―
formula
Criterion ―
Criterion ―
Axial nonuniformity AN (Axial Nonuniformity)

Evaluates the distortion degree in vertical and
Description Evaluates the difference between the
horizontal size of the code.
maximum brightness value of dark cell (Dmax)
AN = abs (Xavg - Yavg)/((Xavg + Yavg)/2) Description
and minimum brightness value of bright cell
Xavg : Average cell size in horizontal
Calculation (Lmin) in the code area.
direction
formula (Lmin - Dmax)/255
Yavg : Vertical cell size in horizontal
direction Lmin : Minimum brightness value of
Calculation
bright cell
A : less than 0.06 formula
Dmax : Maximum brightness value of
B : 0.06 to 0.08
dark cell
D : 0.10 to 0.12 Pass : more than 0.20
F : more than 0.12 Criterion
Fail : less than 0.20
Grid nonuniformity GN (Grid Nonuniformity)

Evaluates the maximum position slip of each Angular distortion AD (Angular Distortion)
Description
cell. Evaluates the distortion degree from 90
GN = Hmax/X Description degrees of the angle formed by the straight
Calculation line at L part.
Hmax : Maximum position slip amount
formula
X : Cell size
Calculation
A : less than 0.38 ―
formula
B : 0.38 to 0.50
D : 0.63 to 0.75 Pass : -7 to 7
Criterion
F : more than 0.75 Fail : less than -7 or more than 7
UEC
Unused error correction Module fill MF (Module Fill)
(Unused Error Correction)
Evaluates the ratio of error correction unused
Description Evaluates the distortion from the correct size
at the time of decoding. Description
of the cell size.
UEC = 1.0 - ((e + 2t)/(d - p))
Calculation
Calculation read Length of the side of cell/Module size
formula
formula t : Number of error code words
d : Number of error corrected code words ―
Pass : 0.60 to 1.05
p : Number of error detected code words Criterion
Fail : less than 0.60 or more than 1.05
A : more than 0.62
B : 0.50 to 0.62
D : 0.25 to 0.37 SEMI T10-0701
F : less than 0.25

PGH
Print growth (horizontal)
(Print Growth Horizontal) Evaluates the difference between the average
Evaluates the mark cell growth in the Description brightness value of background (GL) and
Description horizontal direction. average brightness value of foreground (GD).
This item is not included in the total evaluation. (GL - GD)/255
(D - 0.5)/0.15 GL : Average brightness value of
Calculation
Calculation D : On the horizontal clock pattern background
formula
formula Ratio of the number of pixels of mark GD : Average brightness value of
cell foreground
A : -0.50 to 0.50
B : -0.70 to -0.50 or 0.50 to 0.70 Criterion 1 is the best.
Criterion C : -0.85 to -0.70 or 0.70 to 0.85
D : -1.00 to -0.85 or 0.85 to 1.00
F : less than -1.00 or more than 1.00 Signal to noise ratio SNR (Signal to Noise Ratio)
Evaluates the symbol contrast size against
Description
Print growth (vertical) PGV (Print Growth Vertical) brightness variation.
Evaluates the mark cell growth in the vertical (GL - GD)/Max (DL, DD)
Description direction. GL : Average brightness value of
This item is not included in the total evaluation. background
(D - 0.5)/0.15 GD : Average brightness value of
Calculation D : On the vertical clock pattern Calculation foreground
formula Ratio of the number of pixels of mark formula DL : Dispersion of background
cell brightness value
DD : Dispersion of foreground
A : -0.50 to 0.50
brightness value
B : -0.70 to -0.50 or 0.50 to 0.70
Max() : Maximum value
Criterion C : -0.85 to -0.70 or 0.70 to 0.85
D : -1.00 to -0.85 or 0.85 to 1.00 Criterion The greater, the better.
F : less than -1.00 or more than 1.00
25 E SR-D100 UM
HMG Cell defects CD (Cell Defects)
Horizontal mark growth
(Horizontal Mark Growth) Evaluates the number of pixels for which white
Description
Evaluates the expansion and contraction and black judgment was wrong.
Description degree of mark cell width of the timing pattern ―
Calculation
on the upper part. Number of wrong pixels/All pixels
formula
Med (MCW)/(Med (MCW) + Med (SCW)) Criterion 0 is the best.
Calculation MCW : Mark cell width
formula SCW : Space cell width Finder pattern defects FPD (Finder Pattern Defects)
Med () : Median value
0.5 is the best. Evaluates the number of pixels for which white
Description
Criterion SmallThin and black judgment was wrong at the L part.
LargeThick
Calculation Number of wrong pixels at the L part/All pixels
Vertical mark growth VMG (Vertical Mark Growth) formula at the L part
Evaluates the expansion and contraction
Description degree of mark cell height of the timing pattern
Criterion 0 is the best.
on the right.
Med (MCH)/(Med (MCH) + Med (SCH))
Calculation MCH : Mark cell height UEC
formula SCH : Space cell height Unused error correction
(Unused Error Correction)
Med () : Median value
Evaluates the ratio of error correction unused
0.5 is the best. Description
at the time of decoding.
Criterion SmallThin
UEC = 1.0 - ((e + 2t)/(d - p))
LargeThick
Calculation read
DMCW formula t : Number of error code words ―
Average cell width
(DataMatrix Cell Width)
d : Number of error corrected code words
p : Number of error detected code words
Description Evaluates the average cell width.
1.00 : Error correction is not used at all.
(UL + BL)/(2  N) Criterion 0.00 : Decoding failed
Calculation UL : Length of upper side or error correction has been used up.
formula BL : Length of bottom side
3-11
N : Number of horizontal cells
Criterion ― Edit data function/Edit

DMCH
image file name function
Average cell height
(DataMatrix Cell Height)
With the edit data function, read data can be edited into a desired data format.
Description Evaluates the average cell height. With the edit image file name function, when sending image files to upper ranks via
FTP, the image file names can be edited into desired file names.
(RL + LL)/(2  M)
Calculation RL : Length of right side
formula LL : Length of left side The edit data function and edit image file name function can do the following.
M : Number of vertical cells
Criterion ―
 Edit Data (Basic)
• Four arithmetic operations (add, subtract, multiply and divide)
• Conditional branching
HMM
Horizontal misplacement
(Horizontal Mark Misplacement) • Adding arbitrary characters
• Extracting and combining arbitrary digits
Evaluates the misplacement of the mark cell
Description center position of the timing pattern on the
upper part.
 Edit Data (Advanced)
MHi/(N  DMCW) Various types of data can be built using four arithmetic operations, conditional
MHi : Amount of the horizontal branching, etc. from appended data information, etc.
Calculation misplacement of each cell on <Example>
formula upper TP • Code rotation angle (Calculated from top coordinates)
N : Number of horizontal cells
DMCW : Average cell width  Edit image file name
0 is the best.
Criterion • Time stamp
(1 means the 1-cell misplacement.)
• Append read Data
VMM
Vertical misplacement
(Vertical Mark Misplacement) Important • The edit image file name function is available only for images
Evaluates the misplacement of the mark cell sent via FTP.
Description center position of the timing pattern on the This does not function for images saved in RAM and ROM.
right. • This does not support quick setup codes.
MVi/(M  DMCH)
MVi : Amount of the vertical
Calculation misplacement of each cell on the
formula right TP
M : Number of vertical cells
DMCH : Average cell width
0 is the best.
Criterion
(1 means the 1-cell misplacement.)
E SR-D100 UM 26
Procedure for setting the edit data function and edit image file name function Script file reflection timing
The edit data function and the edit image file name function can be used by Even if the script file is in operation, transfer is possible each time by using the FTP.
sending the file which contains the program of Script to SR-D100 and enabling the In this case, the reflection timing of the script program is from the timing ON after
"Use script file" setting. file transfer.
Setting procedure  Timing chart
[2] Changing the the script Timing input

[1] Creating the script file [3] Transferring the script file
execution setting
A B
Script file transfer
Data A A B
[1] Creating the script file Image file name
Create the script file (FmtSet.lua) and write the program using a text editor such
as notepad.exe.
* For programming methods, refer to "SR-D100/750 Series Script Reference". Handing of the script file when settings are changed, etc.
[2] Changing the script execution setting
Using the AutoID Network Navigator, set the script execution setting of the SR- This section describes how to handles the script file when restoring to the default
D100 Series to "Enable". settings or using the changeover function.
This must be set for the edit data function and the edit image file name function
Operation contents FmtSet.lua
respectively.
AutoID Network Navigator Receives with the configuration file at the
[Edit data function - Script execution setting item]
"Retrieve Configuration" same time.
AutoID Network Navigator Sends with the configuration file at the
"Send Configuration" same time.
AutoID Network Navigator "Default Settings" Remains.
Send or delete by FileView Transmission and deletion possible from PC.
Reading quick setup codes Remains.
FORMAT Remains.
SAVE Remains.
Send LOAD Remains.
command DFLT Remains.
BSAVE Creates backup files.
BLOAD Loads backup files.
[Edit image file name function - Script execution setting item]
When executing the script file - status confirmation command

 Obtaining the script processing time
Send command SCPTIME
Response OK, SCPTIME, now=AAus, max=BBus, min=CCus
AA: Returns the most recent script processing time.
BB: Returns the maximum value of the processing time.
CC: Returns the minimum value of the processing time.
• Returns the processing time of script executed after power ON.
[3] Transferring the script file  Script debug setting

Transfer the script file (FmtSet.lua) to the SR-D100 Series.
Send command SCPDBG, n
Following are the transfer methods.
Response OK, SCPDBG
• Sending configuration of AutoID Network Navigator
n= 0: Script debug OFF
• Transferring only the script file from the AutoID Network Navigator terminal
n=1: Script debug ON
• Transferring using the Fileview software
• This sets whether to output debug from the script file to the command port or
• Transferring using the FTP
not.
• Setting the debug ON executes print(str) and outputs data.
Important When transferring the script file using the Fileview software or the
FTP, set the file name to "FmtSet.Lua".  Obtaining the script error results
If the main unit system of the SR-D100 Series does not support the
Send command SCPERR
edit data function and the edit image file name function, the script
Response OK, SCPERR, mmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmm
transmission button on the terminal screen cannot be used.
mm... : Script error character string
• This returns the details of script error.
27 E SR-D100 UM
 Obtaining the script version Do not reset during duplicate reading prevention interval.
Send command SCPVER
Response OK, SCPVER, mmmm, nnnn The duplicate reading prevention function works for all codes read within the set
mm...: Script library version duplicate reading prevention interval from when the timing input was done and the
nn...: FmtSet.lua version first code is read. The duplicate reading prevention function works again when the
(Only when FmtSet.lua exists and the version is defined) next code is read after the duplicate reading prevention interval finishes.
• FmtSet.Lua version is the value stored in variable name "SCPVERSION" within
 Timing chart
the FmtSet.Lua file.
• This returns the script library version and the FmtSet.lua version.
• If the script library does not exist, the error code 12 is returned.
Timing input
* The script library is a library file to use the edit data function and the edit image
file name function.
3-12
(1) (2) (1) (3) (2) (1) (2) (2)
Duplicate reading
Code
prevention interval reset Duplicate reading

prevention
The duplicate read prevention function is equipped with the Multi1 reading mode Duplicate reading prevention
not to read codes again that have been read once. The working time of this interval
duplicate reading prevention function is set by the duplicate reading prevention Data
(1) (2) (3) (1) (2)
interval. Two types of the duplicate reading prevention interval reset operation have communication
been prepared with the SR-D100 Series. • Regardless of reading success or reading error, codes are read alternating
parameter banks.
• Amount of data memorized during the duplicate reading prevention interval: Up to
Types of the duplicate reading prevention interval reset 256 codes, total of 10 Kbytes
Two types of the duplicate reading prevention interval reset
• Reset when a code is read. Important If multiple codes in the same type are seen in the field of view at
• Do not reset during duplicate reading prevention interval. the same time, take one of the following methods.
• Prepare multiple parameter banks with the read length
This section describes each operation. restricted, and make the setting so the parameter banks are
switched for each code.
Reset when a code is read. • Prepare multiple parameter banks with the decoding area
restricted, and make the setting so the parameter banks are
The duplicate reading prevention function works for one data most recently read. If switched for each code.
different codes are read, the duplicate reading prevention interval is reset and the
duplicate reading prevention function works for the newly read code data. The * When Multi read (setting within 1 parameter bank) is set to
duplicate reading prevention interval count starts at the timing when the last code is Enable, if the code data that was read once matches with any of
read. the multiple read code data in 1 scan, not all code data read in
the scan are not output.
 Timing chart
Timing input 3-13 Changeover function

(1) (1) (2) (1) (2) (2)
Code Changeover function
When reading 2D codes of workpieces proceeding on a line, the type of proceeding
workpiece may change. In this case, you may want to make the parameter bank
Duplicate reading
prevention settings dedicated to the target workpiece.
For example, there are 4 types of codes and each code type needs 3 parameter
Duplicate reading
prevention interval banks. In this case, total of 12 banks must be prepared. It will take time to reach the
target bank when the code type changes.
(1) (2) (1) (2) (2)
Data Another example. You may want to read multiple codes at once. Workpiece A has
communication
2 codes and workpiece B has 3 codes. In this case, the number of output data
• When reading is successful, reading continues using the successful bank until a cannot be changed with only one setting.
reading error occurs.
• If codes with the same contents are read in series, adjust the passing time longer With SR-D100, up to 8 configuration files and script files can be retained. Switching
than the time set with the duplicate reading prevention interval (setting range: the settings with commands enables switching (changeover) of parameter bank
100 to 25500 ms). Codes with different contents can be read in series. setting.
• The timing to start measuring the duplicate reading prevention interval is when Thus, the unit can be operated with the setting dedicated to the reading target
the code that was read is outside the field of vision. workpiece. Codes can be read only with necessary banks and the data format can
be adjusted to the workpiece.
Change to Operating with

configuration B configuration A
B B B A A
E SR-D100 UM 28
Creating the changeover configuration file, and the reading command
 Command to create the configuration file and the script file
This is the command to create the configuration file and the script file to be
retained.
This saves the settings in RAM to ROM and the configuration file to be retained.
Configuration to be
ROM saved with the SAVE
Copy command
RAM
Copy Configuration
file 1
Configuration being
used in operation
Send command BSAVE, m

Response OK, BSAVE
m = 1 to 8 ROM configuration file number at copy destination (config1.ptc, config2.ptc …)
ROM script file number at copy destination (FmtSet1.Lua, FmtSet2.Lua …)
 Command to read the configuration file and the script file

This is the command to read the contents of the retained configuration file to RAM
and ROM.
Use this command to switch the setting.
Configuration to be
ROM saved with the SAVE
command
Read
RAM
Read Configuration
file 1
Configuration being
used in operation
Send command BLOAD, m

Response OK, BLOAD
m = 1 to 8 Configuration file number to read (config1.ptc, config2.ptc …)
Script file number to read (FmtSet1.Lua, FmtSet2.Lua …)
*The setting will be reflected after loading is complete.
Setting procedure
1 Send the first setting to SR-D100 using AutoID Network Navigator.
2 Send "BSAVE,1" using the terminal.

 config1.ptc, FmtSet1.Lua (first configuration file) will be created.
3 Send the second setting to SR-D100 using AutoID Network

Navigator.
4 Send "BSAVE,2" using the terminal.

 config2.ptc, FmtSet2.Lua (second configuration file) will be created.
5 Necessary configuration files are created in the same procedure.
6 In operation, send "BLOAD,m" and operate with the setting

according to the purpose.
29 E SR-D100 UM
4-1 Read Operations Scan delay time
The SR-D100 Series is capable of reading codes under optimum conditions using
This section describes the steps of read operation of the SR-D100 Series in detail. the alternate function.
When the entry timing of the target to be conveyed is shifted from the input timing
of the timing sensor, set the "scan delay time".
Steps of Read Operation
This makes it possible to start scanning under optimum read conditions by setting
The SR-D100 Series provides the following read operations: the delay for the timing at which emission of light of the SR-D100 begins.
• The time can be set between 0 and 255 ms in increments of 1 ms (Default: 0 ms).
(1) Trigger input processing : Trigger input is verified and lighting of the • Set the scan delay period for the parameter bank.
light is controlled.
Trigger input
(2) Scanning + image transfer : The image is scanned within the specified
exposure time and the image is transferred. Input time Scan delay time
constant
(3) Decoding processing : The captured image is filtered and the code
is recognized (decoding processing).
(4) Data communication processing : The decoded results are output as data. Scanning
Since (2) and (3) above are operated based on the settings registered with the
parameter bank, operation is repeated read data is determined using the alternate Internal bank retry count
function or an instruction to finish read operation is given (timing OFF).
When the internal bank retry count is set, 1 parameter bank is repeated. When
Specify the following operations for the above processing: decoding cannot be complete within the specified internal bank retry count,
• Timing Mode Specify from level trigger or one-shot trigger. operation to switch to the next parameter bank is possible.
• Timing to send data Specify from Send after read" or "Send after trigger input If reading operation becomes unstable due to vibration of the workpiece, setting
OFF. the internal bank retry count enables stable reading.
• Read mode Specify from Single, Multi1, Multi 2 or burst.
 Timing diagram
 Timing diagram
This section describes the steps of basic operations of the SR-D100 Series.
(1)Trigger input
Operating conditions are as follows:
• Timing Mode : Level trigger
(2)Parameter bank Scanning Scanning Scanning Scanning
• Timing to send data : Send after read 1 operation
+ + + +
decoding decoding decoding decoding
• Read mode : Single Internal bank
retry count = a
• Parameter bank : Set 2 banks, alternate mode
0 time 1 time 2 times a times
(3)Parameter bank Scanning Scanning

+ +
Operation of parameter bank 1
2 operation decoding decoding
Internal bank
retry count = b 0 time 1 time b times
Operation of parameter bank 2
Trigger input • The internal bank retry count can be set within the range from 0 to 32. (Factory
A B C D B C D
setting: 0)
Scanning +
• If a large number is set for the internal bank retry count and multiple parameter
image transfer banks are registered, reading time per time will become longer.
E F
Secure sufficient reading time so that reading can be stable.
Decoding
4-2
processing
Data
communication
Read data
Timing Mode
A: Input time constant + Scan delay time
This section describes the timing mode of the SR-D100 Series.
B: Exposure time for each parameter bank
C: Image transfer time (approximately 19 ms)
D: Scan interval Type of timing mode
E: Decode timeout period set for each parameter bank
F: Decoding time when reading is successful The SR-D100 Series provides the following 2 types of timing mode.
• Level trigger
• The above is the image when reading is successful. For read error, B, C, D, and • One-shot trigger
E are repeated continuously and read error data is output when the trigger input
is turned off. From now on, an explanation is given by taking the following settings as an
• For scan interval in mode other than burst read mode, optimal conditions are example:
automatically set from the decode timeout period set for the parameter bank. • Read mode : Single
• Timing to send data : Send after read
• Output terminal settings OUT1 = OK
OUT2 = NG + ERROR
OUT3 = TRG BUSY
* Output terminal settings "3-5 Multi-I/O Function (Page 16)"
* For convenience sake, the timing diagram does not indicate the input pulse width
+ scan delay time.
E SR-D100 UM 30
Level trigger  Timing diagram
When the trigger input turns on, SR-D100 Series turns on the lightning to start
scanning. Trigger input
When a code is read successfully, it stops emitting light and sends data.
Code
If the SR-D100 Series fails to read a code, it stops emitting light when the trigger One-shot trigger duration One-shot trigger duration
input turns off and sends a read error.
Scanning + decoding
 Timing diagram
Data communication
OK/NG/ERROR output OK/NG ERROR
Trigger input
TRG BUSY output
Code
Scanning + decoding • When the trigger input stays on for the specified input time constant, the lighting
of the SR-D100 Series turns on and the scanning begins.
Data communication When the reading is complete, emission of light stops.
• The input time constant for the trigger input can be changed to 1 ms, 2 ms, or
OK/NG/ERROR output OK/NG ERROR 10 ms.
TRG BUSY output
• The one-shot trigger duration can be changed within the range of 30 to 25500
ms.
• If the SR-D100 Series fails to read a code within the one-shot trigger duration, it
• Set the trigger input so that it stays ON just long enough for the target code to be
turns off the lighting and outputs a read error.
entirely irradiated.
• Other operations and precautions are the same as those for the level trigger.
• The light of the SR-D100 Series is emitted after the trigger input has been
activated for the specified input time constant.
Point The ON state of the trigger input is recognized after the input stays
• The RS-232C data communication time can be obtained using the following
equation: on for at least the specified input time constant.
The OFF state of the trigger input is recognized after the input
Data length + (1: When parity is used) + Start/stop bits
Data communication time=
Baud rate
× (Number of digits of data to be sent + stays off for at least the specified input time constant.
Number of characters of header and terminator) Consequently, when the line speed is fast and fast pulse signals
are used as trigger input signals, be careful to make the ON/OFF
• The ON time for the OK/NG/ERROR output can be set within the range of 10 to
time of the pulse signals longer than the specified input time
2550 ms (Default: 500 ms).
constant.
Point When a code is read at an interval shorter than the specified a
output ON time, the OK/NG/ERROR output turns off even if the Trigger input
b
output ON time of the previous output signal has not elapsed, and
a new output signal turns on for the specified output ON time. If Trigger input time constant = when a, if a becomes larger than b,
output terminal operations of the same type occur successively the OFF state of the trigger input is not recognized.
(such as OKOK), the previous output signal turns off for 10 ms, When a ≤ b, the ON/OFF state of the timing signal can be
and then the new output signal turns on. recognized.
Refer to "Page 16 Function and Operation of the Output
Terminals (OUT1, OUT2, and OUT3)".
Reference The TRGBUSY output turns on from the time the trigger input turns on
to the time the code reading is complete or the trigger input is turned
4-3 Data Transmission Timing
off. This section describes the data transmission timing of the SR-D100 Series.
One-shot trigger
Type of data transmission timing
When the SR-D100 Series detects that the trigger input is on, it turns on the light
scan a code only for the set one-shot duration. The SR-D100 Series offers the following 2 types of timing for outputting the read
When a code is read successfully, it stops emitting light and sends data. Other data and OK/NG/ERROR signals:
operations are the same as those for the level trigger. • Send after reading
Use the one-shot trigger if the ON time of the trigger input is extremely short or if • Send after timing OFF
you want to fix the read time. Select the appropriate type for your application. Normally, "Send after reading" is
used.
Send after reading

The SR-D100 Series outputs read data and an OK/NG signal as soon as it
completes reading codes. If the SR-D100 Series fails to read a code, it outputs a
read error code and an ERROR signal at the point when the timing signal turns off.
The timing diagrams are the same as those shown in "Timing Mode".
31 E SR-D100 UM
Send after timing OFF Multiple Code Reading in Single Read Mode
When "Send after timing OFF" is selected, the SR-D100 Series outputs read data Normally, the single read mode is used to read 1 code. When the following read
and an OK/NG/ERROR signal at the next timing point for the specified trigger type. setting conditions are specified, multiple codes within the field of view can be read
Use this type to output data and output signals with the same timing. in 1 read action.
 Timing diagram for the level trigger  When the "Number of codes to be read" is set for the
When the trigger input turns off, read data and OK/NG/ERROR signal are output. parameter bank
(When reading is successful) (When reading failed) When the "Number of codes to be read" is set for the parameter bank, the number
of codes specified can be read in 1 read action if the code type is the same.
Trigger input
• Use the AutoID Network Navigator or set command to set.
Code • The "Number of codes to be read" can be set within the range of 1 to 16.
• When "Allow reduced detection count" is set to "Enable", the reading is
Scanning + decoding considered to be successful when at least 1 code is read successfully.
Data communication
Point • In this setting, multiple codes of different types cannot be read
OK/NG/ERROR output OK/NG ERROR
in 1 read action.
• Codes are output in order starting from the code coordinates
TRG BUSY output above the upper scan screen (if the height is the same, from the
left).
• When a code is read successfully, the read operation stops.
• The TRG BUSY output continues until the trigger input turns off.
When the number of codes to be read is set to 2 or more, the output data format is
 Timing diagram for the one-shot trigger as follows:
When the specified one-shot trigger duration elapses, the read data and OK/NG/ Header The 1st data , The 2nd data , ··· Terminator
ERROR signal are output.
(When reading is successful) (When reading failed) ,= Inter delimiter: Can be changed with setting
(Default = "," (0x2C))
Trigger input
Code
One-shot trigger duration One-shot trigger duration Multi 1 Read Mode
Scanning + decoding In this mode, the SR-D100 Series reads multiple codes in succession while the
trigger input is turned on once.
Data communication
In Multi 1 read mode, the SR-D100 Series sends out data and outputs an OK signal
OK/NG/ERROR output
every time it reads 1 code (or an OK/NG signal when preset data is registered). If
OK/NG ERROR
no data is read while the trigger input is turned on, a read error code and an
TRG BUSY output ERROR signal are output after the trigger input turns off.
• When a code is read successfully, the read operation stops.  Timing diagram
• The TRG BUSY output continues until the one-shot trigger duration elapses.
4-4 Read Mode Trigger input
Code
Duplicate reading
prevention interval
The SR-D100 Series offers 4 types of read modes. Select the appropriate type for Scanning + decoding
your application. For most applications, use "Single read mode".
Data communication
Single read mode OK/NG/ERROR output

OK
/
NG
OK
/
NG
OK
/
NG
OK
/
NG
ERROR
TRG BUSY output

In this mode, the SR-D100 Series reads a single code while the trigger input is
turned on once, and then outputs data.
• The SR-D100 Series reads codes in succession for the following duration:
 Timing diagram Level trigger : While the trigger input is turned on
One-shot trigger : During the specified one-shot trigger duration
(When reading is successful) (When reading failed) • Scan interval is automatically set so that decoding processing can be
Trigger input implemented efficiently. "4-1 Read Operations" (Page 30)
• The duplicate reading prevention operation changes according to the setting of
Code the duplicate reading prevention interval reset.
"3-12 Duplicate reading prevention interval reset" (Page 28)
Scanning + decoding
If codes with the same contents are read in series, adjust the passing time longer
Data communication than the time set with the duplicate reading prevention interval (setting range:
100 to 25500 ms). Codes with different contents can be read in series.
OK/NG/ERROR output OK/NG ERROR • Measurement of the duplicate reading prevention interval starts at the timing
when the code read deviates from the field of view.
TRG BUSY output
Point When Multi1 read mode is selected using the AutoID Network
* The above timing diagram shows the case where "Level trigger" and "Send after
reading" are selected. Navigator, the decode timeout is set to 500 ms. To shorten the
• In single read mode, the data transmission timing can be selected from "Send decode timeout period, change the decode timeout setting of each
after reading" or "Send after timing off". parameter bank manually.
• The timing mode can be selected from "Level trigger" or "One-shot trigger".
• Scan interval is automatically set so that decoding processing can be
implemented efficiently. "4-1 Read Operations (Page 30)"
E SR-D100 UM 32
Multi 2 Read Mode Output data format
Multi 2 read mode is used to read the codes in the parameter banks with registered The following output data format is used for the read data.
settings in order while the trigger input is turned on once.
When all codes (maximum 16 types) in the parameter banks are read, the read  No Code ID setting
data is sent in the order of parameter bank code ID of 1 to 16 at the point when the
Parameter Parameter Parameter
timing signal turns off, and an OK/NG signal is output. Header bank number 1 , bank number 2 , ··· , bank number 16 Terminator
If no code was read while the trigger input was turned on or if even 1 code of a read data read data read data
parameter bank was not read, the SR-D100 Series sends a read error and outputs
an ERROR signal for the unread code after the trigger input turns off.  Specified code ID
 Timing diagram Header
Code ID 1
,
Code ID 2
, ··· ,
Code ID 16
Terminator
read data read data read data
Timing diagrams when registered with the parameter banks 1, 2 and 4 are as
follows: • Each read data is separated by intermediate delimiters (Default "," (0x2C)).
• The read bar code data is temporarily saved into the send buffer of the SR-D100
(When reading is successful) (When reading failed for bank 2)
Series and then output in accordance with conditions set for the data
Trigger input Read error
transmission timing.* The send buffer of the SR-D100 Series can hold up to 10KB
Parameter bank No. of data.
• If reading fails for any of parameter banks 1 to 16 or if the specified code is not
Scanning + decoding (1) (2) (4) (1) (2) (4) (2) (2)
found, a read error code is sent as the read data for each parameter bank
number.
Reading success
Data communication * When the timing to send data is set to "Send after read", data communication and
an OK/NG signal will be output when all the code ID conditions are established.
OK/ ERROR
OK/NG/ERROR output NG
Burst Read Mode
TRGBUSY output
The burst read mode is used to set fixed burst intervals with moving workpieces
• The SR-D100 Series reads codes in succession for the following duration: and to improve the capability to track work pieces moving during trigger input.
Level trigger : While the trigger input is turned on Since burst interval can be specified and scans can be performed repeatedly
One-shot trigger : During the specified one-shot trigger duration without decoding operation, it prevents skipping.
• An OK signal is output when all of the codes of the set parameter banks are read. • The maximum number of scans is 32.
• An ERROR signal is output when even 1 specified code could not be read. • Set the burst intervals between 0 to 255. However, when set to 0 ms, the burst
• Even when there are multiple codes within the reading range, all codes can be intervals will be less than 1 ms.
read simultaneously. • When the timing to send data is set "Send after read", it will be output when
• Scan interval is automatically set so that decoding processing can be decoding is complete.
implemented efficiently. "4-1 Read Operations" (Page 30)
 Timing diagram
Point When Multi2 read mode is selected using the AutoID Network
Navigator, the decode timeout is set to 500 ms. To shorten the Trigger input
decode timeout period, change the decode timeout setting of each The 1st
scan
The 2nd
scan
The 3rd
scan
The nth
scan
parameter bank manually. A B C D B C D B C D D B C
Scanning +
image transfer
E E
Code ID
Decoding processing Decoding processing Decoding processing Decoding processing
Decoding of the 1st scan of the 2nd scan of the 3rd scan of the nth scan
processing
Read data
Even when reading multiple codes at 1 timing, there are cases where multiple Data
communication
parameter banks must be registered for 1 code.
In such a case, the order in which data is output can be specified by setting "Code A: Input time constant + Scan delay time
ID" of respective parameter bank for each code. B: Exposure of each parameter bank
C: Time to transfer image
 Timing diagram D: Burst interval (0 to 255 ms)
Timing Mode: "Level trigger" E: Pre-decoding image buffer
Timing to send data: "Send after read"
Code ID 1: Bank number 1,3,5 • A maximum of 32 scans are performed at the specified intervals.
Code ID 2: When set as the bank number 2,4,6 • When multiple parameter banks are registered, scans are performed alternately.
• When decoding is completed, scanning processing is stopped even when the
number of scans has not reached 32.
Trigger input • If decoding fails, the processing moves to the next decoding after expiration of
the decode timeout period of each parameter bank.
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (2) (4) (6) (2) (4)
Parameter bank's • The timing to send data and output OUT when read is successful or read fails is
transition the same as single read mode.
(5) (4)
Decoding
succeeded
Bank number
Code ID 1 Code ID 2
Output data Bank 5 Bank 4
33 E SR-D100 UM
 Trigger input time in burst read mode
In burst read mode, the scanned image is decoded based on the decode timeout
period for each parameter bank.
Therefore, there may be a time period during which decoding is not completed
even after scanning is completed.
When the timing signal turns off before it is ready for reading, if the image of the
decode is not finished processing, even if there is a temporarily readable scan
image, it will be judged as a read error.
Set the time to turn on the trigger input within the time period during which a
maximum number of scans (32) can be processed for the decode timeout period
for each parameter bank.
Reference Timing diagram before completion of decoding processing.
Timing OFF
Trigger input Image that can be read

The 1st The 2nd The 3rd The 7th The nth
scan scan scan scan scan
A B C D B C D B C D D B C D B C
Scanning +
image transfer
E E
Decoding processing Decoding processing Decoding processing Decoding processing
Decoding of the 1st scan of the 2nd scan of the 3rd scan of the 7th scan
processing
Read error
Data
communication
The above timing diagram shows an example of a readable image that

was successfully read on the 7th scanning.
Since the timing signal turned off before decoding of the 7th round
scanned image, it is judged as a read error.
If the timing signal turns off during the 7th decoding, it is also
determined as a read error, because the decoding processing is
incomplete.
E SR-D100 UM 34
5-1 Installing, Starting, and Installation Procedure
Shutting Down This section describes the installation method on Windows XP and Windows 7-
based computers with the following drive configuration:
Drive C : Hard disk drive
This section describes how to install AutoID Network Navigator as well as how to Drive E : CD-ROM drive
start and shut down the application.
 For Windows XP
PC Requirements 1 Turn ON the PC and start Windows.
Before starting installation, confirm that your PC meets the following requirements:
Important • To install AutoID Network Navigator, log on as a user with
 Supported OSs rights to change the system configuration, such as
Administrator or Computer Administrator.
• Windows XP (SP3 or higher) 32-bit version • Quit all active applications before starting the installation.
• Windows Vista (Business/Ultimate, SP2 or higher) 32-bit version The installation may take longer if antivirus software or other
• Windows 7 (Professional or higher) 32-bit version/64-bit version applications are active on the computer.
• Windows 8 (Windows RT excluded)
* .NET Framework 3.5 SP1 or later must be installed in advance.
* When installing .NET3.5 on Windows 8, the Internet environment is necessary. 2 Insert the "AutoID Network Navigator DISC1" into the CD-ROM drive
* When installing .NET3.5 on Windows 8, operate from the control panel. of the PC.
 Hardware 3 Select a language to install and press [OK].

"AutoID Network Navigator Installer" is
32-bit 64-bit displayed.
Processor 2.0 GHz
System Memory 1 GB 2 GB
CD-ROM Drive Required for installation
4 Click "Install .NET Framework 3.5 SP1".
Communication Port Ethernet port
• If .NET Framework 3.5 is already
installed on your PC, this will be
 Precautions automatically recognized and the
installation will be completed.
• To install AutoID Network Navigator, log on as a user with rights to change the
• If .NET Framework 3.5 is not
system configuration, such as Administrator or Computer Administrator.
installed, then follow the on-screen
• Quit all active applications before starting the installation. The installation may
instructions, insert DISC2, and
take longer if antivirus software or other applications are active on the computer.
continue with the installation.
 Trademark
Windows 8/Windows 7/Vista/XP is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation 5 Click "Install AutoID Network
in the United States. Navigator".
6 Click "Next".
Folder structure in the master disc
disc1 manual JP Manual data in PDF format

EN
CHT
CHS
DE
Setup AutoID Launcher.exe

AutoID Launcher.ini
JP
EN AutoID Network Navigator
7 Click "Next".
CHT Multimonitor The "Destination" window
CHS FileView appears.
DE Click on the "Change" button to
firmware SR-D100/750/650 Series main unit firmware change the folder in which the
application will be installed.
EDS EDS file for EtherNet/IP
GSDML GSDML file for PROFINET
Windows sample program JP Sample program of Visual Basic, C# and C++

EN
disc2 Setup SetupPrerequisites dotnetfx35.exe

setupNF.exe
languagepack
Software to be installed
• AutoID Network Navigator ..........Described in this chapter.
• MultiMonitor ................................Described in Chapter 14.
• Fileview .......................................Described in Chapter 15.
• AutoID Keyboard Wedge ............ Installed with the AutoID Network Navigator at
the same time.
For details, refer to "AutoID Keyboard Wedge
User's Manual".
35 E SR-D100 UM
8 Click "Install". 6 Click "Install AutoID Network Navigator".
7 Click "Next".
9 Click "Finish".
When the "InstallShield Wizard
Completed" window appears,
the AutoID Network Navigator
installation is completed.
8 Click "Next".
Click on the [Change] button to change to the folder in which the application will
be installed.
 For Windows 7
1 Turn ON the PC and start Windows.
Important • To install AutoID Network Navigator, log on as a user with

rights to change the system configuration, such as
Administrator or Computer Administrator.
• Quit all active applications before starting the installation.
The installation may take longer if antivirus software or other
applications are active on the computer.
2 Insert the "AutoID Network Navigator Master DISC1" into the CD-ROM 9 Click [Install].
drive of the PC.
3 Normally, the AutoRun function of the computer will display the
following screen.
To start the installer directly, use Windows Explorer or another
method to open the CD-ROM drive,
and double-click "AutoID Launcher.exe" in the Setup folder.
AutoID Launcher will start and select the language of the installer software.
4 The AutoID Network Navigator installer will start.
10 Click [Finish].
5 Click "Install .NET Framework 3.5 SP1".

If .NET Framework 3.5 SP1 is already installed in the computer to be used,
then the install will automatically exit.
• If .NET Framework 3.5 SP1 is not installed, then follow the on-screen
instructions, insert DISC2, and continue with the installation.
E SR-D100 UM 36
11 Follow the same steps to "Install FileView" and "Install Startup Procedure
MultiMonitor".
FileView install screen Start AutoID Network Navigator.
1 From the Start menu, select [Programs (P)] [KEYENCE

Applications] [AutoID] [AutoID Network Navigator (EN)]. Or,
double-click on the desktop.
AutoID Network Navigator will
start up.
Select the network card to use
first.
2 If there is another SR-D100 Series on the same network, this is

automatically detected and a window similar to the following is
displayed:
MultiMonitor install screen
If the SR-D100 Series was not detected, a message similar to the following is
displayed:
 Uninstall Method
From the Start menu, select [Control panel] -> [Programs] -> [Programs and
Features] -> [Uninstall or change a program], select the program to uninstall from
the list, and click [Uninstall].
Click the "Register button" or "Apply temporary IP address button" and register
the reader.
Adding Reader with Register Button

If the SR-D100 Series is on the different network, or it is placed on the network
after starting AutoID Network Navigator up, add the reader by clicking the Register
button.
1 Click the Register button .
37 E SR-D100 UM
2 If the SR-D100 Series is on a different network, click the Manual Add 3 When the address is detected, the reader information is displayed as
button and enter the IP address of the SR-D100 Series to add. follows:
Important To add the SR-D100 Series on the different network, default

gateway must have been preconfigured to the SR-D100 Series. If the IP address shown is correct, click the OK button.
To change the IP address, click the Change button to change the IP address.
3 If the SR-D100 Series is placed on the network after starting AutoID To add all readers detected, check "Check all".
Network Navigator up, click the Auto Search button to add the SR- To add only a certain reader, uncheck "Check all" and check the reader to add.
D100 Series.
Important • To set a temporary IP address, the SR-D100 Series must be
on the same network.
Temporary IP address cannot set for a SR-D100 Series on the
different network.
• Temporary IP address setting is a function to communicate
with AutoID Network Navigator.
IP address and subnet mask etc. for the SR-D100 Series must
be set according to the network to use.
• The IP address set using the Temporary IP Address Settings
To add all searched readers, check "Check all".
is canceled when the main unit is reset. When the unit is
To add only a certain reader, uncheck "Check all" and check the reader to add.
being connected temporarily due to maintenance, etc., turn
the power on again after the setting is complete, or perform
Adding Reader with Temporary IP Address Settings the main unit reset by sending the RESET command.
Temporary IP address is used if the IP address for the SR-D100 Series is unknown
or the IP address of the SR-D100 Series to register is conflicting within the
network.
1 Click the Apply temporary IP address button.
When a temporary IP address has been set,

the IP address is displayed in light blue.
Firmware update of the main unit system

This describes how to update the firmware of the SR-D100 Series main unit
system.
(1) Press Update Firmware.
* The AutoID Network Navigators with 3.00 or later versions have the
information of the SR-D100 main unit system Version 3.00. Therefore, the
2 Press the TEST button of the SR-D100 Series for 5 seconds until
SR-D100 main unit settings are retained even after version update.
LED1 through LED4 are turned on.

For button operation details, click here to display the button operation
description window.
Button to update
firmware
(2) The following window is displayed. Press the Browse button and select "SR-
D100_.bin" file.
Select SR-D100_300.bin.
E SR-D100 UM 38
(3) When the file is selected, the following window is displayed.
Confirm the version is correct and press the OK button. 5-2 Screen Layout
This section describes the icons and views for AutoID Network Navigator.
Screen
(4) (6)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4) Press "Yes".
(5)
(7)
(5) Windows appear in the following order. When the green indicator lights
up, the update is complete. (1) : Menu Bar (6) : Configuration Icon
Some operations of the AutoID Prints quick setup codes or sends/
Network Navigator functions or receives a configuration.
software version can be checked. (7) : Configuration View
(2) : File Icon Cinematic calibration while
…Creates a new file. checking the read image of the
…Opens a file. SR-D100 or operation mode or
communication setting can be
…Saves on an existing file.
performed.
(3) : Edit Icon
(For details of the Configuration
Undo the current work or redo.
View operation, refer to Page
(4) : Tool Icon
41.)
Starts each tool of AutoID Network
Navigator.
… Click to reset the configuration
(For details of each tool, refer to
to default.
Page 58 or later.)
The window to select items to be
(5) : Reader View
restored to default is displayed as
Displays search results or reader
below.
information for the detected
Check necessary items and press
readers or an open file.
"Yes".
Registration of a new reader or
* Other settings include all
deletion of a displayed reader can
settings other than IP address,
also be performed.
subnet mask, default gateway
• Reader connection status
and bank settings.
indicator
(Green)…Connecting,
uncontrolled
(Blue)… Connecting,
controlling AutoID
Network Navigator
(Red)… Unconnected
(Gray)… Disconnecting
Clicking the indicator can switch
Important While controlling the
between connection and
AutoID Network Navigator,
disconnection of the reader.
other communications
and controls are not
available.
Stop the operation before
adjusting the SR-D100
Series using the AutoID
Network Navigator.
39 E SR-D100 UM
Menu Bar  Tool
• LiveView : Starts the LiveView function. For
 File details, refer to Page 58.
• New : Creates a new configuration file. • ImageView : Starts the ImageView function.
• Open : Opens a configuration file. For details, refer to Page 59.
• Save : Saves the selected file. • FileView : Starts the FileView function. For
• Save As : Saves the selected file with a details, refer to Page 59.
new name. • Terminal : Starts the Terminal function. For
• Save All : Saves all opened files. details, refer to Page 60.
• Quick Setup Code : Prints the settings of the • Support Bank : Starts the Support Bank
selected file with the quick function. For details, refer to
setup code function. For Page 61.
details, refer to Page 57. • Marking Optimization : Activates the marking
• Export Reader Configuration : Outputs the selected file list to a optimization. Page 63.
tab separated text file. For • Installation Guide : Starts the Installation Guide. For
details, refer to Page 62. details, refer to Page 62.
• Save serial number : Using a text file, output the
version, serial number and MAC  Configuration
address of the SR-D100 Series
registered to the AutoID • Select Network Card : Selects a network card for the
Network Navigator. PC to use with AutoID Network
• Report : Uses the report generator Navigator.
function. For details, refer to • Option : Click to open the Option
"5-16 Report Generator window.
Function (Page 64)". • Option window
 Edit • Search readers on : Sets whether to search

application startup automatically a SR-D100
• Undo : Goes back to a previous state.
Series at the AutoID Network
• Redo : Performs an operation again.
Navigator startup.
• Synchronize reader time : Sets whether to synchronize the
 View time in the SR-D100 Series and
the PC clock.
• Reader View : Displays the list of the readers • Communication timeout : Sets the communication
registered in the configuration timeout for AutoID Network
software. Navigator to either 5 or 10
• Highlight Configured Fields : Highlights the parts changed seconds.
from the factory configuration. • Terminal on : Sets whether to activate the
LiveView Startup terminal when the LiveView
 System starts up.
• Register : Registers a reader. For details, • LiveView Thinning Out : This cannot be used with the
refer to Page 37. (SR-650/SR-750) SR-D100 Series.
• Switch reader configuration : Switches to the other
configuration file.  Help
• Delete Reader : Deletes a registered reader
from a list. • About : Displays the version information of AutoID
• Apply Temporary IP Address : Sets a reader a temporary IP Network Navigator.
address. For details, refer to
Page 38.
• VeriCode license : The VeriCode license key
key registration registration window is
displayed.
* For VeriCode compatibility,
consult KEYENCE sales
personnel.
• Confirm Firmware Version : The version of the SR-D100
Series main unit can be
confirmed.
• Firmware Update : Updates the system firmware.
 Transfer
• Retrieve Configuration : Receives a configuration.
• Send Configuration : Sends a configuration.
E SR-D100 UM 40
5-3 AutoID Network Navigator 3 Click the Calibration button of AutoID Network Navigator to
calibrate.
Operation • To change the settings of the dynamic range or digital filter, click the
Calibration setting button to change the calibration method.
The calibration result is reflected in the bank selected on the parameter bank
 Operation flow display window.
The basic operation flow of AutoID Network Navigator is as follows: 4 When the calibration is successful, the calibration operation is
completed. After the calibration, click the Test button to check the
Select a reader to configure from the automatically searched readers. Or values.
1 register the reader to configure.
5 To stabilize readings even if the reading conditions change, repeat
the above operation a couple of times with different reading
conditions.
Configure the operation of the SR-D100 Series Tuning Screen

2 Page 41
(5)
(1)
Send the configuration to the SR-D100 Series

3 Page 56 (2)
(6)
(3)
(4)
Perform a reading test
4 Page 41
(7) (8)
Save/print the configuration as necessary
5 Page 57, 62
(1) : Parameter bank configuration (4) : Test
Select either automatic or manual Reading test … Starts the reading
parameter bank setting method. rate test mode.
Normally, Auto is selected. Tact test … Starts the read time
Shut down AutoID Network Navigator
6 (2) : Positioning test mode.
Light Guide… Illuminates the pointer Bank … Check to start the
of the SR-D100 test mode using a
5-4
Series. bank selected at (7).
Configuration Monitor … Displays the read

image of the SR-D100
If not checked, the
test mode is started
Series. This is used with the Alternate
This section describes the procedure to configure the SR-D100 Series with AutoID for the detailed function activated.
Network Navigator. positioning. (5) : Monitor screen
Monitor Settings Displays the read image of the
… Sets the display during SR-D100 Series.
Camera monitor operation. (6) : Exposure adjusting bar
This section describes the cinematic calibration operation and the Camera tab of Lighting Adjusts the exposure at the
the SR-D100 Series. … Sets the lighting blocks. monitor startup.
(3) : Tuning (7) : Parameter bank display window
Cinematic Calibration Flow Tuning…Performs a calibration. Displays the main parameter bank
Tuning option settings.
… Sets the calibration method. (8) : Reading state window
1 Click the Laser aiming button to adjust the code position easily. Tuning History Displays the reading state of the
* For SR-D130, the LED lights up instead of a pointer. … Displays the history of SR-D100 Series upon starting the
calibrations. test mode while calibrating.
Laser aiming
Reading distance
2 Click the Monitor button of the AutoID Network Navigator to decide

the final code position while viewing the monitor screen.
41 E SR-D100 UM
Auto • External lighting: Use lighting…Sets ON/OFF
of the SR-D100 Series
 Monitor Settings external lighting.
When this is not checked, the
 Camera settings external lighting is turned OFF.
(1) : Brightness mode • External lighting: Lighting blocks
High quality mode … Adjusts the monitor Inner circle … Sets ON/OFF of the
screen brightness inner circle lighting.
giving the priority to Middle circle… Sets ON/OFF of the
the easiness of code middle circle lighting.
(1)
viewing. (2) Outer circle1… Sets ON/OFF of the
High speed mode … Adjusts the monitor (3) outer circle lighting. <SR-DR15 is installed>
screen brightness (4) Outer circle2… Sets ON/OFF of the
giving the priority to extra outer circle
the setting at (2). (5) lighting.
(2) : Exposure on high speed mode (6) *Only when SR-DR15 is connected
Upper limit of exposure at scanning Example) Inner and outer circles are OFF and middle and extra outer
(3) : Offset circles are ON
Sets the offset (brightness standard
value) at scanning.
Do not change the setting value under
normal conditions.
(4) : Dynamic range
Sets the dynamic range for scanning.
Setting range: Hi-Sensitivity/Normal/Hi-SNR or Hi-DR
 Monitor Settings • External lighting block number
(5) : Filtering External lighting is divided in 8 directional blocks separate from the
Select the image resolution to display either before or after the filtering. circumference.
(6) : Rotate Image Based on the direction with the sticker, the block position is as
Select the image display direction from either 0 or 180 degree. follows:
0 degree: Above monitor screen… The SR-D100 Series installation screw
hole side
Under monitor screen … The SR-D100 Series test switch side
180 degree: Above monitor screen… The SR-D100 Series test switch side
Under monitor screen … The SR-D100 Series installation screw
hole side
 Lighting
• Internal lighting: Use lighting…Sets ON/OFF
of the SR-D100 Series <SR-DR15 is installed> <SR-DR10 is installed>
internal lighting. ON/OFF setting of the lighting is the same as the internal lighting
When this is not checked, the operation.
internal lighting is turned OFF.
• Internal lighting: Lighting blocks  Lighting Pattern List
Inner circle… Sets ON/OFF of the When the SR-DR10 or SR-DR15 is connected, the lighting patterns can be
inner circle lighting. confirmed on the list.
Outer circle…Sets ON/OFF of the With this list, 13 highly effective lighting patters can be automatically scanned
outer circle lighting. continuously and these read images can be checked to find the optimal lighting
Example) Inner circle is OFF pattern. This is particularly effective for hairline works.
and outer circle is ON
1. Click the Select lighting pattern button.
<External lighting is not installed>
2. The following screen is displayed and the scanning will be started automatically.
• Internal lighting block number
Internal lighting is divided in
4 directional blocks separate
from the circumference.
Each block position is as
follows:
1 : Test switch side
2 : Left side (close to the
Ethernet port)
3 : Mounting hole side
* Double-click on each image to enlarge the image.
4 : Right side (close to
the power/control port) <SR-DR10 is installed>
3. Double-clicking on the desired lighting pattern number to set displays the block
By clicking the block number settings.
area, ON/OFF of the lighting of the area can be set.
Example) Area 1 is clicked (Area 1 ON  OFF)
Important For SR-D130, the internal lighting block setting cannot be made.
E SR-D100 UM 42
 Monitor Screen (Calibration Area Settings)  Calibration result comparison method
Calibration area can be set on the monitor screen. Calibration time can be 1 Select the result to be the standard for comparison at (1) (History).
shortened by setting a calibration area.
 Calibration area setting procedure
For example,
1. Click on the area vertex of the calibration area to set on the screen. (Hold the select
button) number 1.
Orange frame is the calibration area. Hold the button.
2. Move the cursor while holding the button to set.
2 To select individual results to compare, select while holding the Ctrl

key.
To select a range (such as to select number 1 to 3), select while holding the
Shift key.
3. Click outside the calibration area to bring back to the original size. The color of the dots displayed in the reading state window is the same color as
the left end dot at (1) (History).
 Tuning Option [Select while holding the Ctrl key (for 1 and 3)]
(1) : Camera settings
Same as the monitor settings.
Refer to Page 42.
 Tuning Option
(2) : Tuning method
Normal mode… Calibrates without image (1)
processing filter.
Filter … Calibrates with image
processing filter.
[Select while holding the Shift key (for 1 and 3)]
(3) : Multi Read
Multi Read is a mode to read multiple
(2)
codes of the same type using a
parameter bank. (3)
Multi Read … Check to activate Multi
Read. Set a number of (4)
codes to read (2 to 16).

Allow reduced detection count
… Check to consider the
reading successful when the number of read codes is less
than the set number. 3 Number of bank registrations can be reduced when the calibration
(4) : Code setting results are judged to be close to the standard based on the
Set VeriCode compression setting. comparison of the calibration results in the reading state window.
* To support VeriCode, the license is necessary. For VeriCode compatibility,
consult KEYENCE sales personnel.
 Tuning History
Displays a history of calibrations
as a list. Use this function to
select or deselect settings to use
from multiple calibration results.
(1) : History As the brightness values on the high
Displays calibration results (1)
(4)
matching level are almost the same,
calibration result values of number 1
in the reverse and 2 can become one parameter
chronological order. (2)
bank.
(2) : "Update" and "Clear"

• Update
(3) (5) Point Because the comparison in the reading state window is a
… Reflects the calibration
result selected at (1) to comparison of brightness, filtering is not considered. Please note
the bank selected at (3). that when the filtering is different between the calibrations,
• Clear accurate comparison cannot be obtained.
…Deletes calibration histories.
(3) : Reading Settings
Use these to check the current parameter bank.
The bank to update also can be selected.
(4) : Tuning image
Displays an image while calibrating.
(5) : Tuning Result
Displays the reading state window while calibrating. When the Filter setting is
enabled, only the dot plot assigned by a calibration is displayed.
43 E SR-D100 UM
 Parameter Bank Display Window Manual
When the icon is clicked, a screen to set the details of parameter
banks is displayed.
 Common
• Alternate
Sets whether to use the alternate function for reading.
When Alternate is set to "Disable", the corresponding parameter bank will not be
used
• Alternate … Displays whether to use the alternate function. • Repeat read attempts
When Alternate is set to "Disable", the corresponding Sets the number of scanning/decoding operations repeated for a specific
parameter bank will not be used. parameter bank before it alternates to the next one.
• Code type … Code type to perform reading. 1 code type for each bank is Default : 0 times
displayed. Setting range : 0 to 32 times
• Exposure(s) … Sets the exposure time to scan an image. • Decode timeout (x10 ms)
• Gain … Amplifies the brightness of the scanned data. Specifies the decoding time limit. If decoding does not finish within this period,
• Dynamic range … Displays the dynamic range for scanning. the next scan is performed.
• Filter … Displays the filter type for scanning. Default : 10 (x10 ms)
• Filter count … Displays the number of filtering times. Setting range : 1 to 1000 (x10 ms)
• Shutter delay (x1ms)
 Reading State Window (During Calibration) Sets the delay between the recognition of a trigger input and the scanning start.
(1) : Level Only enabled for the first bank.
Displays the matching level. Default : 0 ms
(2) : Brightness Setting range : 0 to 255 ms
Divided in 128 comprehensive • Decoding Area
(1)
image brightness phases Limits the decoding area. The configuration is as follows. The following setting
according to the factors such as screen is displayed by clicking the item limited to the area for each bank.
dynamic range, gain and
exposure.
(1)
(2)
• Plot colors, when filtering function is activated (2)
Color Filter name Color code (RGB)

●: Black Disable 0,0,0 (3)
(4)
●: Yellow-green Equalize 68,192,0
●: Green Expand 0,130,58
●:Light blue Shrink 0,183,238
●: Blue Open 0,67,238
●: Purple Close 171,0,242
●: Pink Median 241,0,198
●: Orange Unsharp Mask 255,138,0
(1) Capture … Click to start scanning images.
(2) Decoding area … Displays the specified decoding area with pixel
 Reading State Window (Reading Rate) position values.
(3) Whole … Click to set the whole range as a decoding
• Parameter bank … Displays the bank
range.
number used for reading.
(4) Decoding area display area … Displays a decoding area. The area is specified
• Reading test … Displays a reading rate.
as follows:
• Matching level … Displays a matching
level.
1. Click on the vertex of the decoding area to limit on the screen. (Holding down
• Read Data … Displays data when the
button)
reading was successful.
 Reading State Window (Tact Test)

• Bank number … Displays the bank number
used for reading.
• Read time … Displays the latest read
Holding down button
time.
• Max time … Displays the maximum read
time.
• Min time … Displays the minimum read
time.
• Read Data … Displays data when the
reading was successful.
E SR-D100 UM 44
2. Move the cursor while holding down button to set. • Length of output
Sets the length to output.
Default : 7089
Setting range : 1 to 7089
• Target QR code version
Sets the version of QR code/MicroQR to perform reading.
<Setting screen>
3. Click outside the decoding area to bring back to the original size.
• Inverse read
Sets whether to read black and white reversed codes.
Default : Disabled
Setting range : Enable or Disable
• Reverse read
Sets whether to read right-left flipped codes.
Default : Disabled • DataMatrix code size
Setting range : Enable or Disable Sets the DataMatrix code size to perform reading.
• Base tilt angle <Setting screen>
Sets the base angle for a tilt angle range to limit reading.
When DataMatrix is set, the finder pattern rotates until it appears as an "L". When
the QR code is set, the corner without a finder pattern will become the bottom
right corner and 0 degrees. The angle rotates in the clockwise direction
(anticlockwise for Reverse read).
Default : 0 degrees
Setting range : 0 to 359 degrees
• Tilt angle range
Sets a tilt angle range to limit reading. Specify with ±* degree to the base tilt
angle.
Default : 180 degree
Setting range : 0 to 180 degree
 Internal Lighting
 Code • Use Internal lighting
• Code type Sets whether to use the internal lighting.
Sets the code type to perform reading. Default : Enable
• Codes to read Setting range : Enable or Disable
Sets the number of codes to read at multi read. • Light intensity
Default :1 Sets the intensity of the internal lighting.
Setting range : 1 to 16 Default :8
• Allow reduced detection count Setting range : 0 to 8
Sets whether to consider the reading is successful when the number of read • Lighting blocks
codes is less than the number set in the Codes to read field. Sets the lighting blocks of the internal lighting. The configuration is the same as in
Default : Disable Auto - Monitor - Lighting.
Setting range : Disable or Enable <Setting screen>
• Length
Sets the code length to perform reading.
Default : [Max] 7089, [Min] 1
• Code ID
Set this to use the Multi2 mode. Only 1 code can be read for the banks with the
same code ID.
Default : [Bank 1 to 16] 1 to 16 (same ID as the bank number is set).
Important For SR-D130, the internal lighting block setting cannot be made.
• Output length limitation
Sets whether to use the Output length limitation function.
Default : Disabled
Setting range : Disable or Enable  External Lighting
• Direction of output • Use External lighting
Sets the direction to specify the origin of the output length limitation either Sets whether to use the external lighting.
Forward or Backward. Default : Disabled
Default : Forward Setting range : Enable or Disable
Setting range : Forward or Backward • Light intensity
• Starting index of output Sets the intensity of the external lighting.
Sets the origin of the output length limitation. Default :8
Default :1 Setting range : 0 to 8
45 E SR-D100 UM
• SR-DR10 lighting blocks  Algorithm
Sets the lighting blocks of SR-DR10. The configuration is the same as in Auto -
• Grid correction
Monitor - Lighting.
Sets to either Enable or Disable for the grid correction.
<Setting screen>
Default : Auto
Setting range : Auto, Enable or Disable
Reference To copy or paste a parameter bank, right click on the bank number and
then perform copy or paste operation for the target parameter.
Screen image
• SR-DR15 lighting blocks

Sets the lighting blocks of SR-DR15. The configuration is the same as in Auto -
Monitor - Lighting.
<Setting screen>
 Camera
• Exposure (s)
Sets the exposure time for scanning.
Default : 1000 s Code
Setting range : 30 to 10000 s
Sets the code to read with the SR-D100 Series.
• Gain
Sets the gain for scanning.
Default :1 (1)
• Offset
(2)
Sets the offset value for the scanned data. Offset value is an item which affects
the contrast of scanned data.
(3)
This should not normally be changed from the default value.
(4)
Default : 254
• Dynamic range
Sets the dynamic range for the scanned data.
Default : Hi-SNR
Setting range : Hi-Sensitivity, Normal, Hi-SNR, or Hi-DR
 Filter
• First manual filter
Sets the filter to perform for the scanned data.
Set codes for each bank. Default values of each bank are the same.
Default : Disable
Same settings can be specified in Camera - Manual.
Setting range : Disable, Equalize, Expand, Shrink, Open, Close, Median, or
(1) : Code type
Unsharp Mask
Codes to read can be selected.
• First manual filter count
Default : 1: QR
Sets the repeat times to perform the first filtering operation specified.
Setting range : 1: QR, 2: DataMatrix or 19: VeriCode
Default :1
* To support VeriCode, the license is necessary. For VeriCode compatibility,
consult KEYENCE sales personnel.
• Second to Fourth manual filters…Same as First manual filter.
(2) : Length
• Second to Fourth manual filter counts…Same as First manual filter count.
The range of the acceptable code length is set according to the maximum
and minimum lengths.
To change the displayed maximum and minimum code lengths, click the
[Change] button and set the maximum and minimum code lengths on the
screen.
(3) : Detail
Sets the code size to perform reading (QR: Version, DataMatrix: Code Size)
and Multi Read.
( Page 32 Multiple Code Reading in Single Read Mode)
(4) : Length limitation
Sets the Length limitation function. Set the Length limitation function to send
only the read code data of the output data length starting from the specified
origin.
[Example 1] Limit Output : Forward [Example 2] Limit Output : Backward
Output length : 5 Output length : 5
Origin :2 Origin :2
Second from the first digit Second from the last digit
4 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 4 9 1 2 3 4 5 6
Output length: 5 Output length: 5
E SR-D100 UM 46
Communication1 Communication2
This section explains how to set the communication configuration for the SR-D100 Specify the communication settings for the target device. The same settings can be
Series. Same configuration can be set in the Table tab. specified in the Table tab.
(1)
(1)
(2)
(2)
(4)
(1) : RS-232C communication condition settings

Set these according to the external device to connect.
• Baud Rate (3)
Select 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, or 115200 bps.

Default: 115200 bps
• Data Bits
(1) : Command port
Select the data length of either 7 or 8 bits.
Select the interface to perform command communication. Commands
Default: 8 bits
indicate operation and configuration commands.
• Parity
Default : RS-232C
Select None, Even, or Odd.
Setting range : Not used, RS-232C or Ethernet
Default: Even
* If the Data port 2 interface is RS-232C, RS-232C cannot be
• Stop Bit
selected for the command communication.
Select 1 or 2 bits.
* When Ethernet is selected, set the port number to receive
Default: 1 bit
the SR-D100 Series commands.
• Protocol
Port default: 9004
Select None, PASS/RTRY, or ACK/NAK for the communication protocol.
(2) : Data port 1
Default: None
Select the interface to output the read data.
(2) : Ethernet communication condition settings
Default : RS-232C
Set these according to the network to connect.
• IP address
* If the Data port 2 interface is RS-232C, RS-232C cannot be
Set the IP address for the SR-D100 Series.
selected for Data port 1.
Default: 192.168.100.100
* When Ethernet is selected, set the port number to receive
• Subnet Mask
the SR-D100 Series commands.
Set the subnet mask for the SR-D100 Series.
Port default: 9004
Default: 255.255.255.0
* When Ethernet is selected and the SR-D100 is set as a
• Default Gateway
client, click the "Connected device settings" button to enter
Set the default gateway for the SR-D100 Series.
the IP address and port number of the destination to send
Default: 0.0.0.0
the read data.
(3) : Data port 2
Select the interface and protocol to output the read data to a PLC.
• Interface
Default : Not used
* When Ethernet is selected, enter the IP address and port
number of the destination to send the read data.
• Protocol
Default : MC protocol
Setting range : MC protocol, SYSWAY (only when RS-232C is selected),
KV STUDIO, EtherNet/IP (only when Ethernet is selected),
PROFINET (only when Ethernet is selected) or All-purpose
(No procedure/TCP)
• Memory layout
When the protocol is MC protocol, SYSWAY, or KV STUDIO, set the
memory layout.
• DM front address
Default :0
Setting range : Page 98
• Control region address
Default :0
• Response region address
Default :0
• PLC link timing input
Default : Disable
Setting range : Disable or Enable
47 E SR-D100 UM
• Ethernet/IP settings
Set Ethernet/IP.
Operation
Set the SR-D100 Series operation.
(2)
(3)
• PROFINET settings: Details (1)
Set PROFINET. (4)
(5)
(6) (8)
Important EtherNet/IP and PROFINET communication cannot be used in (7)

combination with the Master/Slave function (1) : Reading Mode
If the Master/Slave function has already been selected, the Select one of the following 4 choices:
following message will appear. When setting EtherNet/IP and • Single… Reads 1 code while trigger input is ON once.
PROFINET communication, set the Master/Slave function to "Not • Multi1 … Reads multiple codes in series while trigger input is ON once.
used". To make sure that no code is read twice, set a Repeat read
prevention interval.
Important When Multi1 is selected, area (4) will change to

the following window.
Set the duplicate reading prevention interval
reset.
"3-12 Duplicate reading prevention interval reset
(4) : Format (Page 28)"
• Header/Terminator
Sets the header and terminator of the read data.
• Header
Default : None
Setting range : Select None, STX, ESC, or Config.
• Multi2 … Performs reading for all code IDs of the specified parameter
When Config is selected, enter the header using 5 or less
banks while trigger input is ON once.
ASCII or hexadecimal characters as desired.
• Burst read … Performs scanning continuously in the specified Burst interval,
• Terminator
to read 1 code while trigger input is ON once.
Default : CR
When Multi1 or Multi2 is selected, the following window is
Setting range : CR, CR+LF, ETX, or Config.
displayed and the decode timeout of parameter bank is set to
When Config is selected, enter the header using 5 or less
500 ms.
ASCII or hexadecimal characters as desired.
• Partition mark
The selected character is used as a separator in send data. Select any
single ASCII or hexadecimal character.
Default : ":" (3Ah)
• Inter delimiter
The selected character is used as a separator for appended data. Select (2) : Data Transmission
any single ASCII or hexadecimal character. Select one of the following timing settings to send read data:
Default : "," (2Ch) • Send after read
• Send after timing off
(3) : Duplicate reading prevention interval
Multi1 when selecting the Reading mode, set the time to prevent reading the
same code twice.
Default : 1000 ms
Setting range : 100 to 25500 ms (in units of 100 ms)
(4) : Burst scan interval
Set the interval between the scans performed continuously.
Default : 0 ms
Setting range : 0 to 255 ms
E SR-D100 UM 48
(5) : Timing Measurement Mode (3) : Unit ID
Select one of the following 2 methods: Sets ID as Master unit or Slave unit.
• Level trigger : Begins scanning when the trigger input is turned ON and • Default : Check "Use as Master"
begins to read codes. • Setting range : "Use as Master" or Slave ID "1 to 31"
When reading has finished, scanning will stop and data (4) : Multi Head
will be sent. Sets the number of read data when using the Multi Head.
This is the default setting. • Default :1
• One-shot trigger : Reads codes for the specified one-shot trigger duration • Setting range : 1 to 8
only when a trigger input turns ON. (5) : Append Information
When the reading has finished or the one-shot trigger Sets to append group names or Master/Slave ID when using the Master/
duration ends, scanning will cease and the data will be Slave function.
sent. • Default : None
When selecting this option, set the one-shot trigger (6) : Master/Slave Reader View
duration. Displays the information of the reader that uses the Master/Slave function
Default : 1000 ms among readers that have been registered to AutoID Network Navigator.
(6) : Timing ON command Code quality verification
Controls the character strings used to send input ON commands.
• Default : ON command "LON" (4C4F4Eh)
• Setting range : Up to 8 characters
Use ASCII or HEX.
(7) : Timing OFF command (1)
Controls the character strings used to send input OFF commands.
• Default : ON command "LOFF" (4C4F4646h)
• Setting range : Up to 8 characters
Use ASCII or HEX. (2)
(8) : Read error string

Sets the error code of the data to be sent when codes cannot be read.
• Default : ERROR (4552524F52h)
• Setting range : Up to 8 characters (1) Matching Level Judgment
Use ASCII or HEX. Sets the Matching Level Judgment function.
Setting this as empty means that no error code is sent. Default : Disable
Changing the setting to "Enable" will enable the setting items for threshold or
Master/Slave appending matching level.
(2) Code quality verification
Sets the Code quality verification function. Check the code quality verification
(2)
standard.
With the checked standard, set the threshold for the verified result or additional
data of grade.
Additional data setting for detailed items of verified results can also be made.
(1) (3)
Edit data
(4) (5)
(6) (1)
(1) : Operation setting (2)
Sets the Master/Slave function operation.

(3)
• Default : Not used
• Setting range : Not used, Multi Drop, Multi Head (1) Additional Information
(2) : Group name Checking the checkbox of data to add can set the Additional Information.
Determines the group name to use the Master/Slave function. Default : None for all items
• Default : GROUP01 (2) Read Data Format
• Setting range : Up to 16 characters Displays the position of added data when the Additional Information is set.
Set with ASCII. (3) Edit Data
Check "Use script" when using the edit data function.
49 E SR-D100 UM
(5) Output duration
I/O Terminal Sets the ON duration of a result output (OK, NG, ERROR, STABLE,
Specify the I/O terminals of the SR-D100 Series. UNSTABLE, and PRESET OK).
Default : 500 ms
(6) TRG BUSY output at power-on
(1) Sets whether to output the TRG BUSY signal at power-on.
(3) Default : Enable
(2)
(5)
Saving Images
Configures the image saving of the SR-D100 Series.
(6)
(4)
(1)
 Input Terminal
Sets the input terminal (IN1 and IN2) operation.
(1) Input polarity (2)
Sets the polarity of the input terminal.

Default : Norm. open
(3)
Setting range : Norm. open (Normally open) or Norm. close (Normally close)
(2) Input time constant
Sets the delay until input terminal is ON.  Saving Images
Default : 2 ms
(1) Saving Images settings
Setting range : 1 ms, 2 ms, or 10 ms
Sets each image type to save.
(3) IN1 and IN2 terminal functions
The following 5 image types are available:
Sets the functions specified to the IN1 and IN2 terminals.
• OK image……… Images which had Read OK and Comparison OK (if preset
• Function
comparison is performed)
Default : IN1…Timing input
• NG image……… Images which had Read OK and Comparison NG (if preset
IN2…preset input
comparison is performed)
Setting range : Disable, timing input, preset input, TEST, Capture, Clear PLC
• Error image………Images which had Read ERROR
link error, Trigger lock, or Quick setup
• Unstable image… Images of which the matching levels are lower than the
• Test mode
threshold
When "TEST" is selected, specify the test mode to start.
* Matching level OK/NG judgment function must be
Setting range : Reading rate test, Read time test, or Positioning test
enabled.
• Bank used to capture images
• Instant Capture… Images instant captured.
When "Capture" is selected, specify the parameter bank to use for capturing.
Default : OK image …Disabled
NG image …Save to RAM
• Power-on trigger
Error image …Save to RAM
Check this option to activate the input function specified for the IN1 and IN2
Unstable image …Save to RAM
terminals at power-on.
Instant Capture …Save to RAM
 Output Terminal Setting range : Disabled (no instant capture image), Save to RAM, Save to
ROM, or Send by FTP
Sets the output terminal (OUT1, OUT2, and OUT3) operation. • Image save mode
(4) OUT1, OUT2, and OUT3 terminal functions Sets the mode to save images. For details, refer to "Image Saving Function
Set the functions specified to the OUT1, OUT2, and OUT3 terminals. (Page 18)".
• Function Default : Save final bank image
Default : OUT1…OK Setting range : Save final bank image, Save images after timing ON, or Save
OUT2…NG, ERROR images after timing OFF
OUT3…TRG BUSY, LOCK BUSY, MODE BUSY, ERR BUSY • Number of images to save
Setting range : OK, NG, ERROR, STABLE, UNSTABLE, PRESET OK, TRG Set this option when "Save images after timing ON" or "Save images after timing
BUSY, LOCK BUSY, MODE BUSY, ERR BUSY, or FILE OFF" is selected for the Image save mode.
BUSY Default : 32 images
Setting range : 1 to 32 images
Important You cannot set both the result output (OK, NG, ERROR, STABLE,
UNSTABLE, and PRESET OK) and the operation output (TRG
BUSY, LOCK BUSY, MODE BUSY, ERR BUSY and FILE BUSY) to
the same respective terminals.
E SR-D100 UM 50
 FTP Settings  Ethernet
(2) FTP Settings • IP address
Set this section if any image type is set to Send by FTP in the Saving Images Sets the IP address.
section. Default : 192.168.100.100
• IP address • Subnet Mask
Sets the IP address of the destination when the SR-D100 Series is the FTP Sets the subnet mask.
client. Default : 24 (255.255.255.0)
Default : 0.0.0.0 Setting range : 8 to 30 (255.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.252)
Setting range : 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255 • Default Gateway
• User name/Password Sets the default gateway.
Sets the user name/password of the destination required for FTP client Default : 0.0.0.0
operations.
Default : User name…admin Communication2
Password…admin
Setting range : Up to 16 characters  Command port
Set in ASCII characters.
• Passive mode • Interface
Set this option to send passive commands to the remote FTP server. Select the interface to perform command communication.
Default : Disable Default : RS-232C
Setting range : Enable or Disable Setting range : Not used, RS-232C, Ethernet
(3) Edit Image File Name • Port (Waiting)
When setting the edit image file name function, check "Use script". Sets the port number to perform command communication. *Only when the
* Valid only in FTP transmission interface is set to Ethernet
Default : 9004
Table * 9013, 9014, 9015, 5900, 5910, and 44818 cannot be used as
they are reserved for the main unit system.
Sets the SR-D100 Series operations in a table view. • Keep Alive
Sets the keep-alive function for command communication. *Only when the
interface is set to Ethernet
Default : Enable
 Data port 1
• Interface
Sets the interface to output data.
Default : RS-232C
Setting range : Not used, RS-232C, Ethernet
• Remote IP address
Sets the remote IP address for Data port 1. *Only when the interface is Ethernet
Default : 0.0.0.0 *When 0.0.0.0 is set, the SR-D100 performs server
operations only.
(1)
Setting range : 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255
(1) Search box • Remote port
Search whether the input words are present in the Table. Sets the remote port number for Data port 1. *Only when the interface is Ethernet
Default : 9004
Communication1 Setting range : 1024 to 65535
• Connection request
 RS-232C Sets whether to send connection request for Data port 1. *Only when the
interface is Ethernet
• Baud rate
Default : Disabled
Sets the baud rate.
Default : 115200 bps
• Port (Waiting)
Setting range : 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, or 115200 bps
Sets the port number for Data port 1 of the SR-D100 Series. *Only when the
• Data length
interface is Ethernet
Sets the data bit length.
Default : 9004
Default : 8 bits
Setting range : 7 or 8 bits
* 9013, 9014, 9015, 5900, 5910, and 44818 cannot be used as
• Parity
they are reserved for the main unit system.
Sets the parity.
• Keep Alive
Default : Even
Sets the Keep Alive function for Data port 1. *Only when the interface is Ethernet
Setting range : None, Even, or Odd.
Default : Enable
• Stop bit
Sets the stop bit length.
Default : 1 bit
Setting range : 1 or 2 bits
• Protocol
Sets the output protocol for RS-232C read data.
Default : None
Setting range : None, PASS/RTRY, or ACK/NAK
51 E SR-D100 UM
 Data port 2 • Output assembly data size (receive)
Sets EtherNet/IP Output assembly (receive) size within the range from 4 to 1400.
• Interface
Default : 500
Sets the interface for Data port 2.
Default : Not used
• Byte swapping
Setting range : Not used, RS-232C, Ethernet
Sets EtherNet/IP Byte swap for the data area.
• Remote IP address
Default : Disable
Sets the remote IP address for Data port 2. *Only when the interface is Ethernet
Default : 0.0.0.0
Setting range : 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255  PROFINET
• Remote port
Sets the remote port number for Data port 2. *Only when the interface is Ethernet • Device name
Default : 5000 Sets the device name used for PROFINET.
Setting range : 1024 to 65535 Default : sr-d100
• Protocol
Sets the PLC communication protocol.
Important Device name rule
Default : MC protocol 1. PROFINET device name length: 1 to 240 characters
Setting range : MC protocol, SYSWAY (*RS-232C only), KV STUDIO, None (*RS- 2. 1 label length: 1 to 63 characters
3. Only [a to z] (alphabet lower case), [0 to 9] (numbers), [-]
232C only), TCP (*Ethernet only), EtherNet/IP (*Ethernet only) or
(hyphen), [.] (period) can be used for a device name.
PROFINET (*Ethernet only)
4. [-] (hyphen) cannot be used at the beginning of the label.
 PLC link 5. [-] (hyphen) cannot be used at the end of the label.
6. port-xyz, port-xyz-abcde cannot be the name of the first label.
• DM front address
a, b, c, d, e, x, y, z means [0 to 9] (numbers).
Sets the DM front address when a PLC link is used.
7. Device names cannot be made in the IP address format
Default :0
(n.n.n.n n=0,…,999).
Setting range : MC protocol …0 to 32767
8. Labels cannot start with xn-.
SYSWAY …0 to 9999
9. The first character of labels cannot be a number.
KV STUDIO …0 to 65534
• Control region address
Sets the control region address when a PLC link is used. • Data handshake
Default :0 Sets the data handshake.
Setting range : MC protocol …0 to 7F Default : Disable
SYSWAY …0 to 6143 Setting range : Disable or Enable
KV STUDIO …1 to 599
 Format
• Response region address
Sets the response region address when a PLC link is used. • Header
Default :0 Sets the header.
Setting range : MC protocol …0 to 7F Default : Not selected
SYSWAY …0 to 6143 Setting range : Enter the header using 5 or less ASCII or hexadecimal characters
KV STUDIO …1 to 599 as desired.
• PLC link timing input • Terminator
Sets to enable timing input by PLC link. Sets the terminator.
Default : Disabled Default : 0D (hexadecimal display, ASCII characters [CR])
Setting range : Disable or Enable Setting range : Enter the header using 5 or less ASCII or hexadecimal characters
• Output length as desired.
Sets the data write length by PLC link. • Partition mark
Default : 64 digits Sets the partition mark.
Setting range : 1 to 100 digits Default : 3A (hexadecimal display, ASCII characters ":")
• Timing/Data wait (x 100 ms) Setting range : Enter any single ASCII or hexadecimal character.
Sets the communication interval of reading or writing to a PLC via PLC link. • Inter delimiter
Default : 100 ms Sets the inter delimiter.
Setting range : 0 to 9900 ms (in units of 100 ms) Default : 2C (hexadecimal display, ASCII characters ",")
• Retry duration Setting range : Enter any single ASCII or hexadecimal characters.
Sets the interval to reconnect when PLC link communication is disabled. • Append data size
Default : 5 seconds Set this option to append data size.
Setting range : 1 to 30 seconds Default : Disabled
 EtherNet/IP • Append checksum
• Data handshake Set this option to append checksum function.
Sets EtherNet/IP data handshake Default : Disabled
Default : Disable Setting range : Disable or Enable
• Input assembly data size (send)
Sets EtherNet/IP Input assembly (send) size within the range from 40 to 1400.
Default : 500
E SR-D100 UM 52
Operation  Master/Slave
• Operation setting
 TIMING Sets the Master/Slave function operation.
• Test mode on startup Default : Not used
Sets the test mode to start upon reader startup. Setting range : Not used, Multi Drop or Multi Head
Default : None • Group name
Setting range : None, Reading rate test, Read time test, or Positioning test Sets group name.
• Timing Mode Default : GROUP01
Sets the method of measuring timing. Setting range : Input up to 16 arbitrary characters using the ASCII character.
Default : Level trigger • Unit ID
Setting range : Level trigger or One-shot trigger Sets ID of SR-D100.
• One-shot trigger duration Default :0
Sets the measuring duration of one-shot trigger. Setting range : 0 to 31
Default : 1000 ms • Read data number for Multi Head mode
Setting range : 30 to 25500 ms (in units of 10 ms) Sets the number of read data during multi head operation.
• Timing ON command Default :1
Sets the timing ON command characters. Setting range : 1 to 8
Default : 4C4F4E (hexadecimal display, ASCII characters "LON")
Setting range : Enter a string using 8 or less ASCII or hexadecimal characters as
 Alternate
desired. • Priority bank
• Timing OFF command Sets the parameter bank to start reading when the Alternate function is used.
Sets the timing OFF command characters. Default :1
Default : 4C4F4646 (hexadecimal display, ASCII characters "LOFF") Setting range : 1 to 16
Setting range : Enter a string using 8 or less ASCII or hexadecimal characters as • Order
desired. Sets the alternate order changing method. When "Begin with successful bank" is
• One-character timing recognition set, the alternate comes from the parameter bank that was last read successfully.
Set to enable one-character timing recognition. Default : Begin with successfully read bank
Default : Disable Setting range : Sequential or Begin with successfully read bank
 Matching Function
Important The following strings can recognize a timing ON/OFF command as • Matching level OK/NG judgment
one-character: Sets to judge the matching level when a reading was successful.
SOH (0x01) SI (0x0f) FS (0x1c) Default : Disable
STX (0x02) DLE (0x10) GS (0x1d) Setting range : Disable or Enable
ETX (0x03) DC1 (0x11) RS (0x1e) • Matching level threshold
EOT (0x04) DC2 (0x12) US (0x1f) Sets the threshold for matching level OK/NG judgment.
ENQ (0x05) DC3 (0x13) Default : 70
* If STX (0x02) or ETX (0x03) is set for
BEL (0x07) DC4 (0x14) either the timing ON or OFF
BS (0x08) SYN (0x16) command, the command is not
HT (0x09) ETB (0x17) recognized in the "<STX> command  Code quality verification
VT (0x0b) CAN (0x18) <ETX>" format. • ISO/IEC15415 verification
FF (0x0c) EM (0x19) Sets ISO/IEC15415 verification function.
SO (0x0e) SUB (0x1a) Default : Disable
• ISO/IEC15415 verification threshold
 Reading Behavior Sets the threshold of ISO/IEC15415 evaluation result.
Default : Disable
• Reading Mode
Setting range : Disable, D, C, B or A
Sets the reading mode.
• ISO/IEC TR 29158 (AIM DPM-1-2006) verification
Default : Single
Sets ISO/IEC TR 29158 (AIM DPM-1-2006) verification function.
Setting range : Single, Multi1, Multi2, or Burst read
Default : Disable
• Data Transmission
Sets the timing to send data.
• ISO/IEC TR 29158 (AIM DPM-1-2006) verification threshold
Default : Send after read
Sets the threshold of ISO/IEC TR 29158 (AIM DPM-1-2006) evaluation result.
Setting range : Send after read or Send after timing off
Default : Disable
• Duplicate reading prevention interval (x100 ms)
Setting range : Disable, D, C, B or A
Sets the time to prevent reading the same code twice in the Multi1 Reading
• SAE AS9132 verification
mode.
Sets SAE AS9132 verification function.
Default : 1000 ms
Default : Disable
• Duplicate reading prevention interval reset
Sets the duplicate reading prevention interval reset.
Default : Reset when a code is read
Setting range : Reset when a code is read or Do not reset during duplicate
prevention interval
• Read error string
Sets the reading error code.
Default : 4552524F52 (hexadecimal display, ASCII characters "ERROR")
Setting range : Enter a string using 8 or less ASCII or hexadecimal characters as
desired.
• Burst interval (x1ms)
Sets the burst interval.
Default : 0 ms
Setting range : 0 to 255 ms
53 E SR-D100 UM
• SAE AS9132 verification threshold • ISO/IEC15415 verification result
Sets the threshold of SAE AS9132 evaluation result. Sets ISO/IEC15415 verification result addition function.
Default : Disable Default : Disable
Setting range : Disable or Enable Setting range : Disable or Enable
• SEMI T10-0701 verification • ISO/IEC TR 29158 (AIM DPM-1-2006) verification result
Sets SEMI T10-0701 verification function. Sets ISO/IEC TR 29158 (AIM DPM-1-2006) verification result addition function.
• Select expression of grades • SAE AS9132 verification result
Set this option to select expression of quality grades. Sets SAE AS9132 verification result addition function.
Default : Alphabet Default : Disable
Setting range : Alphabet or Numeric Setting range : Disable or Enable
• Append detailed verification result • SEMI T10-0701 verification result
Sets the detailed verification result addition function when the verification result is Default : Disable
appended. Setting range : Disable or Enable
Default : Disable • Image file name
Setting range : Disable or Enable Set this option to append image name.
• Append values Default : Disabled
Sets the evaluation value addition function when the verification result is Setting range : Disable or Enable
appended. • Read time
Default : Disable Sets the read time function.
Setting range : Disable or Enable Default : Disabled
 Edit Data • Group name
• Data edit by script Sets the additional function for the group name used in the Master/Slave
Sets the edit data function. function.
• Master/Slave ID
 Additional Data Sets the additional function for Master/Slave ID.
Default : Disable
• Time
Set this option to append time.
Default : Disabled  Comparison
• Code type • Comparison method
Set this option to append code type. Sets the comparison method.
Default : Disabled Default : Normal
Setting range : Disable or Enable Setting range : Normal or Sequential
• Symbol ID • Origin
Set this option to append symbol ID. Sets the origin of comparison or preset.
Default : Disabled Default :1
Setting range : Disable or Enable Setting range : 1 to 7089
• Parameter bank • Length
Set this option to append bank number. Sets the length for comparison or preset.
Default : Disabled Default : 494
Setting range : Disable or Enable Setting range : Normal …0 to 494
• Read count Sequential …0 to 9
Set this option to append scan count. • Increment
Default : Disabled When the comparison method is Sequential, set the increment.
Setting range : Disable or Enable Default :1
• Position level Setting range : - 9999 to 9999
Set this option to append position measurement level. • Preset data
Default : Disabled Registers the preset data.
Setting range : Disable or Enable Default : Not selected
• Code vertex Setting range : Enter up to 494 ASCII or hexadecimal characters.
Set this option to append corner coordinates of codes.
Default : Disabled
• Code center
Set this option to append center coordinates of codes.
Default : Disabled
• ECC level (UEC)
Set this option to append unused ECC ratio.
Default : Disabled
• Matching level
Set this option to append matching level.
Default : Disabled
E SR-D100 UM 54
I/O Saving Images
 Input Terminal Common • OK image

Sets the saving option for images successfully read.
• Input polarity
Default : Disabled
Sets the input polarity of the IN terminal.
Setting range : Disabled, Save to RAM, Save to ROM, or Send by FTP
Default : Norm. open
• NG image
Setting range : Norm. open or Norm. close
Sets the saving option for read NG images.
• Required input duration
Default : Save to RAM
Sets the required input duration for the IN terminal.
Default : 2 ms
• Error image
Setting range : 1 ms, 2 ms, or 10 ms
Sets the save destination for read error images.
 IN1/2 Terminal Default : Save to RAM
• Function • Unstable image
Sets the function for the IN1/2 terminal. Sets the save destination for unstable images.
Default : IN1 terminal…Timing input Default : Save to RAM
IN2 terminal…Preset input Setting range : Disabled, Save to RAM, Save to ROM, or Send by FTP
Setting range : Disable, Timing input, Preset input, TEST, Capture, Clear PLC • Captured image
link error, Trigger lock, or Quick setup Sets the saving option for captured images.
• Test mode Default : Save to RAM
When "TEST" is selected, specify the test mode to start. Setting range : Save to RAM, Save to ROM, or Send by FTP
Default : Reading rate test • Image Save Mode
Setting range : Reading rate test, Read time test, or Positioning test Sets the image saving mode.
• Bank used to capture images Default : Save final bank image
When "Capture" is selected, specify the parameter bank to use for capturing. Setting range : Save final bank image, Save specified number of images after
Default :1 timing ON, or Save specified number of images after timing OFF
Setting range : 1 to 16 • Number of images to save
• Startup state Sets the number of images to save after the timing ON/OFF.
Sets whether to activate the input function specified for the IN1 and IN2 terminals Default : 32 images
at power-on. Setting range : 1 to 32 images
Default : Disable • Edit image file name by script (FTP transmission only)
Setting range : Disable or Enable Sets the edit image file name function.
• IN LED synchronization Default : Disable
Set whether to synchronize with IN LED. Setting range : Disable or Enable
Default : IN1…Enable
IN2…Disabled  FTP Settings
• IP address
 Output Terminal Sets the IP address of the remote FTP server.
Default : 0.0.0.0
• TRG BUSY Output at Power On Setting range : 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255
Set this option to enable TRG BUSY output upon reader startup. • User/Password
Default : Enable Sets the user name/password of the destination required for FTP client
Setting range : Disable or Enable operations.
• Output duration Default : User…admin
Sets the output ON duration for the OUT terminal. Password…admin
Default : 500 ms Setting range : Up to 16 characters
Setting range : 10 to 2550 ms Set in ASCII characters.
• OUT1/2/3 function • Passive mode
Sets the function for the OUT1/2/3 terminal. Set this option to send passive commands to the remote FTP server.
Default : OUT1…OK Default : Disable
OUT2…NG (Comparison NG), ERROR Setting range : Enable or Disable
OUT3…TRG, LOCK, MODE, ERR BUSY • Change directory
Setting range : OK, NG (Comparison NG), ERROR, STABLE, UNSTABLE, Set this option to change FTP remote directory.
PRESET OK, TRG BUSY, LOCK BUSY, MODE BUSY, ERR Default : Disabled
BUSY, or FILE BUSY Setting range : Disable or Enable
• Binning
Specify the binning function.
Default : Full
Setting range : Full, 1/4, 1/16, 1/64
• Directory name
Sets the remote directory.
Default : image
Setting range : 1 to 32 characters
• Keep connected
Check this option to let reader send connection requests whenever the
connection is closed.
Default : Disabled
• Send NOOP command
Sets whether to send NOOP commands periodically.
Default : Enable
• NOOP command interval (minutes)
Sets the sending interval for NOOP commands.
Default : 1 minute
Setting range : 1 to 10 (minutes)
55 E SR-D100 UM
Misc 5-5 Sending/Receiving
• Output data on TEST button
Sets the data output when the TEST button is pressed.
Configuration
Default : Enable
Setting range : Disable or Enable This section explains the transmission of a configuration between AutoID Network
• Filling size Navigator and the SR-D100 Series.
Sets the data filling size. This fills the missing digits with the specified data filling
characters when the read data is less than the set size.
Sending Configuration to the SR-D100 Series
Default :0
• Filling character 1 Click the button.
Sets the data filling characters.
Default : 20 (hexadecimal display, ASCII characters "(SP)")
Setting range : Enter any single ASCII or hexadecimal characters.
• Silent Mode
Set this option to enable silent mode.
Default : Not selected
Setting range : Comparison OK and Read OK, Comparison NG, Read ERROR,
Stable Reading (OK/Comparison NG), Unstable Reading (OK/
Comparison NG), Preset Result, or Test mode
• Reader
Sets the reader name.
Default : READER
Setting range : Up to 8 characters
• Monitor output data priority display position
Sets the monitor output data priority display position.
Default : Forward
Setting range : Forward or Backward
• VNC pixel format 2 When the transmission finishes with the message "Configuration
Sets the format when the image is output in VNC. sent successfully.", the settings specified on the individual tabs
Default : 8 bit color have been written to the SR-D100 Series.
Setting range : 16 bit color, 8 bit color
 Trigger command response

• Specify response character
Sets the LON and LOFF trigger command response.
Default : Disable
Setting range : Disable, SR-600 compatible and User setting Receiving Configuration from the SR-D100 Series
• SR-600 compatible
Sets the SR-600 compatible output mode. If this is enabled, the responses of 1 Click the button.
LON, LONmm, LOFF, PRON, PROFF, RESET and BCLR commands become
the same as those of SR-600.
Default : Disable
Reference SR-600 returns the responses as below.

• LON Response: None
• LONmm Response: None
• LOFF Response: None
• PRON Response: None
• PROFF Response: None
• RESET Response: OK
• BCLR Response: OK
• User setting
Sets the response for the following commands to Success response character
or Failure response character.
• LON
• LONmm
• LOFF
2 When the settings are received for the configuration file currently
• PRON
being edited, the following message is displayed:
• PROFF Click "Yes" to save the configuration file currently being edited, click
• RESET "No" to not save, or "Cancel" to cancel receiving the configuration.
• BCLR
• Success response character
Sets the response character string when LON and LOFF is normally processed.
Default : OK(0x4F4B)
Set with ASCII or HEX.
• Failure response character 3 When the reception finishes with the message "Configuration
Sets the response character string when the process (e.g. LON is sent during retrieved successfully.", the configuration of the SR-D100 Series
LON. LOFF is sent during reading standby.) fails. have been reflected on the tabs of AutoID Network Navigator.
Default : ER(0x4552)
Set with ASCII or HEX.
E SR-D100 UM 56
5-6 Saving/Reading a Reading Configuration Files
Configuration File Change the configuration file of AutoID Network Navigator.
1 Click the button.

The specified settings can be saved as a configuration file or read from a
configuration file.
Saving a Configuration File

You can save the settings specified with AutoID Network Navigator as a
configuration file.
1 Click the button.
2 Select a file from the "Open" dialog box.
You can also save a configuration file from the "File", "Save", "Save As ", or
"Save All" commands in the menu bar.
2 When the "Save As" dialog box is displayed, enter the file name.
3 Click the "Open" button.
The settings saved in that file will be displayed.
5-7 Quick Setup Code

The settings made with AutoID Network Navigator can be printed as 2D codes,
which can be read into the SR-D100 Series and thus set all of the parameters for
that device at once.
Printing Quick Setup Codes

The file is saved with the "ptc" extension.
When the setting to use the edit data function or the edit image file name function
has been made, the message box to save the script file appears. Press "Yes" to
1 Click the button.
save the script file.
3 Click the "Save" button.

The configuration will be saved in the specified file.
57 E SR-D100 UM
2 Enter any comments, or change the Error Correction Level value in
the QR code section as necessary.
5-8 LiveView
When you click the icon, the
LiveView screen appears.
The LiveView screen shows an image of
every scan in real time.
When the LiveView starts up, activate the
terminal window at the same time.
(The window on the right will appear.)
• Comment: Any comments that have been entered will be printed. Contents of the LiveView Screen
• Error Correction Level: Quick setup codes are printed with the Error Correction
Level specified. (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)
3 Click the "Print" button.
Important • When reading the quick setup code with the high-resolution type
unit (SR-D100H), you must use a printer with high print quality.
When a printer with low print quality is used, the cells in the 2D
code may bleed and become unreadable. (1)
• The high-resolution type unit (SR-D100HA) cannot use this

function because the quick setup code does not fit inside the
field of view.
• Script files for both edit data function and edit image file name
function are not supported.
[Printout sample]
(9) (10) (12) (13) (11)
Refer to "Tuning Screen (Page 41)", for the functions of the monitor screen or
buttons not explained here.
(1) : All parameter bank display window
Displays the latest images of each parameter bank.
Double-clicking the image of a specific bank displays its enlarged image.
A green frame of a parameter bank indicates successful reading and a red
frame indicates failed reading.
(2) : Bank show/hide switch
Click to show/hide the All parameter bank display and Reading state
windows.
(3) : High Precision button
Displays images in High Precision. As the High Precision mode uses more
data for an image used, the animation will be slower than the Normal mode.
(4) : Before filtering/After filtering switch
Switches the displayed image on the monitor to the Before filtering or After
Reading Quick Setup Codes filtering image.
Use the TEST switch of the SR-D100 Series to read printed quick setup codes into (5) : Up/Down rotation button
the SR-D100 Series. Rotates the displayed image on the monitor 180 degrees.
Refer to "Reading Quick Setup Codes" (Page 91) for the operation method. (6) : Zoom In/Zoom Out button
Click to Zoom In/Zoom Out an image.
Zoom In …Left double-click
Zoom Out…Right double-click
(7) : Specify Region button
Click to specify a calibration or decoding area.
Click this button, then click the desired area specification method from
Calibration Area, Decoding Area, or None.
(8) : Code details button
Click this button to read immediately. When a code is read, the code
information is displayed.
The cell size is calculated assuming that a code is in the focal distance.
[Code information display sample]
• Output Report Data

Outputs the code information in the report file.
E SR-D100 UM 58
(9) : Bank check box (4) : Search Pictures
Check this box to start the Reading rate test or Read time test mode Sets the location to search images.
specifying a parameter bank. Setting range: Reader (ROM/RAM) or Local directory
(10): Capture (5) : Latest image
Click to save a read image as an image file. Searches the image files in the search location specified and displays OK
When this button is clicked, the "Save As" window is displayed. The image images and Error images of each parameter bank.
will be captured and saved when the Save button is clicked. • Target OK images : ***_S_**.bmp (OK images) and ***_W_**.bmp (Error
File type: Bitmap file images)
File name: YYYYMMDDhhmmss.bmp • Target Error images : ***_E_**.bmp (Error images)
(11): Target bank • Refer to Page 20 "Image file name", for image file names.
Sets a target bank when the test mode with a parameter bank specification is • Refresh button: Click to refresh the image to the latest one.
started. • Display selection
(12): Calibration report Right-clicking on an image displays the selection menu for the displays.
Outputs the previous calibration result in the report file. Click on the display to select.
The results of reading rate measurement test mode and tact measurement [Selection menu]
test mode performed after calibration will be reflected.
(13): Test report
Outputs the results of reading rate measurement test mode and tact
5-10
measurement test mode in the report file.
FileView
5-9 ImageView When you click the icon, the FileView screen appears.
On this screen, you can check, save or delete the images and configuration files
When you click the icon, the ImageView screen appears. saved in the RAM/ROM of the SR-D100 Series.
On the ImageView screen, you can capture images, or confirm images by
displaying the images saved in the RAM/ROM of the SR-D100 Series or a PC.
Contents of the FileView Screen
Contents of the ImageView Screen
(1)
(3)
(3)
(4)
(2)
(1)
(4)
(5)
(5)
(2)
(1) : Display 1 (1) : Reader list

Displays an image. When a captured or the latest image is double-clicked, it Select a reader to check files from the readers registered in AutoID Network
is displayed on Display 1. Navigator.
• Image Details: Check to display the creation date of the displayed image on (2) : Remote Drive
the bottom right, and the reader name in use on the top left. Select a memory to check files either Drive A (RAM) or Drive B (ROM).
• Open button: Click to display any image files saved in a PC. (3) : File
• Save button: Click to save the image currently displayed as a Selects the file to confirm from the Configuration file, Image file and Script file.
BitmapFile. (4) : Refresh button
(2) : Display 2 Click to refresh the file display.
Displays an image. The functions to display image information, as well as the (5) : File list
Open and Save buttons are the same as Display 1. Displays a list of files selected at (3) and saved in the location selected at (2).
(3) : Instant Capture Right-clicking on a file name displays a menu similar to below to open, delete,
Captures the current image. When the Captured image button is clicked, the or save the file.
image specified with a parameter bank is captured and displayed in Display [File menu]
1.
59 E SR-D100 UM
5-11 Terminal (1) : Edit message
Area in which to input commands sent to the SR-D100 Series.
• Header/delimiter
Click the icon to display the terminal screen. Specify headers and terminators for commands sent to the SR-D100
The terminal can be used to confirm code data read by the SR-D100 Series, or Series.
send commands to the SR-D100 Series. Default value: None/CR
Additionally, the terminal screen can be used to start the LiveView window, and Setting range: None/CR, STX/ETX
confirm in real time scanned images. • Command
Input commands sent to the SR-D100 Series.
Use the ▼ button to display the sent commands history.
Terminal Screen • Check command
You can confirm message format comprising selected headers/terminators
The terminal screen has 2 types of display mode.
as well as input commands.
• [Send] button
[Normal] view Click this to send the input command to the SR-D100 Series.
• Script
Script files can be sent from the terminal to SR-D100. Press the " "
(1)
button, select the applicable file, and then press the "Send" button to set.
(2) : Display area
(2) (4)
Displays data from the SR-D100 Series, commands sent using the command
button, and response histories.
You can click the [View Mode] button (4) to switch between the command/
(3) response display and the output data display methods.
(1) : Reader list

If multiple SR-D100 Series are registered in AutoID Network Navigator,
specify in the terminal the SR-D100 Series to confirm.
Reader name, model, and IP address are displayed.
[Advanced] button
Changes the terminal screen to [Advanced] view.
(2) : Command buttons
Button to operate the SR-D100 Series. (3) : [Save log] button
"LON" ... same operation as the Trigger input ON command. You can save the history data from the display area as a log file.
"LOFF" ... same operation as the Trigger input OFF command. 1 Click the [Save log] button. The "Log file settings" window will be
"TEST1" ... Activates the reading rate test mode. displayed.
"TEST2" ... Activates the tact measurement test mode. When specifying the save location, click the [Browse…] button.
"QUIT" ... Quits the test mode in operation. If not changing the save location, click the [OK] button without making any
(3) : Display area changes.
Displays data from the SR-D100 Series, commands sent using the command
button, and response histories.
(4) : [LiveView] button
Click to start LiveView.
[Clear] button
Delete history data from the display area.
• Append : Select this to add new data if there is already saved log file.
• Binary : Select this to save as binary format data.
[Advanced] view 2 When the [Save As] window is displayed, specify a file name. (The
default setting is "terminal.log".)
By switching to [Advanced] view, you can send action commands and control
commands to the SR-D100 Series, and save the log file of acquired history data.
(1)
3 Click the [Save] button to save the log data.
4 When saving of the log is complete, click the [Save log] button again.
[Example log file]
(2)
(3) (4)
E SR-D100 UM 60
5-12 Support Bank Function 6 Check the reading rate and click the Apply button if the specified
details are correct.
Confirmation window is displayed. Click "Yes" to start the setting.
When you click the icon, the Support Bank screen appears. Setting is completed when the "Configuration updated." window is displayed.
Support Bank function is to create a parameter bank setting automatically to
compensate the currently set parameter bank.
There are 2 types of support functions for the Support Bank function.
• Brightness support … Create a parameter bank setting to compensate the
brightness between 2 parameter banks.
• Lighting blocks support … Create a parameter bank setting to compensate the
lighting block pattern of the lighting.
Brightness Support Reference Changing the displayed information from "Brightness" to "Tuning
Image" displays the scanned images while tuning.
Based on the brightness value registered at a calibration, create a parameter bank
setting to compensate the brightness between 2 parameter banks.
Brightness Support Setting Procedure
1 Prepare 2 parameter banks.

2 Click .
3 Click 2 parameter banks which will be the base of the support from
the upper field to select.
Select 2 parameter banks to be

the base from this section.
Lighting Blocks Support

Use the SR-D100 Series and the divided lighting blocks of SR-DR10/DR15 to
specify multiple lighting patterns to the parameter bank automatically based on 1
lighting pattern.
The SR-D100 Series is divided in 4 blocks and the SR-DR10/DR15 is divided in 8
blocks.
* SR-D130 does not have the lighting block support function.
4 Enter the number of supports. Create a parameter bank setting to
divide the brightness equally based on the number of the supports Lighting Blocks Support Setting Procedure
in the lower field.
1 Perform a calibration with any of the divided lighting blocks turned

off.
2 Click .
3 Click 1 parameter bank which will be the base of the support from
the upper field to select.
Creating a setting that the

brightness between 81 to 103 is
divided in 14.
Select 1 parameter bank to be
the base from this section.
5 Click the Test button to start the Reading rate test mode. (LiveView
will be activated.)
4 Select the degree to create from 180°, 90°, or 45°.

(If the lighting pattern is point-symmetric and the pattern is the same after
changing the angle, new bank is not created.)
[90° is selected] [45° is selected]
* 45° cannot be selected for the lighting of the SR-D100 Series.
5 Click the Test button to start the Reading rate test mode. (LiveView
will be activated.)
6 Check the reading rate and click the Apply button if the specified
details are correct.
Confirmation window is displayed. Click "Yes" to start the setting.
Setting is completed when the "Configuration updated." window is displayed.
61 E SR-D100 UM
5-13 Installation Guide 5-14 Export Reader Configuration
When you click the icon, the Installation Guide screen appears. The set values of AutoID Network Navigator can be exported to a text file.
On this screen, you can check cell and symbol sizes or a code size for the field
view when the SR-D100 Series is installed in the focal distance. Value Export Procedure
Using the Installation Guide 1 Select Export Reader Configuration from the File menu.
[QR Code] [DataMatrix]
(1) (1)
(2) (2)
(3) (3)
(4) (7) (4)
(5) (5)
(6) (6)
(8) (8) Click here.
(9) (9)
2 "Save As" window is displayed. Enter the file name and click the
Save button.
(1) : Parameter options
Specify items to input to calculate the symbol size and cell size.
Selection range : Input cell size and symbol size, Input symbol size, Input cell
size
(2) : Symbology
Select the symbology type.
Selection range
• QR : QR Model 1, QR Model 2, or MicroQR
• DataMatrix : DataMatrix
(3) : Cell size
Enter the cell size.
Parameter options: When "Input symbol size" is selected, it is automatically
calculated according to the (4) Symbol size and (5) Version or Code size
3 Configuration reader export is completed.
[Configuration file sample]
settings.
(4) : Symbol size
Enter the symbol size.
Parameter options: When "Input cell size" is selected, it is automatically
calculated according to the (3) Cell size and (5) Version or Code size settings.
(5): Version or Code Size
When "Input symbol size" or "Input cell size" is selected for Parameter
options, input "Version" for QR code, and input "Code size" for DataMatrix.
* For Rectangle DataMatrix: Add the check mark to the checkbox for
"Rectangle".
(6) : Data type
Select the data type of the code.
Selection range
• QR : numeric, ASCII, binary, or kanji (Chinese characters)
• DataMatrix : numeric, ASCII, or binary
(7) : ECC level
Select the error correction level for QR codes.
Selection range
L (7%), M (15%), Q (25%), or H (30%)
(8) : Max data size
The maximum data size is calculated and displayed according to the (5)
Version or Code Size, (6) Data type, and (7) ECC level settings.
(9) : Setting Condition
Code size is displayed in a black frame according to the (4) Symbol size
setting for the field view in the focal distance of the checked model.
When the cell size is less than the minimum resolution or the code size is
larger than the field view, (NG) is displayed in the Minimum cell size display of
each model.
E SR-D100 UM 62
5-15 Marking optimization Input marking information screen
function Click the icon to display the input marking information window as below.
Inputting marking conditions of the laser marker can display the marking conditions
together with the result of analysis of the marking optimization function at the same
Click the icon to display the marking optimization screen. time when the report is output.
This function is designed to search for 2D code marking conditions to enable stable
reading.
Reading multiple 2D codes and checking the reading quality can search for the
best marking condition.
Marking optimization screen
(1)
(3)
(2)
(1)
(3)
(4)
(1) : Marking information menu
Input conditions for marking 2D codes on this menu.
Marking condition items are the following 5 items.
• LP: Laser power (%)
(2) • SS: Scan speed (mm/s)
• FR: Frequency (kHz)
(5)
• SV: Spot Variable
• RE: Repetition
(1) : Read image display ······· Select whether to
When 2D codes have been marked in the matrix state using the sample
Displays images being analyzed perform calibration
marking function of KEYENCE laser markers, select applicable 2 items
or images selected on the (2) including filter
(max.) of alignment directions from the vertical axis or horizontal axis.
history screen display. processing.
(2) : Read marking information
(2) : History screen display ···· Select whether to
··· Activate LiveView.
Displays a list of images that have analyze multiple codes
Use this for position adjustment of the code.
been analyzed so far. when multiple 2D
"5-8 LiveView (Page 58)"
(3) : Operation menu codes are present
··· Use this when the
Perform operations on this menu within the screen.
AutoID Network
to analyze the code displayed on (4) : Analysis result display
Navigator link data
the image. The analysis result is displayed on
as shown on the right has been marked using the sample
…Activate LiveView. the chart and graph.
marking function of KEYENCE laser markers.
Use this for position Analyzed 2D codes are classified
When this data is read, the marking conditions are input to
adjustment of the in three colors according to the
the (1) marking information menu.
code. results and displayed on the (1)
(3) : Default settings button
"5-8 LiveView read image display.
Initialize all marking information.
(Page 58)" Blue ······ Stable marking with
… Start analyzing the sufficient margin in
2D code. reading Operation procedure for the marking optimization function
… Input marking conditions of Green ··· Reading possible
although the degree This section describes the operation procedure for the marking optimization
the laser marker.
of margin in reading function.
Input contents will be
is not large. As an example, the following description uses the 2D codes marked using the
reflected to the report.
Red ······· Reading this marking sample marking function of KEYENCE laser markers.
"Input marking
information screen (Page may become
63)" impossible. Important The reading conditions for the code appearing within the field of
… Adjust the scanning method. (5) : Output report data view may not be constant depending on the lighting conditions.
"5-4 Configuration (Page Outputs the results analyzed using (e.g. When reading by receiving the light of regular reflection in
41)" the marking optimization function front) In this case, have the reading conditions of each code
to the report. constant and obtain data with multiple operations.
Using the report generator
function, output data is output to
the Excel file. 1 Activate the LiveView and adjust the position of the 2D code set
"5-16 Report Generator within the field of view of the SR-D100 Series.
Function (Page 64)"
63 E SR-D100 UM
2 After the position is determined, click the [Analyze] button. Then, the
code search begins.
5-16 Report Generator Function
Report generator function
The report generator function of the AutoID Network Navigator uses tuning results
or reading test results of the 2D code readers (SR-D100, SR-750, SR-650 Series)
and outputs reports with conditions specified on the installation guide, etc.
Use this function to make reports of device test results, adjustment results before
operation, etc.
Using the report generator function

3 When the code search is complete, the detected code is analyzed.
When the analysis is complete, the code is colored and the analysis Activating the report generator function
ends.
Start the report generator function by
selecting "File"  "Report Generator" 
"SR-750", "SR-650" or "SR-D100" on the
menu bar.
4 Repeat Steps 1 to 3 for codes necessary to be analyzed.

The following screen will appear.
* The model name is displayed in the
title. The format is the same.
Images of the same number as the times images are analyzed are displayed.
5 When analyzing all codes are complete, click [Output report data]
button to output the report.
Using the report generator function, output data is output to the
Excel file.
"5-16 Report Generator Function (Page 64)"
Report display for the marking optimization function
The score distribution is displayed when the sample marking function of KEYENCE
laser markers has been used.
Reference When the code for which the sample marking function of KEYENCE
laser markers is used is being analyzed, it is recommended that you
select marking conditions of the code positioned in the center within the
range where codes judged as blue in the analysis result are
concentrated.
With the marking conditions of the code, reading errors resulted from
some degree of margin of error of laser power may be prevented.
E SR-D100 UM 64
Report generator function screen 5-17 Creating reports for the
SR-D100 Series
(1) (4)
Data that can be generated as report

(5)
The following data can be used for the SR-D100 Series.
(2)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(3)
(10) (11)  Reports of data created on the AutoID Network Navigator.

• Setting Report (extension: rci)
(1) Date created, Author (6) New
This inputs detailed information of target codes obtained on the "Code Details"
Enter information for the date Use this to create reports without
performed with the LiveView activated, and also inputs the setting condition of
created and author. the imported file.
the SR-D100 Series, and then make the report.
(Up to 20 characters) (7) Import
• Reading Report (extension: rtn)
(2) Report Data Uses this to import the report data.
This outputs the result of auto tuning performed with the LiveView activated,
This displays the data type and (8) Edit
tuning image and the tuning graph.
order to be output to the report. This edits the report selected on (2)
• Test Report (extension: rbt)
(Registration available up to 100 (Report Data).
This outputs the results of reading rate measurement test and tact measurement
items) (9) Delete
test performed with the LiveView activated, and also outputs the Setting value,
(3) Open, Save This deletes the report selected on
Reading rate, Brightness and Read time of the parameter bank which performed
Open ... This reads the report (2) (Report Data).
the reading test.
generator file form. (10) Output Report
• Marking Optimization Report (extension: rmo)
Save .... This saves the report This outputs the report data to the
This create the report from collected data using the marking optimization
generator file form. Excel file.
function.
(Saved with the file (11) Close
extension: rai) The report generator function  Other reports created using the "New" button.
(4) Initialize screen is closed.
This initializes the report generator • Workpiece
function screen. • Reference Image
(5) Up/Down button • Marking Configuration
This switches the order of the report Bitmap or JPEG image files can be added to output to the report.
selected on (2) (Report Data). Using workpiece images or setting environment images, you can make
supplement materials or add setting conditions of the marking device used for
Report output procedure code marking to the report.
(1) Preparation of original data

Create data for report using the SR-D100 Series and SR-750 Series.
• Tuning data
• Reading test data
• Setting condition data, etc.
(2) Deciding the report format

Start the report generator function and import the data created for (1).
Use the up/down buttons to change the output order of report data, or use the edit
button to additionally write to each report data and then create your target report.
Double-click the report data or click the "Edit" button to

open the selected report screen. Then, you can edit
the comment.
(3) Report output

Output the report-generated data to the Excel file.
* To use the report generator function, install Microsoft Office Excel to your PC
beforehand.
65 E SR-D100 UM
Report data generation method and report format Reading Report
This section describes the generation method of each report data and describes  Generating the report data
the report format.
Start the Live View of AutoID Network Navigator, perform tuning and obtain data for
the reading report.
Setting Report When the tuning operation is complete, click the "Tuning report" button and save
the report data.
 Generating the report data
The data for the setting report can be created using the "Code Details" performed • "Live View" screen
with the LiveView activated. When the code information is obtained, click the
"Output Report Data" button and save the report data.
Code Details
"Tuning report" button
• Generate report data using the latest tuning data.

When tuning is performed multiple times, generate the report data each time the
tuning result is obtained.
• Saving data by changing file names can bring together the generated multiple
data into one report. When creating reports using various tuning results, save the
"Output Report Data" button
report data changing file names.
• Dividing file names can bring together the information data of multiple 2D codes
into one report. When creating reports to determine the conditions for the 2D  Editing the report data
code, save the report data changing file names. Start the report generator function and import the "Reading Report" to the Report
Data section.
 Editing the report data The following is the editing screen of the imported report data.
Start the report generator function and import the "Setting Report" to the Report
Data section.
(1)
The following is the editing screen of the imported report data.
(1)
(2)
(2)
(3) (4)
(5)
(1) Title
Enter the title of the reading report (up to 20 characters). This is used as a
sheet name when output to the Excel file.
(1) Title (4) Code Information (2) Reading Results
Enter the title of the setting report. This displays the 2D code • "Reading Details" tab
(Up to 20 characters) This is used information obtained on the "Code This displays the read image, tuning graph and tuning result values.
as a sheet name when output to the Details". (Read data: Up to 100 Put your review or remarks regarding the tuning result in the review and
Excel file. characters. Other items: Up to 20 remarks areas.
(2) Test Target characters) (Review: Up to 100 characters, Remarks: Up to 255 characters)
Enter the features of the test target. (5) Test Overview • "Tuning Details" tab
(Up to 100 characters) The summary of the test performed This displays the tuning conditions, lighting conditions, etc.
(3) Reader Information can be input here. "Tuning Details" tab
Enter setting conditions, etc. of the
SR-D100 Series. (Up to 20
characters for each item)
 Using the test target, test overview, etc., use this as a summary sheet of the
target test.
* When creating the reading report using the "New" button, all items can be
entered.
Also, the Bitmap and JPEG files can be imported to the captured image and
tuning graph.
E SR-D100 UM 66
Test Report Marking Optimization Report
 Generating the report data  Generating the report data

Start the Live View of AutoID Network Navigator, specify the bank to tune/test, Start the "Marking optimization function" of the AutoID Network Navigator and
perform the reading rate measurement test and tact measurement test, and obtain obtain the analysis result for marking optimization report data. When the analysis
data for the test report. result is determined, click the "Output Report Data" button and save the report
When the test operation is complete, click the "Test Report" button and save the data.
report data.
• "Marking Optimization" screen
• "Live View" screen
"Test Report" button
• Generate report data using the latest test data. "Output Report Data" button
When multiple bank tests are performed, generate the report data each time the
test result is obtained. • Changing file names can bring together the generated multiple data into one
• Saving data by changing file names can bring together the generated multiple report. When creating reports to compare analysis results under different marking
data into one report. When creating reports using results of test performed at conditions, save the report data changing file names for each analysis result.
various parameter banks, save the report data changing file names for each test  When creating reports for each marking condition, click the "Clear" button to
performed. delete the previous analysis result before starting the next analysis. If the
result is not deleted, the next analysis report is created with the new data
 Editing the report data added to the previous data.
Start the report generator function and import the "Test Report" to the Report Data
 Editing the report data
section.
The following is the editing screen of the imported report data. Start the report generator function and import the "Marking Optimization Report" to
the Report Data section.
The following is the editing screen of the imported report data.
(1)
(1)
(2)
(2)
(5)
(3)
(3)
(6)
(4)
(1) Title
Enter the title of the test report (up to 20 characters). This is used as a sheet
name when output to the Excel file. (1) Title
(2) Test Results Enter the title of the marking optimization report (up to 20 characters). This is
This displays the reading test results. used as a sheet name when output to the Excel file.
• Reading Details: Reading rate (%), Matching level, Read time (ms) (2) Marking information
The captured image can be replaced with any Bitmap or JPEG image. This displays the marking conditions of the laser marker that marked the code.
• Test Details: This displays the setting values of parameter bank used for the (3) Reading results
test. This displays the analysis results.
(3) Review, Remarks (4) Review
Put your review or remarks regarding the test results. Enter the review regarding the analysis results (up to 100 characters).
(Review: Up to 100 characters, Remarks: Up to 255 characters) (5) Tuning Settings
This displays the tuning settings when the analysis is performed.
* When creating the reading report using the "New" button, all items can be
entered.
Also, Bitmap and JPEG files can be imported to the captured image.
67 E SR-D100 UM
(6) Target Image, Trend Graph Workpiece Report, Reference Image Report
• "Target Image" tab
This displays the result image when analyzed.  Workpiece Report
Use the workpiece report for supplemental explanations such as adding a reading
target workpiece image to the report. Import the workpiece picture (Bitmap or
JPEG) and create as report data.
 Reference Image Report

This can be used as a supplemental explanation report using other image data.
For report editing screen details, see the workpiece report and reference image
report for "Report data generation method and report format".
* Up to 30 pieces of obtained data can be displayed as target images.
Marker Configuration Report
• "Trend Graph" tab
This displays the score of analysis result for each code as a trend graph. The setting contents of the marking device that marked 2D codes can be added to
the report.
Items, such as marking conditions or speed can be entered.
The following is the editing screen for the marker configuration report.
 The above setting items and setting values are examples. (No entry in default
setting)
Report output method

This outputs the collected report data to the Excel file. The EXCEL file can be
modified according to your preference.
 Report output method

Click the "Output Report" button on the report generator screen and save as an
Excel file to the specified folder.
"Output Report" button
Save as an arbitrary file name.
E SR-D100 UM 68
Excel report image  Test Report
This is the image when the report is output to the Excel file.
 Setting Report
 Marking Optimization Report
 Reading Report
 Marking Configuration
69 E SR-D100 UM
6-1 Outline of the SR-M80 Connecting to the SR-D100 Series
 Ethernet port connection
This section shows the outline of the SR-M80.
To connect the SR-M80 to the SR-D100 Series, use an Ethernet cable.
Use a "straight cable" when connecting an SR-M80 to a hub; use a Ethernet cable
What is the SR-M80? dedicated to the SR-D100 when connecting it to the SR-D100 Series directly.
The SR-M80 is a dedicated monitor for the SR-D100 Series to check the read SR-M80 HUB
images of the SR-D100 Series.
The SR-D100 Series can be connected to up to 4 monitors. They are useful
Straight cable
especially when the operator must check the read images continuously at the site.
When a read error occurs on the SR-D100 being monitored and the error image is
saved in the SR-D100, the error image can be read and checked with the SR-M80.
Basic Functions of the SR-M80 SR-D100 Series

Dedicated cable for the SR-D100
The SR-M80 has the following basic functions:
 Monitor function
Displays read images and data of the SR-D100 Series and the parameter bank
numbers and other details used for reading.
* Use a cable that is category 5 or higher.
SR-M80 can display up to 4 SR-D100 Series.
* The extended length must not exceed 100 m.
• Single display screen … Use this to monitor 1 SR-D100 Series.
• Multi display screen … Use this to monitor 4 SR-D100 Series in 1 screen. The SR-M80 does not support PoE (Power over Ethernet).
NOTICE
Touching any screen enlarges the image and displays Be sure to supply 24 V DC power to the power terminal.
the single display screen.
Single screen Multi screen
Displaying the SR-D100 Series Images
This section explains how to establish a connection with the SR-D100 Series to
display images.
 Connecting a default SR-D100 Series to the SR-M80

When a factory default SR-D100 Series is connected to the SR-M80 with an
Ethernet cable and the power is turned on, the Language Selection screen is
displayed.
Select either English or Japanese.
 Error image display

Displays the error images saved in the internal memory of the SR-D100 Series.
Error image, file name, and saved time are displayed.
When the language selection is completed, the SR-M80 communicates with the
 Control menu connected SR-D100 Series automatically and displays the Single display screen.
This menu is used to adjust the SR-D100 Series.  Connecting to a SR-D100 Series with changed
• Test mode … Starts each test mode of the SR-D100 Series to perform
configuration
read test.
• Reader adjustment … Calibrates the SR-D100 Series. While the screen is Use the following steps to set the SR-M80 if the Ethernet communication settings
checked, the lighting can also be controlled. have been changed via the communication settings of the SR-D100 Series.
• Language selection … Switches English/Japanese display. The SR-D100 Series uses the following addresses:
IP Address = 192.168.0.1
Subnet mask = 255.255.255.0
1 Start the System mode of the SR-M80.

To start the System mode, with the POWER LED for the monitor on the left, turn
the power ON while pressing the upper right corner of the monitor screen.
Press here
POWER indicator
E SR-D100 UM 70
When this is successful, the "System mode" screen is displayed.
6-2 Operation Screen of the
SR-M80
This section describes the operation screens of the SR-M80.
The first time the SR-M80 is started, Language selection screen is displayed.
Single Display Screen

To display 1 reader on the SR-M80, use the Single display screen.
Single display screen is explained here.
• When the System mode is started for the first time, it will be displayed in English.  Monitor image
This section is explained assuming the screen is switched to Japanese.
• For the details of the System mode screen, refer to "6-3 System Mode of the (1)
SR-M80 (Page 74)".
2
(2)
Set the Ethernet communication of the SR-M80.
Press the "IP address setting" button from the "System mode" screen, and set (5)
the IP address and subnet mask of the SR-M80.

Set the addresses with the same segments to the Ethernet communication
settings for the SR-D100 Series to be connected. (3)
When the SR-D100 Series is connected via a router, also set the default
gateway.
To exit the setting, press the "OK" button.
(4) (6)
(7)
(1) : … Enlarges an image. (6) : Displays a parameter bank if read.

… Shrinks an image. (7) : Green light …Read OK
… Moves to the center of the Yellow light …Read NG
image.
Red light …Read ERROR
…Displays the zoom in/
zoom out ratio of the
3 Register the SR-D100 Series.

image.
(2) : Displays the reader name of the
Press the "Register reader" button on the "System mode" screen to register the SR-D100 Series.
IP address of the connected SR-D100 Series. (3) : Displays a read image of the SR-
To exit these settings, press "OK" button. D100 Series.
(4) : Displays read data of the SR-
D100 Series.
(5) : …Moves to the Error
image display
screen.
…Moves to the Multi
display screen.
…Moves to the
Control menu.
When the password function is set to "Enable" with the "Password setting" on the
"System mode"screen, the password input is required to display the Control menu.
• To register a reader in the same segment, press the "Reader search" button so Refer to "6-3 System Mode of the SR-M80 (Page 74)".
that the IP address of the connected SR-D100 Series can be obtained
automatically. Changing the Display Position
Refer to "6-3 System Mode of the SR-M80 (Page 74)".
• To register multiple readers, register IP addresses for Reader 2, Reader 3, and When a displayed image is enlarged, the center of the display can be moved by
Reader 4 in the same way. touching the screen.
4 Save the setting details.
• The magnifications available for the monitor screen is 50 %, 100 %, 200 %, and
400 %.
Return to the "System mode" screen and press the "Save setting" button. • To display the entire scanned image, use 50 % display.
 Monitor screen  Scanned image
(magnification = 100 %) (monitor display position is
within the frame)
When the system update is finished, the "Single display" screen is displayed.
This completes the setting of the SR-M80. A read image according to the SR-
D100 Series operation is displayed.
71 E SR-D100 UM
1 Touch the location to be the center of the image. The touched
Error Image Display Screen
location moves to the center of the screen and displays.
This section describes the error image display screen of the SR-M80.
 Monitor image
(1)
(2)
(5)
(3)
Touching point: Around this point is displayed at the center of the monitor.
2 Pressing the button returns to the original display (= center of

the image).
• When the monitor magnifications are 100 %, 200 %, and 400 %, display (6)
position can be moved.
• As this is a move within the scanned image, it is not possible to move the end
of the image to the center of the monitor. (4)
(1) : …Enlarges an image. (5) : … Returns to the

…Shrinks an image. Single display
Possible monitor display area screen.
…Moves to the center of the
… Captures the latest
image.
image file.
Monitor display range …Displays the zoom in/ (6) : … Displays the specified
zoom out ratio of the parameter bank.
image. When a parameter bank is
(2) : Displays the reader name of the not specified, "- -" is
SR-D100 Series. displayed and all saved files
Multi Display Screen (3) : Displays a read error image of the will be subject to display.
SR-D100 Series. … Changes the
To display 4 readers on the SR-M80, use the Multi display screen. (4) : Index … Displays the
Multi display screen is explained here. parameter bank
number of files and number.
index of the
 Monitor image specified
(4) (5) parameter bank
number. The newer
(1)
files have bigger
index numbers.
(Index/number of
(2)
files)
File Name … Displays the file
name.
(3) Saved Date… Displays the date
the file was saved.
… Changes the index
number.
Press and hold to
change quickly.
Display position : First monitor … Top left Second monitor … Top right
Third monitor … Lower left Fourth monitor … Lower right
(1) : Displays the reader name of the SR-D100 Series.
(2) : Displays a read image of the SR-D100 Series.
Touch a screen to move to the Single display screen of the selected reader.
(3) : Displays read data of the SR-D100 Series.
(4) : Green light …Read OK
Yellow light …Read NG
Red light …Read ERROR
(5) : Displays a parameter bank if read.
E SR-D100 UM 72
Password Entry Screen Test Mode Screen
When the password function is set to "Enable" with the "Password setting" in the This section describes the Test mode screen of the SR-M80.
"System mode", password input is required to display the Control menu.
Refer to "6-3 System Mode of the SR-M80 (Page 74)".  Monitor image
 Monitor image (1)
(2)
(6)
(3)
(7)
(4)
Enter the set password. (Default: 1234)

This is displayed when the password function is enabled in the System mode. (5) (8)
(Default: Enable)
When a password is not entered for a certain time, the screen returns to the Single (1) : …Enlarges an image. (6) : … Returns to the
display. …Shrinks an image. Control menu
screen.
…Moves to the center of the
Control Menu Screen image. … Timing is entered to
start reading.
This section describes the control menu screen of the SR-M80. zoom out ratio of the … Starts the Reading
image. test mode.
 Monitor image Green light turns
SR-D100 Series. On during startup.
(3) : Displays a read image of the SR- … Starts the Read
D100 Series. time test mode.
(4) : Displays read data of the SR-D100 Green light turns
Series. On during startup.
(1) (3) (5) : Position…Displays a position level … Starts the Code
(2)
upon test 3 (Code position test mode.
(4) position test mode) Green light turns
startup. On during startup.
(5) Current … Displays the latest (7) : Displays a parameter bank if read.
read time upon (8) : Green light …Read OK
(6)
test 2 (Read time
Yellow light …Read NG
test mode)
startup. Red light …Read ERROR
Max … Displays the
maximum read
(1) : Displays the reader name of the (4) : Moves to the Test mode screen. time upon test 2
SR-D100 Series. (5) : Moves to the Reader adjustment (Read time test
(2) : Displays a read image of the SR- screen. mode) startup.
D100 Series. (6) : Moves to the Language selection Min … Displays the
(3) : Returns to the Single display screen. minimum read
screen. time upon test 2
(Read time test
mode) startup.
Reading rate … Displays a read
ratio upon test 1
(Reading test
mode) startup.
Level … Displays a
matching level
upon test 1
(Reading test
mode) startup.
* These fields display the values to be output in the selected test mode only.
"- - -" is displayed for any fields not output.
73 E SR-D100 UM
Reader Adjustment Screen Language Selection Screen
This section describes the Reader adjustment screen of the SR-M80. This section describes the Language selection screen of the SR-M80.
 Monitor image  Monitor image
(1)
(2)
(6)
(3)
(7)
(4)
Select the display language either Japanese or English.

(5) (8) The first time the SR-M80 is started, the Language selection screen is displayed.
6-3
(9)
(1) : …Enlarges an image. (7) : … Displays the specified

parameter bank.
System Mode of the
SR-M80
…Shrinks an image.
…Moves to the center of the …Changes the parameter
image. bank number.
(8) : … Displays the This section describes the System mode of the SR-M80.
brightness for
zoom out ratio of the
calibration.
image.
… Displays a Starting Up the System Mode
matching level.
SR-D100 Series. To start the System mode, with the POWER LED for the monitor on the left, turn the
Green light…Read OK
(3) : Displays a read image of the SR- power On while pressing the upper right corner of the monitor screen.
D100 Series. Red light…Read ERROR
(4) : Displays read data of the SR-
D100 Series. … Displays the status of SR- Press here
(5) : Adjusts the image brightness D100.
during animation playback. LIVE : Animation playing
(6) : … Returns to the back
Control menu CALIBRATION: Calibration
POWER indicator
screen. SUCCESS: Calibration
… Starts the succeeded
animation mode. FAILURE : Calibration failed
… Performs TEST : Bank testing
calibration. ON/OFF : Displays ON when
… Starts the Reading the specified bank
test mode with the number is set for
specified calibration, and OFF
parameter bank. when a calibration is System Mode Screen
… Turns the internal not set.
lighting ON/OFF. (9) : Reading rate… Displays a read This section describes the "System mode" screen.
The light turns on ratio during bank
during ON. test.
 Monitor image
… Turns ON/OFF the Symbol … Displays the code
external lighting. type registered for
The light turns on a parameter bank.
during ON. Exposure … Displays the
exposure time
registered for a
parameter bank.
IP address setting : Sets the IP Save setting : Saves settings

address, subnet and starts up the
mask, and other SR-M80.
details of the SR- Password setting : Sets the password
M80. to enter the
Register reader : Checks the Control menu
registration state screen.
of a reader or sets Advanced settings : Sets the detailed
the reader IP fields.
address to register : Switches the
manually. display language
Reader search : Searches a reader of the System
within the same mode.
segment.
E SR-D100 UM 74
IP Address Setting Screen Reader Search Screen
This section describes the IP address setting screen of the SR-M80. This section describes the Reader search screen of the SR-M80.
Press either the OK/Cancel button to return to the "System mode" screen. Press either the OK/Cancel button to return to the "System mode" screen.
 Monitor image  Monitor image (during reader search)
(1) (2)
(1) Terminate: Terminates the search.

(2) Status message: Displays a message during a reader search. When reader
was not found, "No reader found" is displayed.
 Monitor image (after reader search completion)
Communication speed : Sets the communication speed. (1)

Setting range: 100/10 Mbps Auto or 10 Mbps
IP address : Sets the IP address of the SR-M80.
Setting range: 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255
Subnet mask : Sets the subnet mask of the SR-M80.
Setting range: 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255 (2)
(4)
Default Gateway : Sets the default gateway of the SR-M80.
Setting range: 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255
MAC address : Displays the MAC address of the SR-M80.
(3)
Reader Registration Screen (5)
(1) Search again : Performs a search again.

This section describes the Reader registration screen of the SR-M80.
(2) Reader selection button : Selects the reader to display via the SR-M80.
Up to 4 SR-D100 Series can be registered to the SR-M80.
Up to 4 readers can be selected.
Set "Used" for the readers to display their monitors with the SR-M80, and "Not
(3) Clear : Deselects any selected readers.
used" for the ones not to display their monitors.
(4) View previous and View next : When the search result has 5 or more readers,
Press either the OK/Cancel button to return to the "System mode" screen.
use this to switch the reader information to
 Monitor image display.
(5) Register Manually : Available when a search result has 33 or more
readers. Use this button to register readers
which could not be displayed.
Point The maximum number of search results the SR-M80 can display is
32.
Password Setting Screen

The password to enter the "Control menu" screen is set on this screen.
Press either the OK or Cancel button to return to the "System mode" screen.
IP address setting range : 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255
 Monitor image
Password Function : Selects function Enable/Disable.

Change Password Current Password : Displays the password currently set.
New Password : Press to change password.
When this button is pressed, a screen
similar to below will be displayed.
Up to 8 characters are available for a
password.
75 E SR-D100 UM
 Monitor image (when setting password)  Moving from Operation mode to System mode
When the System Mode Block setting is set to "Disabled", moving from the
Operation mode to the System mode is allowed.
The sample below is a Single display screen.
(B)
Advanced Settings Screen

(A)
This section describes the advanced settings screen of SR-M80.
Press the "Back" button to return to the "System mode" screen.
 Monitor image
1 Press a place similar to (A) where no parts such as switches or lights
are placed for 3 seconds or more.
2 Press and hold (A) while pressing (B). When it is recognized
correctly, the buzzer beeps and the "System mode" screen is
displayed.
System Setting
 Monitor image
Option Setting : Sets the backlight adjustment and the system mode blocking.
System Setting : Sets the system startup delay time, backlight OFF start time, and
buzzer volume.
Self Check : Checks the graphic display, Kanji (Chinese character) ROM, and
touch switch.
Option Setting
 Monitor image
System Startup Delay : Sets the delay time from the power ON untill the
system startup.
Setting range: 0 to 99 seconds (in units of 1 second)
Default: 0 seconds
Backlight OFF Start Time : Sets the time between the completion of a touch panel
operation and turning OFF the backlight.
Setting range: 0 to 99 minutes (in units of 1 minute)
Default: 0 minute
Buzzer Volume : Sets the buzzer volume.
Setting range: None, Small, Middle, or Big
: Saves the changed details and returns to the
Backlight : Adjusts the brightness of the backlight. 3 levels are
"Advanced settings" screen.
available for adjustment.
: Discards the changed details and returns to the
System Mode Block : Sets to block entering to the System mode using a certain
"Advanced settings" screen.
operation from the Operation mode.
: Saves the changed details and returns to the "Advanced
settings" screen.
: Discards the changed details and returns to the "Advanced
settings" screen.
E SR-D100 UM 76
Self Check
This is used for system check of the SR-M80. Normally, the operation is not
necessary.
 Monitor image
Graphic Display : Checks if the SR-M80 is displayed correctly.

Touching 8 times returns to the Self Check
screen.
Kanji (Chinese character) ROM : Checks the font types available in the SR-M80
and the checksum of the font region in the ROM.
Touch Switch : Checks if the touch panel switches of the SR-
M80 respond correctly. Pressing the switch
shown "ED" in the lower right corner of the touch
panel returns to the Self Check screen.
Error display of the SR-M80

If "VNC communication error" or "Communication error" is displayed at the bottom
left of the screen of the SR-M80 during start up or operation, check the following.
 Check the Ethernet cable.

Check if the SR-D100 Series is correctly connected to the SR-M80 using the
Ethernet cable.
 Checking the communication settings

If the communication settings for the SR-D100 Series and the SR-M80 are not
correctly made, communication is impossible.
• Communication settings for the SR-M80 : Page 75
• Communication settings for the SR-D100 : Page 47
 Finish the AutoID Network Navigator

Is the AutoID Network Navigator running on a PC on the same network of the SR-
D100 and the SR-M80? In this situation, if the AutoID Network Navigator and the
SR-D100 are communicating, the SR-D100 and the SR-M80 cannot communicate
with each other. Finish the AutoID Network Navigator, and then turn the SR-M80
on.
77 E SR-D100 UM
7-1 Mounting the SR-D100 Series Mounting the SR-D100 Series
To secure the reading stability, mount the SR-D100 Series in the following
This section describes how to properly mount the SR-D100 Series. procedure.
Before Mounting the SR-D100 Series: Adjusting the Mounting Angle

Check the followings before mounting the SR-D100 Series. Mounting angle for the SR-D100 Series is different for each reading target. Based
on the following 3 mounting methods, adjust the angle to stabilize reading and then
Confirm that ambient light (sunlight, overhead lighting, mount the SR-D100 Series.
photoelectric sensors, etc.) is not affecting the SR-D100
Series.
Prevent ambient light from entering the field view range of the SR-D100 Series.
Ambient light may lead to unstable reading.
Countermeasure Shield from

Photoelectric ambient
sensor light
90°
Change the sensor

position
Verify that the reader's beam and field view range are not Forward/backward tilted Right/left tilted mounting
obstructed. mounting
If the beam or field view range is obstructed, the 2D Code may be unreadable. Tilt the side with the "TEST" switch of Tilt the side with a protruding object for
the SR-D100 Series against the the dedicated lighting installation of the
reading code side to install. SR-D100 Series against the reading
code side to mount.
Obstruction
Countermeasure
lighting
2D Code Change the position of the obstruction to secure

the passage of the light and the field view range.
When using several SR-D100 Series in a row, verify that

they do not interfere with each other.
If light from one SR-D100 Series unit enters the field view range of another, the
reading may become unstable.
Provide sufficient
SR-D100 Series
distance between the
SR-D100 Series units
Countermeasure Adjusting the Mounting Position and Reading Distance

Double-click the "TEST" switch of the SR-D100 Series to turn 2 pointers on.
These 2 pointers show the height of the SR-D100 Series' field view. Adjust the
center of the pointer so that it is in the center of the reading code.
Install a Stable reading with the SR-D100 Series can be obtained usually when it is
shield.
2D Code mounted for the following distances and tuned.
Model Reading Distance
Use a douser or a similar object to ensure that the SR-D100 Series
SR-D100 : 100 mm
does not receive strong light (direct or reflected) output from a
NOTICE SR-D110 : 150 mm
laser marker or similar device.
SR-D130 : 300 mm
The SR-D100 Series may be damaged if it receives strong light.
SR-D100H : 85 mm
SR-D100HA : 40 mm
Laser aiming
Reading distance
* When the Pointer lens OP-87235 (optional) is used for the SR-D100/D110, the
pointers cross around the focal distance. This can be used as a guide for the
center of the field view.
* For SR-D130, the LED lights up instead of a pointer.
E SR-D100 UM 78
With the mounting bracket B
Washer
Focal distance
Installation screw
(M5)
Important To use a pointer lens, the diffuser panel for the system must be  Mounting method without the included brackets
removed.
Fix the SR-D100 Series.
Fix the SR-D100 Series in the mounting position using screws (M3).
Tightening torque should be 0.8N•m.
Mounting Method of the SR-D100 Series * Prepare the screws (M3) after checking the thickness of the mounting board.
(Effective screw depth of the mounting holes for the SR-D100 Series is 3.5 mm.)
The SR-D100 Series can be mounted either with or without the included mounting
brackets.
Mounting screw
 Mounting method with the included brackets (M3)
1 Mount the SR-D100 Series on the included mounting bracket A or B.

Choose one of the following mounting directions according to usage.
Mounting bracket A, horizontal Mounting bracket A, vertical
(2 ways) (1 way)
Installation and Removal of the Diffuser Panel
Included mounting screws Included mounting screws
M3×3 M3×3
 Installation of the diffuser panel
Set and fix the diffuser panel to the SR-D100 Series using 4 setting screws
and the included hex wrench.
Rotate the hex wrench clockwise to fix.
Mounting bracket A
Mounting bracket A Tightening torque should be 0.1N•m.
The mounting bracket A is left-right
reversible.
Mounting bracket B (2 ways)

Icluded mounting screws M3×3
Mounting bracket B
Hexagonal wrench
The mounting bracket B is a left-right reversible.
2 Fix the mounting bracket to the unit.

* Prepare installation screws (M5) and washers separately.
* Use 2 or more screws according to the mounting condition of the unit.
With the mounting bracket A Important • As a guide, the sufficient tightening can be obtained after
Washer tightening with the longer side of the hex wrench inserted, have
the shorter side inserted and rotate 180 degree for both
positions.
• Screw lock adhesive to prevent loosening is applied to the
included setting screws to avoid the screws loosening or the
Installation screws
diffuser panel falling by vibration.
(M5)
• Be aware of the direction of the diffuser panel. Make sure to

Point
Point install it in the direction that the light shielding part of the
Approx. 3 mm diffuser panel is inserted into the SR-D100 scanner.
Light shield
When fixing the bracket on the unit, consider the heads of the  Removal of the diffuser panel
installation screws.
Remove the diffuser panel from the SR-D100 Series using the included hex
wrench.
Rotate the hex wrench anticlockwise to remove.
Hexagonal wrench
* Keep the diffuser panel and setting screws in a safe place after removal.
79 E SR-D100 UM
7-2 Installing the Dedicated 3 Fix the SR-DR10/15 to the SR-D100 Series.
Fix the SR-DR10/15 in 2 positions per side (4 in total) using the included
Lighting for the SR-D100 Series installation screws.
This section describes the procedure for installing the SR-DR10/DR15/DS3

dedicated lighting for the SR-D100 Series.
Installing the Lighting
Installing the SR-DR10/DR15
1 Install 2 lighting mounting brackets inlcuded the SR-DR10/15.

Fix the mounting brackets using the included installation screws.
The tightening torque should be 0.8N•m.
Included mounting screws
* Be aware of the bracket direction so that the (front sticker) and the unit M3×2×2
installation position are not in the same position.
Abrasion powder may be generated from the abrasion between
the SR-D100 Series and the lighting mounting brackets due to the
NOTICE unit vibration or other reasons. If the impact from the abrasion
powder will be an issue, do not install lighting to the SR-D100
Series.
included mounting screws
4
M3×2×2
Connect the connector to the lighting port of the SR-D100 Series.
Insert the connector straight and rotate the screw clockwise to tighten.
Tightening torque should be 1.0 to 1.5N•m
2 Install SR-DR10/15 to the SR-D100 Series.

Set from the scanner side of the SR-D100 Series.
Installing the Diffuser Panel for the SR-DR10/DR15
1 Install the light shielding panel included with the OP-87233/87234 to

the SR-DR10/15.
* Make sure the Test switch of the SR-D100 Series faces to the (front Douser
sticker).
* Insert the protruding object of the SR-D100 Series to the center guide.
Douser
Protruding object
2 Fix the diffuser panel with the installation screws included with the
OP-87233/87234 to the SR-DR10/15.
Tightening torque should be 0.3N•m to 0.6N•m.
Mounting screws
included with
the OP-87233/87234
M3×3
E SR-D100 UM 80
Installing the SR-DS3 3 When the installation position of the SR-DS3 is decided, fix it to the
SR-D100 Series using the included installation screws.
 To use only lighting Tightening torque should be 0.8N•m.
Fix the SR-DS3.

Fix the SR-DS3 in the installation position using screws (M3).
* Have the screws (M3) ready after checking the thickness of the installation board.
(If the installation holes are drilled holes, use nuts to fix.)
Nuts Included mounting screws

M3×2
Mounting screws
M3×2
Reference For cabling, use the included hook for cable.

 Use the included bracket to install Adjust the fixing position according to the cabling.
1 Fix the SR-DS3.
Fix the SR-DS3 to the dedicated mounting bracket for the SR-DS3 using the
dedicated installation screws for the SR-DS3 and the dedicated installation nuts
for the SR-DS3. Adjust the installation position of the SR-DS3 according to
usage.
Cable clamping hook
Included mounting screws (black) M3×2
Included mounting nuts ×2
Abrasion powder may be generated from the abrasion between

the SR-D100 Series and the lighting mounting brackets due to the
NOTICE unit vibration or other reasons. If the impact from the abrasion
powder will be an issue, do not install the lighting to the SR-D100
2 Install the included lighting mounting bracket to the SR-DS3. Series.
Fix the mounting brackets using the included installation screws.
Tightening torque should be 0.5N•m. Mounting with the SR-DR10/DR15
To install the SR-DR10/DR15 to the SR-D100 Series, the mounting brackets
included with the SR-D100 Series cannot be used.
In this section, the mounting method using the SR-DR10/DR15 is explained.
To use the SR-DS3, the mounting brackets included with the SR-D100 Series can
be used. For the installation method, refer to the installation information of the SR-
Included mounting screws D100 Series.
M3×2
1 Use the unit installation position of the mounting bracket to mount

the SR-D100 Series and the SR-DR10/15 together.
Prepare 4 installation screws (M5) long enough for the installation part of the
unit separately.
(The thickness of the mounting bracket is 2 mm.)
Screws for installation (M5) × 4

(acquired separately)
81 E SR-D100 UM
Important Tighten the installation screws according to the bracket in the
following positions:
7-3 Installing the Dedicated
 Mounting bracket (large)
Monitor for the SR-D100 Series
1 for each guide of the unit installation Installation hole sizes
position.
Fix with screws. This section describes the procedure to install the dedicated monitor SR-M80 to
the SR-D100 Series.
4-φ5.5
Installing the SR-M80

Front installation procedure of the SR-M80 is explained here. The included
80
mounting brackets are required for installation.
2.9
Drill embedding holes with the size shown below on the panel. The
73.6
panel thickness for the installation should be 1.6 to 4 mm.
 Mounting bracket (small)

2 for each guide of the unit installation Installation hole sizes
position.
Fix with screws. 167.5
+1
-0 mm
4-φ5.5
+1
226.5 -0 mm
40
2 From the front of the panel, align the monitor unit to the installation
holes.
37.1
73.6
Refer to the above installation hole sizes, secure the sufficient

installation hole pitch and always fix with 4 screws.
If the installation hole pitch could not be secured or all 4 screws
NOTICE were not available, risks such as a unit fall due to the vibration of
the unit or other causes may occur.
When mounting is not performed correctly, the field view position
may wobble and the correct reading may not be achieved.
3 Fix the unit to the panel using the mounting brackets.
2 Adjust the lighting height and the SR-D100 Series position according
Install the mounting brackets on the long sides of the SR-M80.
to the reading work to fix it to the unit.
Mounting screws on the light, 4 locations
(2)
(1) Loosen the installation screws on the lighting side to

adjust the lighting position.
(2) Loosen the installation screws fixing the SR-D100 Series,
to adjust the position of the SR-D100 Series. 4 Tighten the mounting bracket screws.
Mounting screws on the SR-D100 * Adjust the SR-D100 Series to be in the focal distance.
Series, 4 locations
(1)
Be aware that when the installation screws at the lighting side and
NOTICE at the installation part for the SR-D100 Series are too loose, the
unit and light may fall.
3 For cabling, use the included cable holder.

Cable holder
Tightening torque
0.3 to 0.5 N•m {3 to 5.1 kgf•cm}
• Make sure to use all brackets included with the unit.

• If not all of the mounting brackets are used, IP65f cannot be
NOTICE guaranteed.
• Tightening more than the specified torque range may cause
"crimp" or "deflection" on the display sheet.
E SR-D100 UM 82
8-1 Communication of the SR- When Communication with a PLC is the Main
Communication
D100 Series
 Start/finish a read operation by the IN terminal and
To communicate with a control unit, the SR-D100 Series has interfaces for RS-
232C and Ethernet communication. transfer the data to a PLC via RS-232C communication.
For these communication interfaces, the communication ports can be set as Interface
follows:
Main
• Command port Communication port to process control and configuration
Data port 2
RS-232C
commands sent from a control unit.
• Data port 1 Communication port to output result data from the SR-D100
Series. Sub
• Data port 2 Communication port in which the main purpose is for dedicated Data port 1
Not Used
data communication to a PLC unlike PC host communication.
or
This is mainly used for dedicated protocols such as a PLC link, Sub Ethernet
but PC host communication is also available via Ethernet.
Command port
Host
Data port 1 Timing input signal to the IN terminal
Host Control Unit
Command port
Control Unit This is a specification that connects the start read timing to the IN terminal and
Data port 2
outputting the read result data to a PLC via RS-232C.
PLC
When the Ethernet is specified for the command port or Data port 1, transferring
result data to a network or changing the SR-D100 Series settings from the network
is possible.
Communication Port Assigning Image by Connection Method To use the PLC link function with the RS-232C, set the protocol of Data port 2
according to the PLC to use.
This section shows communication port assigning images for different connection
methods between the SR-D100 Series and a control unit.  Start/finish read operations and perform data
Set the following communication port specifications with AutoID Network communication over PLC and RS-232C communication
Navigator:
(protocol = None).
When the Communication with the Host PC is the Main Interface
Communication Main
Command port
RS-232C
 When RS-232C communication is the main
Data port 1
communication
Interface Sub Not Used
Main Data port 2
or
Ethernet
Command port
RS-232C This is the setting to communicate with PLC without handshaking. To create a
Data port 1 general purpose serial communication program with the command port or PLC,
specify the settings as above.
Sub Not Used When the protocol of the Ethernet port for Data port 2 is set to TCP, Ethernet
Data port 2
or communication to the host PC as well as PLC is possible.
Ethernet
 Start/finish of reading and data communication are
This is the configuration to have all basic communications using the RS-232C.
To control data on a network, use the Ethernet port for Data port 2 and set the
performed by a PLC and Ethernet communication.
protocol to TCP. Interface
Main
 When Ethernet communication is the main
communication Command port
Ethernet
Interface Data port 2
Main
Sub Not Used
Command port
Ethernet Data port 1
RS-232C
Ethernet
Data port 1
This is the setting to communicate with PLC via Ethernet. Set Ethernet
Sub Not Used communication for the command port and Data port 2.
Data port 2
RS-232C When the Ethernet for which a port number different from the one used by RS-
Etherne 232C or different from the mainly used port number is set is used for Data port 1,
data can be controlled by the host PC.
This is the configuration to have all basic communications via Ethernet.
To transfer only read data to PLC, specify RS-232C or Ethernet for Data port 2.
* For details on PLC link, refer to "PLC Link" (Page 100).
83 E SR-D100 UM
8-2 Data Communication Format Details of Appended Data
 Data size
This section describes the data communication format of the SR-D100 Series.
The data communication format is common for both the RS-232C and Ethernet. The data size is the total size of parts (1), (2), and (3), plus 4 bytes.
(1) (2) (3)
Communication Format for Read Data Header Data size Read data + appended data Checksum
Termi-
nator
Read data is sent to a computer after a header and terminator are appended as
shown below:  Time
Appends the time the data was output.
Header Read Data Terminator Appended data range: YYYYMMDDhhmmss
• Data format
Various data can be appended for read data ( Page 84).
Header and terminator can be selected from the following using AutoID Network YYYYMMDDhhmms : Read data
Navigator. They also can be set to any string up to 5 characters.
 Code type
 Header The type of the read code can be appended before the read data.
None/ STX / ESC • Data format
(02h) (1Bh)
Code type : Read data
 Terminator
CR / CR + LF / ETX
Code type Read Data
(0Dh) (0Dh) (0Ah) (03h)
0 Read error
1 QR
Read Error Codes 2 DataMatrix
If a code cannot be read, the SR-D100 Series will send a read error code to the  Symbol ID
computer.
Default configuration Appends the symbology identifier, specified by AIM, before the read data.
It is not appended when a reading has failed.
Header ERROR Terminator • Data format
Symbol ID Read data
Read error codes can be set to any string of text, up to 8 characters, using AutoID
Network Navigator ( Page 48). Code type Detail Symbol ID
Additionally, the device can be set to not send error codes. : Model 1 ]Q0
: Model 2, ECI not applied ]Q1
Appending Data : Model 2, ECI applied ]Q2
QR : Model 2, ECI not applied, FNC1 (1st) ]Q3
Various types of data can be appended to read data.
: Model 2, ECI applied, FNC1 (1st) ]Q4
 Read data format : Model 2, ECI not applied, FNC1 (2nd) ]Q5
: Model 2, ECI applied, FNC1 (2nd) ]Q6
The data format for appending various types of data to read data is shown below:
: ECC 200 ]d1
Parameter : ECC 200, FNC1 (1st) ]d2
Data Code Symbol Read Scan
Time : : : bank : :
size type ID data count : ECC 200, FNC1 (2nd) ]d3
numbers DataMatrix
: ECC 200, ECI applied ]d4
Unused ISO/IEC15415 : ECC 200, ECI applied, FNC1 (1st) ]d5
Positioning Code vertex Code center Matching
: : : ECC : : verification : : ECC 200, ECI applied, FNC1 (2nd) ]d6
level coordinates coordinates level
ratio result
ISO/IEC TR 29158 SAE AS9132 SEMI T10-0701

Image Group Master/ Read Check-
 Parameter bank number
(AIM DPM-1-2006) : verification : verification : : : :
file name name Slave ID time sum Appends the parameter bank number that was read.
verification result result result
It is not appended when a reading fails.
Delimiter characters • Data format
• The colon (:) as a delimiting character can be changed via AutoID Network
Navigator (one character). Read data : nn
• The slash (/) character cannot be used as a delimiter. nn = parameter bank number (01 - 16)
• No delimiter is inserted between [Symbol ID] and [Read data].
Precautions when appending data  Scan count
• Appended data can be set via a command or from AutoID Network Navigator. Appends the number of reading attempts of the SR-D100 Series while the timing
• Only the selected data will be appended to the read data. This means that the input is turned ON.
data size is variable. Failed reading operations are also counted.
• Checksum defers by the contents of the appended data. • Data format
Read data : nnnnn
nnnnn = scan count (1 - 65535)
E SR-D100 UM 84
 Read time  Code quality verification result
Appends the time required for the reading. Code quality verification results data can be appended.
• Data format The data formats are shown as below.
Read data : nnnnn ms Setting
nnnnn = reading time (1 - 65535) Append
Append detailed Append Data format example
 Position level grades verification values
result
Appends the position level of the read code. Alphabet NG NG Read data: C
When several codes are read for one scan (multi read), the average of all code Alphabet NG OK Read data: C (-)
position levels is output.
Alphabet OK NG Read data: C/A/C/B/A/B/-/-/A/A/A/B/A
0 is appended when a reading fails.
Read data: C(-)/A(-)/A(0.733)/C(-)/
• Data format
Alphabet OK OK C(-)/B(-)/-(-)/-(-)/A(0.002)/A(0.002)/
Read data : level = n ISO/IEC15415 A(1.000)/B(-0.646)/A(-0.289)
n = position level value (0 - 5) Numeric NG NG Read data: 2.0
Numeric NG OK Read data: 2.0(-)
 Code vertex coordinates/Code center coordinates Numeric OK NG Read data: 2.0/4.0/2.0/3.0/4.0/3.0/2.0
Appends the coordinates of the vertexes and center position of the read code. Read data: 2.0(-)/4.0(-)/2.0(0.632)/
Numeric OK OK
• Data format 3.0(-)/4.0(-)/3.0(0.072)/2.0(0.640)
Alphabet NG NG Read data: C
Read data : X1/Y1: X2/Y2: X3/Y3: X4/Y4: X5/Y5
Alphabet NG OK Read data: C (-)
X1/Y1 to X4/Y4 : Code vertex coordinates (Xn = 0 - 751, Yn = 0 - 479)
Alphabet OK NG Read data: C/A/C/B/A/B/-/-/A/A/A/B/A
X5/Y5 : Code center coordinates (X5 = 0 - 751, Y5 = 0 - 479)
Read data: C(-)/A(-)/A(0.733)/C(-)/
Alphabet OK OK C(-)/B(-)/-(-)/-(-)/A(0.002)/A(0.002)/
Coordinates are specified for code positions in an image as below: ISO/IEC TR 29158 A(1.000)/B(-0.646)/A(-0.289)
(AIM DPM-1-2006)
(0, 0) (751/0) Numeric NG NG Read data: 2.0
X
X1, Y1 X2, Y2 Numeric NG OK Read data: 2.0(-)
Numeric OK NG Read data: 2.0/4.0/2.0/3.0/4.0/3.0/2.0
X5, Y5
Read data: 2.0(-)/4.0(-)/2.0(0.632)/
Numeric OK OK
Code 3.0(-)/4.0(-)/3.0(0.072)/2.0(0.640)
X4, Y4 X3, Y3 NG NG Read data: P
(Field of view) NG OK Read data: P(-)
(751/479) SAE AS9132 OK NG Read data: F/P/P/F/P
(0/479)
Read data: F(-)/P(0.632)/P(-)/
Y * Settings for OK OK
F(0.852)/P(0.005)
Select
Vertex coordinates output for multi read NG NG Read data: P
Reference expression of
When multiple readings are performed for 1 scan, the coordinates are grades are not NG OK Read data: P(-)
output in the following order: reflected. OK NG Read data: F/P/P/F/P
• Coordinates with code center coordinates higher in the field of view Read data: F(-)/P(0.632)/P(-)/
OK OK
(smaller in Y) are prioritized. F(0.852)/P(0.005)
• If 2 coordinates have the same Y coordinates, the center SEMI T10-0701
coordinates of the code further to the left in the field of view (smaller
in X) are prioritized. * Settings for
Output format for multi read is as follows: Select
expression of
Read data 1 corner Read data 1 center grades, Append Read data: 0.054/0.850/5.400/3.112
coordinates: coordinates: detailed
Read data 1,
Read data 2 corner Read data 2 center verification result
Read data 2,
: coordinates: : coordinates:
…, and Append
…: …:
Read data n values are not
Read data n corner Read data n center
coordinates coordinates reflected.
 Unused ECC ratio  Append order of verification results

Appends the unused error correction ratio. Results of evaluation items for each verification are arranged in the following
The average value will be appended when several codes are read for 1 scan (multi order.
read). Evaluation item names Evaluation item Abbreviated
Standards
It is not appended when a reading fails. (English) names (Japanese) names
• Data format Overall Total evaluation ALL
Read data : nnn % Decode Decode success/failure DEC
nnn = unused ECC ratio (0 - 100) Symbol Contrast Symbol contrast SC
Modulation Modulation MOD
 Matching level Reflectance Margin Reflectance margin RM
Appends the matching level value of the read code. Fixed Pattern Damage Fixed pattern damage FPD
• Matching levels of each code will be appended for the multi read. Format information
Format Information Damage FID *1
• Value is not appended when a reading fails. ISO/IEC 15415 damage
• Data format Version information
Version Information Damage VID *2
damage
Read data : nnn
Axial Nonuniformity Axial nonuniformity AN
nnn = matching level value (0 - 100)
Grid Nonuniformity Grid nonuniformity GN
Unused Error Correction Unused error correction UEC
Print Growth Horizontal Print growth (horizontal) PGH
Print Growth Vertical Print growth (vertical) PGV
85 E SR-D100 UM
Standards
Evaluation item names Evaluation item Abbreviated  Image file name
(English) names (Japanese) names
Appends the saved image file name linked to the read data (including an
Overall Total evaluation ALL
extension).
Decode Decode success/failure DEC
When no image is saved, "(no file)" is appended.
Cell Contrast Cell contrast CC When there is an image to save, the saved file name is appended.
Cell Modulation Cell modulation CM
• Data format
Reflectance Margin Reflectance margin RM
No saved image: Read data : (no file)
Fixed Pattern Damage Fixed pattern damage FPD
*1
ISO/IEC TR
Format information
29158 Format Information Damage FID *1 Image to is present: Read data : (1) : IMAGE¥ (2) _ (3) _ (4) _ .bmp
damage
(AIM DPM-1-
2006) Version information
Version Information Damage VID *2 *2
damage
Axial Nonuniformity Axial nonuniformity AN (1) Drive name (1 byte) A: RAM, B: ROM
(2) Image count value (3 bytes) 000 - 999
Grid Nonuniformity Grid nonuniformity GN
(3) Type of image (1 byte) S: OK image, N: Comparison NG, E: Read error,
Unused Error Correction Unused error correction UEC
W: Read unstable, or C: Captured image
Print Growth Horizontal Print growth (horizontal) PGH
(4) Parameter bank numbers (2 bytes) 01 - 16
Print Growth Vertical Print growth (vertical) PGV *1 Number of characters of (no file) is 9 bytes.
Overall Total evaluation ALL *2 When multiple parameter banks are used, the same number of image file
Quiet Zone Quiet zone QZ names as the number of parameter banks are appended.
SAE AS9132 Symbol Contrast Symbol contrast SC
Angular Distortion Angular distortion AD
 Group name (When the Master/Slave function is used)
Module Fill Module fill MF Appends the group name to be set when using the Master/Slave function.
Symbol Contrast Symbol contrast SC • Data format
Signal to Noise Ratio Signal to noise ratio SNR Read data : Group name
Horizontal Mark Growth Horizontal mark growth HMG Group name: Up to 16 characters
Vertical Mark Growth Vertical mark growth VMG
DataMatrix Cell Width Average cell width DMCW  Master/Slave ID
DataMatrix Cell Height Average cell height DMCH Appends the unit ID to be set when using the Master/Slave function.
Horizontal • Data format
Horizontal Mark Move HMM
misplacement
Read data : nn
Vertical Mark Move Vertical misplacement VMM
nn: Unit ID (0 to 31)
Cell Defects Cell defects CD
SEMI T10-0701 Finder Pattern Defects Finder pattern defects FPD  Checksum
UEC1 *3
The checksum is calculated using all characters that are not part of the header or
UEC2 the delimiter and is then appended immediately before the terminator with 2
UEC3 characters.
UEC4 For calculation details, refer to "Checksum Calculation Method" Page 135.
UEC5
8-3
Unused Error Correction Unused error correction
RS-232C Communication
UEC6
UEC7
UEC8
UEC9 This section describes the RS-232C communication of the SR-D100 Series.
UEC10
*1 Enabled only for QR and micro QR code. "-" is displayed for DataMatrix. RS-232C Communication Configuration
*2 QR code Model 2 Version7 and later versions are only enabled. "-" is displayed
Before using RS-232C communication, set the communication conditions of the
for others.
SR-D100 Series and the host PC.
*3 The number of items displayed for UEC, evaluation item for SEMI T10-0701
varies according to the code size.  SR-D100 Series configuration
Use AutoID Network Navigator to configure the following:
• Communication conditions : Baud rate, data bit length, parity, and stop bit length
• Communication protocol : None, PASS/RTRY, ACK/NAK
• Communication data format : Header and Terminator
Reference Set the same communication parameters for both the host PC and the
SR-D100 Series.
 Default configuration for the SR-D100 Series

communication conditions
The default configuration for the SR-D100 Series communication conditions are as
follows:
• Baud rate : 115200 bps
• Data bit length : 8 bit
• Parity : Even
• Stop bit length : 1 bit
Reference Press and hold the Test button for 6 seconds or longer to return the SR-
D100 Series to the default configuration.
E SR-D100 UM 86
Communication Protocol Send Buffer Capacity
RS-232C communication has 3 communication protocols available. Set it • The send buffer of the SR-D100 Series can hold up to 10KB of data.
according to the usage. The number of characters for each entry saved in the send buffer includes the
header and terminator.
No Handshaking • When the number of characters in data exceeds 10KB, the send buffer overflows.
The SR-D100 Series sends read data to the host PC without handshaking.  Send Buffer Overflow
If the send buffer overflows, the SR-D100 Series will send the following message
and an error occurs.
Read data • Unit LED: Orange LAD1 flashes.
• ERR_BUSY is output. (when OUT terminal is specified)
• When PASS/RTRY or ACK/NAK is set and PASS or ACK is received, "OVER" is
output.
To resume from buffer overflowed status, try the following operations:

• Send a "BCLR" buffer clear command from the computer.
PASS/RTRY
• When PASS/RTRY or ACK/NAK is set, send PASS or ACK again.
The SR-D100 Series sends read data to the host PC using the following procedure:
* Send buffer also can be cleared with a "RESET" command or cycling power.
1 The SR-D100 Series sends read data to the host PC. * When a "BCLR" command is received while the send buffer is not overflowed,
data currently stored in the send buffer will be cleared.
Read data
8-4 Ethernet Communication

Response
With Ethernet communication, you can send read data of the SR-D100 Series to a
computer or PLC, or change behavior or configuration from a computer. This
section describes the basic specifications and functions of the SR-D100 Series.
2 The SR-D100 Series waits for a response from the host PC (PASS:
completed normally, RTRY: re-sending request).
The SR-D100 Series can still read codes while waiting for a response. Data Basic Specifications
read while waiting for a response from the computer will be stored in the send
buffer.
 Connection
Connector type: M12
3 The host PC sends one of the following responses to the SR-D100 The pin arrangement of the Ethernet connector port is as follows:
Series.
• PASS: Transmission complete. (The device does not respond to PASS) (1) Pin Signal
Name Signal name
number direction
• RTRY: Resend the same read data to the host PC and wait for a PASS
response. (2) (1) TXD+ Send signal High Output
(2) RXD+ Receive signal High Input
Point If the SR-D100 Series' send buffer is overloaded, read operation (3) TXD- Send signal Low Output
(3)
will be stopped. (4) RXD- Receive signal Low Input
• When "PASS" is received, "OVER" is sent to the host PC and an
(4)
error occurs.
• When another "PASS" is received, the operation resumes. Use an Ethernet cable with a M12Dcode connector (STP).
Recommended Ethernet cable:
Manufacturer : Weidmuller
 PASS and RTRY formats Product name : M12-RJ45 cable (5 m or 10 m)
PASS C R (RTRY C R ) or STX PASS ETX ( STX RTRY ETX ) Product number : 1044470050 (5 m cable)
* E S C at the beginning and L F at the end can be added. 1044470100 (10 m cable)
Model : IE-C5DD4UG0050MCSA20-E (5 m cable)
Important • The SR-D100 Series is able to receive any command while IE-C5DD4UG0100MCSA20-E (10 m cable)
waiting for a response. This allows for a response to a command The SR-D100 Series does not support PoE (Power over Ethernet).
to be sent without delay. NOTICE
Be sure to supply 24 V DC power to the power terminal.
• If the SR-D100 Series receives a RESET command while waiting
for a response, the send buffer will be cleared.  Ethernet communication standard
• IEEE802.3 compliant 100Base-TX
ACK/NAK
This protocol uses A C K (06h) instead of "PASS" and N A K (15h) instead of "RTRY"
in the PASS/RTRY protocol.
Other than the differences in the character strings to send, this protocol is identical
to the PASS/RTRY protocol.
Point If the SR-D100 Series' send buffer is overloaded, reading

operation will be stopped.
• When "ACK" is received, "OVER" is sent to the host PC and an
error occurs.
• When another "ACK" is received, the operation resumes.
 ACK/NAK formats
Send [ACK] (06h) and [NAK] (15h) only, but do not append header nor terminator.
87 E SR-D100 UM
Communication Function 8-5 Socket Communication
Function Outline This section described the behavior and configuration items of the SR-D100 Series
to perform socket communication.
Ethernet communication of the SR-D100 Series is available with the following
functions: Command Send/Receive Port
 Socket communication function
Use this port to operate or configure the SR-D100 Series via Ethernet.
Sends read data of the SR-D100 Series via socket communication. Command send/receive port supports server operations only.
Control the behavior of the SR-D100 or change the settings via Ethernet by To send commands, establish a connection from a computer or PLC.
sending operation and configuration commands to the command send/receive port.
Communication protocol: TCP Server and Client Operations
 PLC link function The socket communication function for Data port 1 of the SR-D100 Series supports
PLC link is available via Ethernet. both server operations and client operations. The socket communication function
(For details, refer to "PLC Link" (Page 100).) for Data port 2 supports only client operations.
Communication protocol: UDP Server operations and client operations can be selected using the IP address
setting (Remote IP address setting) for Data port 1 and Data port 2.
 EtherNet/IP
EtherNet/IP communication is possible.  SR-D100 Series is set for server operations only *Data
For details, refer to "12-1 EtherNet/IP". port 1 only
Set the remote IP address as follows:
 Profinet IP address: 0.0.0.0
Profinet communication is possible. * Data port 2 does not function.
For details, refer to "13-1 PROFINET".
 SR-D100 Series is set for server and client operations
 FTP function Set the remote IP address as follows:
The SR-D100 Series behaves as an FTP server or an FTP client and can transfer IP address: Other than 0.0.0.0
scanned images. * Data port 2 performs client operations only.
Communication protocol: FTP
Continually Send Connection Requests
 Communication protocols for other functions
• Communication with SR-M80: UDP When a connection is not established, "Continually Send Connection Requests"
• Communication with Multimonitor: UDP configuration determines the establish request timing.
• Communication with FileView: FTP Configuration Establish Request Timing
• Master/Slave function: UDP
Disable When read data is determined and data output is ready.
Continually Send
As necessary when a connection is not established such as
Port Numbers Connection Requests Enable
at power-on.
This section describes the port numbers available on the SR-D100 Series. Keep Alive Function
Listen port/
Communication Communication
Port Name Remote Port Number This function checks whether the connection established with a remote device is
Method Protocol
Port
still alive.
Command send/ Socket
Listen port TCP 9004 *1 *2
receive port communication  Operating conditions
Socket Listen port TCP 9004 *1 *2
Data port 1 Operates when the status of no communication continues for 60 seconds or more.
communication Remote port TCP 1024 to 65535
Socket
Remote port TCP 1024 to 65535  Operation details
communication
Data port 2*3 Sends a Keep packet to the remote device and checks the response.
PLC link
communication
Remote port UDP 1024 to 65535 • Response: Keep the connection established.
• No response: Disconnect the connection.
20: FTP data port
FTP communication FTP
― FTP (ACTIVE mode)
port communication
21: FTP service port
*1 9013, 9014, 9015, 5900, 5910, and 44818 cannot be set as they are reserved
for the reader system.
*2 When 9004 (Default) is set, command transmission/reception port and Data
port 1 are performed on the same port. To separate the command transmission/
reception port and Data port 1, change the port number.
*3 Data port 2 performs client operations only.
E SR-D100 UM 88
8-6 FTP Communication
The SR-D100 Series behaves as a FTP server or an FTP client and can transfer
scanned images.
This section describes the behavior and configuration items of FTP
communication.
FTP Server and Client Operations

Either FTP server or client operations can be selected with the IP address
configuration for the FTP configuration (remote IP address setting).
 SR-D100 Series is set for FTP server operations only

Set the FTP remote IP address as follows:
IP address: 0.0.0.0
 SR-D100 Series is set for FTP server and client operations

Set the FTP remote IP address as follows:
IP address: Other than 0.0.0.0
 FTP Server operations

• The SR-D100 Series operates as an Anonymous FTP server.
• When the status of no FTP communication continues for 60 seconds or more,
disconnect the FTP connection.
• Maximum simultaneous connections: 2 connections
Keep Connected
When FTP connection is not established, "Keep connected" configuration
determines the connection request timing.
Configuration Connection Request Timing
When the image transfer is determined and the image file
Disable
output is ready.
Keep FTP connected
As necessary when FTP connection is not established such
Enable
as at power-on.
Send NOOP Command

When Send NOOP Command configuration is enabled, NOOP commands can be
sent to the remote FTP server.
Timeout disconnection of the FTP server can be avoided with this function.
Transmission interval of the NOOP commands is determined by the NOOP
command interval configuration.
Send PASV Command

When Send PASV Command configuration is enabled, PASV commands can be
sent to the remote FTP server.
Use this function when the remote FTP server blocks connections from outside
with a security system.
89 E SR-D100 UM
9-1 Details of Command  Send command format
Up to 2 parameters for each operation and configuration command are available.
Communication Commands are sent in the following format according to the number of parameters:
Number of
Send Command Format
This section describes the command types and communication format of the SR- Parameters
D100 Series. None Header Command Terminator
Types of Command Communication 1 Header Command , Parameter 1 Terminator
There are 2 types of commands used with the SR-D100 Series: 2 Header Command , Parameter 1 , Parameter 2 Terminator
 Operation commands  Response command format

Commands to control the SR-D100 Series operations.
Responses for operation or configuration commands are sent in the following
format:
 Configuration commands
Send Command
Commands to change or confirm the SR-D100 Series configuration. Result
Send Command Format
Successful Header OK , Send command Terminator

Command Communication Process
Failed Header ER , Send command , Error code Terminator
Command communication with the SR-D100 Series is performed as follows:
1 The host PC sends commands (operation/configuration commands)  Response error codes

to the SR-D100 Series.
2 SR-D100 sends responses for the commands received.
Error Code
00 Undefined command received
Explanation
Mismatched command format

01
(Invalid number of parameters)
Command
02 The parameter 1 value exceeds the set value
03 The parameter 2 value exceeds the set value
Response
04 Parameter 2 is not set in HEX (hexadecimal) code
05 Parameter 2 set in HEX (hexadecimal) code but exceeds the set value
There are 2 or more ! marks in the preset data
Read result data etc. will be sent after the response for an operation command is 10
Preset data is incorrect
sent. 11 Area specification data is incorrect
[Example] Read result data when a timing ON command is used 12 Specified file does not exist
13 "mm" for the %Tmm-LON,bb command exceeds the setting range.
(1) Send a Timing ON command
LON
14 Communication cannot be checked with the %Tmm-KEYENCE command.
(2) Response for the Timing ON command This command is not executable in the current status
20
OK or LON (execution error)
(3) Read result data 21 The buffer has overflowed, so commands cannot be executed
(Code data) An error occurred while loading or saving parameters,
22
so commands cannot be executed
Commands sent from RS-232C cannot be received because AutoID Network
23
Navigator is being connected.
Command Communication Format
SR-D100 Series may be faulty. Please contact your nearest KEYENCE sales
99
office.
 Header and Terminator
There are 2 types of SR-D100 Series headers and terminators, which are
recognized automatically:
Header Terminator
9-2 Operation Commands
None CR
This section describes the details of the operation commands of the SR-D100
STX ETX
Series.
Responses are sent with the same header and terminator of the corresponding
send command. Reading Operation Control
Command Response
Command CR Response CR
 Timing ON command
STX Command ETX STX Response ETX Send command LON
LON, bb bb: parameter bank number (01 - 16)
* LF is appended at the end of the command. However, LF will not be added to Response OK, LON
the response.
 Timing OFF command
Important • If E S C is appended at the beginning of the command, the E S C will
Send command LOFF
clear the receive buffer of the SR-D100 Series.
Response OK, LOFF
If unnecessary characters appear in the receive buffer of the SR-
D100 Series, append E S C at the command communication.
• Starts and finishes reading operations of the SR-D100 Series. Same operations
• When communicating with the SR-D100 Series, make sure that
as the timing ON/OFF signals from the IN terminal.
each character (byte) is sent within 10 seconds of the previous
• Timing ON/OFF commands can be changed, up to 8 characters.
character (byte). If more than 10 seconds pass, the SR-D100
• Response is output upon receiving a send command.
Series will delete all received characters.
• When a code reading was successful while the SR-D100 Series is in the Single
reading mode and the data transmission is set to Send after read, do not send a
timing OFF command.
• When a timing OFF command is sent after a code reading was failed, a read
error code is output after a response.
• Timing OFF command cannot finish reading when the reading was started with
the IN terminal or the Test switch.
• An error code is output when a timing ON command is received again during the
reading with a timing ON command. (Same for timing OFF commands)
E SR-D100 UM 90
Preset Data Registration  Starting read time test mode
Offline mode Send command TEST2
 Starting preset data registration TEST2bb (Specify a parameter bank. bb = 01 - 16)
Send command PRON Response OK, TEST2
Response OK, PRON Online mode Send command #TEST2
#TEST2bb (Specify a parameter bank. bb = 01 - 16)
• These are used to register preset data for the SR-D100 Series. Response OK, #TEST2
• When the preset data registration is completed, SR-D100 outputs data in the
following format:
 Starting code position test mode
PR00 : Preset registered data
TEST3bb (Specify a parameter bank. bb = 01 - 16)
 Finishing preset data registration Response OK, TEST3
Send command PROFF  Finishing test mode

Response OK, PROFF
Offline mode Send command QUIT
• These are used to finish or stop preset registration for the SR-D100 Series. Response OK, QUIT
• After the SR-D100 Series outputs preset registered data, do not send a PROFF Online mode Send command #QUIT
command. Response OK, #QUIT
• When a PROFF command is sent to stop a preset registration, the following error
code will be output after the response: • This outputs the results of each test after a response.
• When a parameter bank number is appended at the end of the code, the test is
PR01 : Read error executed only for the specified parameter bank.
• To finish the test mode, make sure to send an end command.
Reading Quick Setup Codes • The code position test mode is used only in offline mode.
 Starting quick setup code reading I/O Terminal Control

Send command RCON
Response OK, RCON  Input terminal status check
Send command INCHK, m
 Finishing quick setup code reading
Response OK, INCHK, n...
Send command RCOFF m = 1 - 2: Terminal number
Response OK, RCOFF n = OFF (input terminal OFF) or ON (input terminal ON)
• When reading operation starts and all quick setup codes are read, after RCOFF • Checks the input terminal status.
is received, the settings are saved in the ROM and applied to the operations.
Communication settings are also applied.  Output terminal ON control (individual control)
* Same for the quick setup code reading executed by a switch. Send command OUTON, m
• Finishes reading when a quick setup code reading is not completed. Response OK, OUTON
m = 1 - 3: Terminal number
 Quick setup code status check
Send command RCCHK • Controls the output terminal ON operations individually.
Response OK, RCCHK, mm...
mm = OK : Quick setup code reading successful  Output terminal OFF control (individual control)
READING : Reading quick setup code Send command OUTOFF, m
NG : Quick setup code reading failed Response OK, OUTOFF
NONE : Quick setup code reading not executed m = 1 - 3: Terminal number
• Checks the quick setup code reading status. • Controls the output terminal OFF operations individually.
Test Mode Control  Output terminal ON control (batch control)

Send command ALLON
 Starting reading rate test mode Response OK, ALLON
TEST1bb (Specify a parameter bank. bb = 01 - 16) • Controls all output terminal ON operations.
Response OK, TEST1
Online mode Send command #TEST1  Output terminal OFF control (batch control)
#TEST1bb (Specify a parameter bank. bb = 01 - Send command ALLOFF
16) Response OK, ALLOFF
Response OK, #TEST1
• Controls all output terminal OFF operations.
91 E SR-D100 UM
 Soft Reset of the SR-D100 Series Forced Control of Reading and Scanning Operations
Resets the SR-D100 Series using a command to the condition at power-on without
actually turning off the power.  Forced finishing of reading and scanning operations
Send command RESET Send command CANCEL
Response OK, RESET Response OK, CANCEL
• The SR-D100 Series is reset after outputting a response. • Command to force to finish of the running scanning operation (also reading
operation).
Clearing the Send Buffer • When a CANCEL command is received during a start read command operation,
the SR-D100 Series does not output a read error code.
All data in the send buffer of the SR-D100 Series is deleted.
Send command BCLR  Forced trigger lock
Response OK, BCLR Send command LOCK
Response OK, LOCK
Confirming the Read History
• All reading and scanning operations are forced to stop.
 Read OK/error count history • Until the trigger lock is released, reading and scanning operations cannot be
Send command NUM executed.
Response OK, NUM, aaaaa, bbbbb, ccccc, ddddd, or eeeee • Forced lock can be released by turning power OFF or a Reset command.
aaaaa = 00000 - 65535 : Read (comparison) OK count
 Forced trigger lock release
bbbbb = 00000 - 65535 : Comparison NG count
ccccc = 00000 - 65535 : Read error count Send command UNLOCK
ddddd = 00000 - 65535 : Stable reading count Response OK, UNLOCK
eeeee = 00000 - 65535 : Timing input count
• Releases trigger lock.
• Checks the Read (comparison) OK count etc. since the unit was turned on.
• Turning the power off or sending a RESET command will reset the read history.  Obtaining forced trigger lock status
• This history does not include a count of OK/NG/ERR/STABLE/TIMING results Send command RLOCK
obtained when registering preset data. Response OK, RLOCK, nnnn
nnnn = forced trigger lock status (LOCK or UNLOCK)
 Bank count history
Send command NUMB Light Guide Control
Response OK, NUMB, BANK1, BANK2 ....BANK15, BANK16, TIMING
 Light Guide ON
BANKn = Read OK count in BANKn: 0 to 4294967295
Send command AMON
TIMING = Timing input count: 0 to 4294967295
Response OK, AMON
• The count is reset at the following timings.  Light Guide OFF
• When the RESET command is received
• At power OFF Send command AMOFF
• When the TIMING count value reaches the limit and returns to 0, the bank Response OK, AMOFF
count value is reset.
• Histories of unregistered banks are also output. • Turns On/Off the code position checking light guide by a command.
Image Scanning Control Tuning
 Capture scan  Starting tuning

Send command SHOT, bb Send command TUNE, bb
Response OK, SHOT, or m:/IMAGE/nnn_C_bb.BMP Response OK, TUNE
bb= Parameter bank number 01 - 16 bb = 01 to 16: Reading bank number: 1 to 16
m = Drive name A: A drive (RAM), B: B drive (ROM) When tuning operation is complete, the result is output in the following formats.
nnn = Scan count 000 - 999 Success : Tuning SUCCEEDED,Tms,00000x00
Failure : Tuning FAILED,Tms,00000x0y
• Scans only once with the specified parameter bank.
Tms: Tuning time
 Starting animation output x : Advice 0,1,2,4
0 : No advice
Send command MVON
1 : Filter process change may be enabled.
Response OK, MVON
2 : Installation condition, lighting condition or marking condition adjustments
should be considered.
• Starts an animation output (= continuous scanning). AutoID Network Navigator
4 : Brightness may be insufficient.
does not append read data, thus a LiveView image changes in real time.
y : Failure factor 1,2
 Stopping animation output 1 : Code detection impossible
2 : Unstable reading
Send command MVOFF
Response OK, MVOFF • Tuning process starts.
• When tuning is successful, the result is saved to the specified bank (also saved
• Stops an animation output (= continuous scanning). to the ROM).
 Finishing tuning
Send command TQUIT
Response OK, TQUIT
• Tuning process finishes.
E SR-D100 UM 92
Time Setting Other Commands
 Time setting  Loading settings

Send command TMSET, YYYYMMDDhhmmss Send command LOAD
Response OK, TMSET Response OK, LOAD
 Obtaining time • Loads the ROM settings (B:\config.ptc) to RAM.

Send command TMGET • The settings will be applied to operation after loading is complete.
Response OK, TMGET, YYYYMMDDhhmmss
 Loading backup settings
YYYY : Year (4 bytes) Send command BLOAD
MM : Month (2 bytes) Response OK, BLOAD
DD : Day (2 bytes)
hh : Hour (2 bytes) • Loads the settings to RAM and ROM from the file (B:¥config\backup.ptc) to which
mm : Minute (2 bytes) the ROM settings before executing SAVE were saved.
ss : Second (2 bytes) • If the backup.ptc file does not exist, error is returned.
• The settings will be applied to operation after loading is complete.
• Commands to set or check the SR-D100 Series calendar.
 Save settings
When executing the script file - status confirmation Send command SAVE
command Response OK, SAVE
• Sends the SAVE command to save in the memory the setting contents sent to the
 Obtaining the script processing time
SR-D100 Series.
Send command SCPTIME The command setting is applied after the response of the SAVE command is
Response OK, SCPTIME, now=AAus, max=BBus, min=CCus sent.
AA : Returns the most recent script processing time.
BB : Returns the maximum value of the processing time.  Obtaining configuration command status
CC : Returns the minimum value of the processing time. Send command CMDSTAT
Response OK, CMDSTAT, nnnn
• Returns the processing time of script executed after power ON. nnnn = none : No operation
wait : Wait for the setting applied
 Script debug setting
update : Program updating
Send command SCPDBG, n
Response OK, SCPDBG • Command to obtain configuration change status. This is used to check the
n= 0 : Script debug OFF process status of a configuration command such as WN, WP, and WB.
n=1 : Script debug ON
 Setting initialization
• Sets whether to output debug from the script file to the command port or not. Send command DFLT
• Setting the debug ON executes print(str) and outputs data. Response OK, DFLT
 Obtaining the script error results
• Resets the SR-D100 Series to the default configuration.
Send command SCPERR
Response OK, SCPERR, mmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmm  Obtaining MAC address
mm… : Script error character string Send command EMAC
Response OK, EMAC, nnnn
• Returns the details of script error. nnnn = MAC address (12 bytes)
 Obtaining the script version
• Obtains the MAC address of the SR-D100 Series.
Send command SCPVER
Response OK, SCPVER, mmmm, nnnn  Obtaining error status
mm… : Script library version Send command ERRSTAT
nn… : FmtSet.lua version (Only when FmtSet.lua exists and the version is Response OK, ERRSTAT, nnnn
defined) nnnn = none : No error
plc : PLC link error
• FmtSet.Lua version is the value stored in variable name "SCPVERSION" within file : File system error
the FmtSet.Lua file. system : System error
• This returns the script library version and the FmtSet.lua version. over : Send buffer overflow
• If the script library does not exist, the error code 12 is returned. cfg : Set value error
* The script library is a library file to use the edit data function and the edit image update : Program update error
file name function. profinet : PROFINET error
lua : Script error
• Obtains the error status of the SR-D100 Series itself.

• When the error status is cleared, it resets to the no error status automatically.
93 E SR-D100 UM
 Clearing PLC link error
Send command PCLR
9-3 Details of Configuration
Response OK, PCLR Commands
• Clear the PLC link error.
This section describes the configuration commands of the SR-D100 Series.
 Drive format
Send command FORMAT or m Types of Configuration Commands
Response OK, FORMAT
m = A: A drive (RAM) Configuration Commands of the SR-D100 Series are divided into the following 3
B: B drive (ROM) types:
 Parameter bank configuration command

• Formats the internal memory (RAM or ROM) of the SR-D100 Series.
A drive: Deletes all files at format. Command to set scan and code configuration to a parameter bank.
B drive: Deletes all files except the configuration file (config.ptc) and the script file Changed configuration details are applied after a response for a configuration
(FmtSet.lua). command is sent.
• When a format command is received, the unit restarts after sending the response
and performs a format process while restarting.  Operation configuration command
Command to set items related to the SR-D100 Series operations.
 Obtaining mode and system version of the unit Changed configuration details are applied after a response for a configuration
Send command KEYENCE command is sent.
Response OK, KEYENCE, SR-D100, aaaaa, bbbbb, or ccccc
aaaaa, bbbbb, and ccccc = System version (5 bytes for each  Communication configuration command
item) Command to set items related to RS-232C and Ethernet communications.
Changed configuration details are applied after a SAVE command is received.
 Backup of the settings
Send command BSAVE, m
Response OK, BSAVE Details of Each Configuration Command
m = 1 to 8: ROM setting file number at copy destination
(config1.ptc, config2.ptc ….) (FmtLua1.lua FmtLua2.lua …) Parameter Bank Configuration Command Format
<Description>
• Copies the RAM setting to both ROM setting (B: \config\config.ptc) and ROM Parameter bank configuration command is sent in the following format:
setting specified as copy destination. • Configuration change
• When the script file is used, FmtLua.lua is copied to the ROM setting
Send command WB , bb mmm , nnn…
(B:\Lua\FmtLua*.lua) specified as copy destination.
• Sends response when copying is complete. OK , WB
Response
 Loading backup settings • Configuration confirmation
Send command BLOAD, m Send command RB , bb mmm
Response OK, BLOAD
m = 1 to 8: 1: config1.ptc, FmtSet1.Lua Response OK , RB , nnn…
2: config2.ptc, FmtSet2.Lua bb : Parameter bank number 01 - 16 Fixed to 2 bytes
3: config3.ptc, FmtSet3.Lua mmm : Command number Fixed to 3 bytes
4: config4.ptc, FmtSet4.Lua nnn… : Configuration value (varies according to command
5: config5.ptc, FmtSet5.Lua number)
6: config6.ptc, FmtSet6.Lua
7: config7.ptc, FmtSet7.Lua Details of Parameter Bank Configuration Command
8: config8.ptc, FmtSet8.Lua
<Description>  Lighting
• This loads the settings to RAM and ROM from the save destination file specified
using the argument. Command
Function Value Details
• After the settings are loaded, the settings are reflected to operations. Number
Internal lighting 000 0, 1 0 : Not used
1 : Used
Light intensity of the 001 0 to 8
internal lighting
Internal lighting block 002 00 to 15 0 : Not used
control 1 : Lower block On
2 : Right block On Specify the value with
4 : Upper block On the sum of blocks to use.
8 : Left block On
Internal lighting 003 0 to 3 0 : Not used Specify the value with the
circumference block 1 : Inner circle sum of circumference
control 2 : Outer circle blocks to use.
External lighting 004 0, 1 0 : Not used
1 : Used
Light intensity of 005 0 to 8
external lighting
(SR-DR10/DR15/DS3/
CA lighting)
SR-DR10 block lighting 006 000 to 255 0 : Not used
control 1 : Lower left block
2 : Lower right block
4 : Right lower block
8 : Right upper block Specify the value with
16 : Upper right block the sum of blocks to use.
32 : Upper left block
64 : Left upper block
128 : Left lower block
SR-DR10 007 0 to 7 0 : Not used
circumference block 1 : Inner circle Specify the value with the
lighting control 2 : Middle circle sum of circumference
4 : Outer circle blocks to use.
E SR-D100 UM 94
Command Command
Function Value Details Function Value Details
Number Number
SR-DR15 block lighting 008 000 to 255 0 : Not used DataMatrix code size to 410 0000000 to Assign the DataMatrix code size with a bit and
control 1 : Lower left block read specification 3FFFFFFF set in HEX
2 : Lower right block  Squares
4 : Right lower block 1st bit: 10 x 10 13th bit: 44 x 44
8 : Right upper block Specify the value with 2nd bit: 12 x 12 14th bit: 48 x 48
16 : Upper right block the sum of blocks to use. 3rd bit: 14 x 14 15th bit: 52 x 52
32 : Upper left block 4th bit: 16 x 16 16th bit: 64 x 64
64 : Left upper block 5th bit: 18 x 18 17th bit: 72 x 72
128 : Left lower block 6th bit: 20 x 20 18th bit: 80 x 80
SR-DR15 009 00 to 15 0 : Not used 7th bit: 22 x 22 19th bit: 88 x 88
circumference block 1 : Inner circle Specify the value with the 8th bit: 24 x 24 20th bit: 96 x 96
control 2 : Middle circle sum of circumference 9th bit: 26 x 26 21st bit: 104 x 104
4 : Outer circle 1 blocks to use. 10th bit: 32 x 32 22nd bit: 120 x 120
8 : Outer circle 2 11th bit: 36 x 36 23rd bit: 132 x 132
12th bit: 40 x 40 24th bit: 144 x 144
 Scanning configuration  Rectangles

25th bit: 8 x 18
Command 26th bit: 8 x 32
Number 27th bit: 12 x 26
Exposure time 100 3 to 1000 In units of 10 s 28th bit: 12 x 36
29th bit: 16 x 36
Gain 101 01 to 11
30th bit: 16 x 48
Offset 102 000 to 254
Dynamic range 103 0 to 3 0 : Hi-Sensitivity
1 : Normal mode  Other parameter bank configuration
2 : Hi-SNR
3 : Hi-DR Command
Number
Filter First filter 200 0 to 7 0 : Disable
configuration type 1 : Equalize Grid correction 500 0, 1, 2 0 : Disable
2 : Expand 1 : Enable
Second filter 201
3 : Shrink 2 : Auto
type
4 : Open Alternate 600 0, 1 0 : Disabled
Third filter 202
5 : Close 1 : Enable
type
6 : Median Repeat read attempts 601 0 to 32
Fourth filter 203 7 : Unsharp Mask
type Decode timeout 602 0001 to In units of 10 ms
1000
First filter 210 1 to 7 Specify count
count Shutter delay 603 000 to 255 In units of 1 ms
Second filter 211 Decoding Area 604 X1Y1X2Y2 Specify the ends of decode area in units of 1 dot
count X1, X2: 000 to 751
Y1, Y2: 000 to 479 (X1, Y1)
Third filter 212
count
* Because 40 square
Fourth filter 213 dots are required for the (X2, Y2)
count minimum decoding
area, set as follows:
X2 ≥ X1 + 40 dots
 Code Configuration Y2 ≥ Y1 + 40 dots
Inverse read 605 0, 1 0 : Disabled
Command
Function Value Details 1 : Enable
Number
Code type 300 1, 2 1 : QR Reverse read 606 0, 1 0 : Disabled
2 : DataMatrix 1 : Enable
Codes to read 301 01 to 16 Base tilt angle 607 0 to 359 In units of 1 degree
Allow reduced detection 302 0, 1 0 : Failure Tilt angle range 608 0 to 180 In units of 1 degree
count 1 : Success * Base tilt angle ± Tilt angle range will be
enabled.
Max length 303 1 to 7089
Min length 304 1 to 7089
Code ID 305 01 to 16 Operation Configuration Command Format
Output length limitation 306 0, 1 0 : Disabled
1 : Enable Operation configuration command is sent in the following format:
Direction of output 307 0, 1 0 : Forward • Configuration change
1 : Backward
Send command WP , mmm , nnn…
Length of output 308 1 to 7089
Starting index of output 309 1 to 7089 Response OK , WP
QR code Target QR 400 0000 to Assign the version 1 to 14 with a bit and set in • Configuration confirmation
version Model 1 3FFF HEX
Send command RP , mmm
to read version
setting specification
Response OK , RP , nnn…
Target QR 401 00000 to Assign the version 1 to 20 with a bit and set in
Model 2 FFFFF HEX mmm : Command number Fixed to 3 bytes
version nnn… : Configuration value (varies according to command
(1 - 20)
number)
specification
Target QR 402 00000 to Assign the version 21 to 40 with a bit and set in
Model 2 FFFFF HEX
version
(21 - 40)
specification
Target 403 0 to F Assign the version M1 to M4 with a bit and set
MicroQR in HEX
version
(M1 - M4)
specification
95 E SR-D100 UM
Details of Operation Configuration Commands  Trigger input configuration
Command
 I/O terminal configuration Function
Number
Value Details
Test mode on startup 100 0 to 3 0 : None

Command
Function Value Details 1 : Reading rate test mode
Number
2 : Read time test mode
IN terminal IN1 terminal 000 0 to 7 0 : Disable
3 : Position test mode
configuration function 1 : Timing input
2 : Preset input Timing Mode 101 0, 1 0 : Level trigger
IN2 terminal 001 0 to 7
3 : TEST 1 : One-shot trigger
function
4 : Capture Scanning One-shot trigger 102 0003 to In units of 10 ms
5 : PLC link error duration 2550
6 : Trigger lock Timing ON command 103 hhhhhhhh Up to 8 characters are available.
7 : Quick setup configuration Use HEX (0x00 - 0x7F) to specify a string.
IN1 Function 002 1 to 3 1 : Reading rate test mode Timing OFF command 104 Timing ON and OFF commands should not be
Test mode 2 : Read time test mode configuration the same string.
configuration 3 : Position test mode
One-character timing 105 0, 1 0 : Disable
when start
ON/OFF command 1 : Enable
test mode is
recognition * When set to Enable, only the following control
assigned
codes can be specified to timing ON/OFF
IN2 Function 003 commands:
Test mode SOH (0x01) SO (0x0e) EM (0x19)
settings STX (0x02) SI (0x0f) SUB (0x1a)
when start ETX (0x03) DLE (0x10) FS (0x1c)
test mode is EOT (0x04) DC1 (0x11) GS (0x1d)
assigned ENQ (0x05) DC2 (0x12) RS (0x1e)
IN1 Function 004 00 to 16 Set the parameter bank number when images BEL (0x07) DC3 (0x13) US (0x1f)
Bank used to are captured at the terminal. BS (0x08) DC4 (0x14)
capture HT (0x09) SYN (0x16)
images VT (0x0b) ETB (0x17)
IN2 Function 005 FF (0x0c) CAN (0x18)
Bank used to * If STX (0x02) or ETX (0x03) is set for either
capture the timing ON or OFF command, the
images command is not recognized in the "<STX>
command <ETX>" format.
IN terminal IN1 Function 006 0, 1 0 : Disable
configuration Power-on 1 : Enable
trigger
 Reading behavior configuration
IN2 Function 007
Power-on Command
trigger Function Value Details
Number
IN1 terminal 008 0, 1 0 : Disabled Read Mode 200 0 to 3 0 : Single
IN LED 1 : Enable 1 : Multi1
synchronization 2 : Multi2
IN2 terminal 009 3 : Burst mode
IN LED Data transmission 201 0, 1 0 : Send after read
synchronization 1 : Send after timing off
Input polarity 010 0, 1 0 : Norm. open Repeat read prevention 202 001 to In units of 100 ms
1 : Norm. close interval at Multi1 255
Required 011 0 to 2 0 : 1 ms operation
input 1 : 2 ms Alternate Priority bank 203 01 to 16
duration 2 : 10 ms function Alternate 204 0, 1 0 : Sequential
OUT OUT1 020 0 to 1055 0 : Not selected order 1 : Begin with successful bank
terminal terminal 1 : OK specification
configuration function 2 : NG Read error code setting 205 hhhhhhhh Up to 8 characters are available.
4 : ERROR Use HEX (0x00 - 0x7F) to specify a string.
OUT2 021 8 : STABLE Set to FF when error codes are not output.
terminal 16 : PRESET OK Specify the value with
Matching level OK/NG 206 0, 1 0 : Disable
function 32 : TRG BUSY the sum of each item.
judgment 1 : Enable
64 : LOCK BUSY
OUT3 022 128 : MODE BUSY Matching level 207 00 to 99
terminal 256 : ERR BUSY threshold
function 512 : FILE BUSY Burst interval 208 000 to In units of 1 ms
1024 : UNSTABLE 255
TRG BUSY 024 0, 1 0 : Disabled 0 : Reset when a code is read
Duplicate reading
Output at 1 : Enable 213 0, 1 1 : Do not reset during duplicate
prevention interval reset
Power On prevention interval.
Output 025 001 to 255 In units of 10 ms
duration for
OUT terminal
E SR-D100 UM 96
Function
Command
Value Details
 Comparison/preset function configuration
Number
Code Selecting the 230 0 to F 0 : Not Set Command
quality marking 1 : ISO/IEC 15415 Number
verification verification 2 : ISO/IEC TR 29158 (AIM DPM-1-2006) Comparison/preset data 400 0001 to
function standard 4 : SAE AS9132 starting index 7089
8 : SEMI T10-0701 Comparison/preset data 401 000 to When set to 0, preset data cannot be
Specify the setting by sum of the values of the length 494 registered.
items using HEX.
Preset data registration 402 hhhhh… Up to 494 characters are available.
ISO/ 231 0 to 4 0 : Disable Use HEX as setting characters.
IEC15415 1 :D FF means no configuration.
verification 2 :C
Type 403 0, 1 0 : Normal
threshold 3 :B
1 : Sequential
4 :A
Sequential increment 404 -9999 to
ISO/IEC TR 232 0 to 4 0 : Disable
specification +9999
29158 (AIM 1 :D
DPM-1-2006) 2 :C
verification 3 :B  Image data saving function configuration
threshold 4 :A
SAE AS9132 233 0, 1 0 : Disable Command
verification 1 : Enable Number
threshold OK image saving option 500 0 to 3 0 : Disabled
Grade indication 350 0, 1 0 : Alphabet configuration 1 : Save to RAM
setting when the 1 : Numeric value NG image saving option 501 0 to 3 2 : Save to ROM
verification configuration 3 : Send by FTP
result is
Error image saving 502 0 to 3
appended
option configuration
Detailed item 351 0, 1 0 : Do not append
Unstable image saving 503 0 to 3
addition setting 1 : Append
option configuration
when the
verification result Captured image saving 504 1 to 3 1 : Save to RAM
is appended option configuration 2 : Save to ROM
3 : Send by FTP
Evaluation value 352 0, 1 0 : Do not append
addition setting 1 : Append Image saving mode 505 0 to 2 0 : Save final bank image
when the setting 1 : Save images after timing ON
verification result 2 : Save images after timing OFF
is appended Number of images to 506 1 to 32 Specify the number of images to save after the
save timing ON/OFF.
Edit image file name 510 0, 1 0 : Disabled
 Appended data function configuration function (Edit image file 1 : Enable
name by script)
Command
Number
Time information 300 0, 1 0 : Do not append  Other operation configuration
appending 1 : Append
Code type appending 301 0, 1 0 : Do not append Command
1 : Append Number
Symbol ID appending 302 0, 1 0 : Do not append Output data on TEST 600 0, 1 0 : Disabled
1 : Append switch 1 : Enable
Parameter bank 303 0, 1 0 : Do not append Partition mark for data 601 hh 0x00 - 0x7F Fixed to 1 character
number appending 1 : Append appending function Use HEX as setting characters.
Scan count appending 305 0, 1 0 : Do not append Intermediate delimiter 602 hhhh… 0x00 - 0x7F Up to 5 characters
1 : Append Use HEX as setting characters.
Read time appending 306 0, 1 0 : Do not append Filling size 603 000 to
1 : Append 999
Position level 307 0, 1 0 : Do not append Data filling character 604 hh 0x00 - 0x7F Fixed to 1 character
appending 1 : Append Use HEX as setting characters.
Code vertex appending 308 0, 1 0 : Do not append Silent mode 606 000 to 0 : Not selected
1 : Append configuration 127 1 : Comparison OK, Read OK
2 : Comparison NG
Code center appending 309 0, 1 0 : Do not append
4 : Read ERROR
1 : Append
8 : Stable Reading (OK/NG)
Unused ECC ratio 310 0, 1 0 : Do not append 16 : Unstable Reading (OK/NG)
appending 1 : Append 32 : Preset Result
Matching level value 312 0, 1 0 : Do not append 64 : Test mode
appending 1 : Append Reader name 607 hhhh… Up to 8 characters.
Image file appending 313 0, 1 0 : Do not append registration Use UNICODE (UTF-16 Big-Endian) with HEX
1 : Append when setting.
Setting for ISO/ 340 0, 1 0 : Do not append FFFF: Not selected
IEC15415 verification 1 : Append Monitor output display 609 0, 1 0 : Display data from front
result addition function position 1 : Display data from back
Setting for ISO/IEC TR 341 0, 1 0 : Do not append Trigger command 610 0 to 2 0 : Default
29158 (AIM DPM-1- 1 : Append response character 1 : SR-600 compatible
2006) verification result string 2 : User setting
addition function * Target commands are LON, LONbb, LOFF,
Setting for SAE AS9132 342 0, 1 0 : Do not append PRON, PROFF, RESET, and BCLR.
verification result 1 : Append bb: parameter bank number (01 - 16)
addition function 613 hhhh… Up to 8 characters can be specified.
Trigger command
Setting for SEMI T10- 343 0, 1 0 : Do not append Specify characters with HEX (0x00 to 0x7F).
success response
0701 verification result 1 : Append * This is valid when the trigger command
character string
addition function response character setting is User setting.
Setting for Master/Slave 320 0, 1 0 : Do not append Trigger command 614 hhhh…
group name addition 1 : Append failure response
character string
Setting for Master/Slave 321 0, 1 0 : Do not append
ID addition 1 : Append
Edit data function 360 0, 1 0 : Disabled
(Data edit by script) 1 : Enable
97 E SR-D100 UM
 Tuning configuration  Ethernet communication configuration
Command Command
Function Value Details Function Value Details
number Number
Brightness adjustment 801 0, 1 0 : High quality mode IP address 200 a.b.c.d a : 0 - 255
mode 1 : High speed mode configuration b : 0 - 255
Exposure on high 802 3 to by the 10 s c : 0 - 255
speed mode 1000 d : 0 - 255
Offset setting 803 0 to 255 If 255 is set, it operates as a defined value. Subnet mask 201 8 to 30 Specify the value as a bit length.
configuration 255.255.255.0…24
Dynamic range 804 0, 1 0 : Hi-Sensitivity/Normal/Hi-SNR
255.255.0.0…16
1 : Hi-DR
Default gateway 202 a.b.c.d a : 0 - 255
Tuning mode 805 0, 1 0 : Normal
configuration b : 0 - 255
1 : Filter
c : 0 - 255
Codes to read while 808 01 to 16 d : 0 - 255
tuning
Data port 1 Remote IP 203 a.b.c.d a : 0 - 255 * Set for client
Allow reduced detection 809 0, 1 0 : Do not allow address b : 0 - 255 operation
count while tuning 1 : Allow c : 0 - 255
d : 0 - 255
Communication Configuration Command Format Data port 1 Remote port 204 1024 to * Set for client
number 65535 operation
Communication configuration command is sent in the following format:
• Configuration change Send Connection 205 0, 1 0 : Disabled * Set for client
WN , mmm , nnn… Requests as Necessary 1 : Enable operation
Send command
Response OK , WN Data port 1 port 206 1024 to * 9013, 9014, 9015, 5900, 5910, and 44818
configuration 65535 cannot be used
• Configuration confirmation
Command port 207 1024 to
Send command RN , mmm configuration 65535
Data port 1 KeepAlive 208 0, 1 0 : Disabled
Response OK , RN , nnn…
function configuration 1 : Enable
mmm : Command number Fixed to 3 bytes Command port 209 0, 1 0 : Disabled
nnn… : Configuration value (varies according to command KeepAlive function 1 : Enable
configuration
number)
Important To change and apply the communication configuration, make sure  Data port 2 configuration
to send a SAVE command.
Command
Number
Remote IP address 300 a.b.c.d a : 0 - 255
Details of Communication Configuration Commands b : 0 - 255
c : 0 - 255
 Communication port configuration d : 0 - 255
Remote port number 301 1024 to
Command 65535
Number Communication 303 0 to 5 0 : MC protocol
Command port 000 0 to 2 0 : Not used protocol 1 : SYSWAY*1
configuration 1 : RS-232C 2 : KV STUDIO *1: When Data port 2 is
Data port 1 001 2 : Ethernet 3 : None or TCP*2 set to Ethernet, 1
configuration * When Data port 2 is set to RS-232C, do not 4 : EtherNet/IP cannot be used.
set the command port to RS-232C. 5 : PROFINET *2: Depends on the
Data port 2 002
Data port 2.
configuration
Checksum appending 003 0, 1 0 : Disabled DM front address 304 MC:
1 : Enable 0 to 32767
SYSWAY:
Data size appending 004 0, 1 0 : Disabled
0 to 9999
1 : Enable
KV:
Header configuration 005 hhhh… 0x00 - 0x7F Up to 5 characters. 0 to 65534
Use HEX if configured.
Control region address 305 MC:
Terminator 006 hhhh… 0x00 - 0x7F Up to 5 characters. 0 - 7F
configuration Use HEX if configured. SYSWAY:
0 to 6143
KV: 1 - 599
 RS-232C communication configuration
Response region 306 MC:
address 0 - 7F
Command
Function Value Details SYSWAY:
Number
0 to 6143
Baud rate configuration 100 0 to 4 0 : 9600 bps
KV: 1 - 599
1 : 19200 bps
2 : 38400 bps Output data length 307 001 to * Set the maximum data write length.
3 : 57600 bps configuration 100
4 : 115200 bps PLC link timing input 308 0, 1 0 : Disabled
Data bit length 101 0, 1 0 : 7 bit 1 : Enable
configuration 1 : 8 bit Timing/Data wait 309 00 to 99 In units of 100 ms
Parity check 102 0 to 2 0 : None Retry duration 310 01 to 30 In units of 1 second
configuration 1 : Even EtherNet/IP 321 0, 1 0 : Disable handshake
2 : Odd Data handshake 1 : Enable handshake
Stop bit length 103 0, 1 0 : 1 bit EtherNet/IP 322 0040 to
configuration 1 : 2 bit Input assembly (send) 1400
Communication 104 0 to 2 0 : None size
protocol configuration 1 : PASS/RTRY EtherNet/IP 323 0004 to
2 : ACK/NAK Output assembly 1400
(receive) size
EtherNet/IP 324 0, 1 0 : Disable (ROCKWELL)
Byte swap for the data 1 : Enable (KEYENCE, OMRON)
area
E SR-D100 UM 98
Command
Number
PROFINET device 330 nnn… Up to 240 characters
name Specify with ASCII codes
* Device naming rule
1. PROFINET device name length: 1 to 240
characters
2. 1 label length: 1 to 63 characters
3. Only [a to z] (alphabet lower case), [0 to 9]
(numbers), [-] (hyphen), [.] (period) can be
used for a device name.
4. [-] (hyphen) cannot be used at the beginning
of the label.
5. [-] (hyphen) cannot be used at the end of the
label.
6. port-xyz, port-xyz-abcde cannot be the name
of the first label.
a, b, c, d, e, x, y, z means [0 to 9] (numbers).
7. Device names cannot be made in the IP
address format (n.n.n.n n=0,…,999).
8. Labels cannot start with xn-.
9. The first character of labels cannot be a
number.
If these rules are not observed, an error occurs.
PROFINET handshake 331 0, 1 0 : Do not handshake
1 : Handshake
 FTP Configuration
Command
Number
Remote FTP server IP 400 a.b.c.d a : 0 - 255
address b : 0 - 255
c : 0 - 255
d : 0 - 255
Remote FTP server 401 nnnn… 16 characters or less
user name * ASCII code 0x20 - 0x7E can be used to
specify.
Remote FTP server 402 nnnn… 16 characters or less
password * ASCII code 0x20 - 0x7E can be used to
specify.
Change directory 403 0, 1 0 : Disabled
1 : Enable
Destination directory 404 nnnn… 32 characters or less
name * ASCII code 0x20 - 0x7E can be used to
specify.
Keep Connected 405 0, 1 0 : Disabled
1 : Enable
Send NOOP Command 406 0, 1 0 : Disabled
1 : Enable
NOOP command 407 01 to 10 In units of 1 minute
interval
Send PASV Command 408 0, 1 0 : Disabled
1 : Enable
Binning 413 0 to 3 0 : Full
1 : 1/4
2 : 1/16
3 : 1/64
 Master/Slave function configuration

Command
Number
Master/Slave operation 500 0 to 2 0 : Disable
configuration 1 : Multi drop link
2 : Multi head
Master/Slave ID during 501 0 to 31 If 0 is set, it operates as Master.
operation
Number of read data in 502 1 to 8
Multi Head mode
Master/Slave group 503 nnnn… Up to 16 characters
name Specify with ASCII codes
* 0x20 to 0x7E of ASCII codes can be used.
 Other settings
Command
Number
VNC pixel format 213 1 0 : 16 bit color
1 : 8 bit color
99 E SR-D100 UM
10-1 PLC Link Devices that can be used
Devices accessible via PLC link are as follows:
This chapter presents an overview and the control method of the PLC link.
PLC Specified area Device name Available range
Control region
PLC Link KV Series Response region
Input relay, output relay R100 to R59915*1
The PLC link allows the SR-D100 Series to directly write data into the internal Data region Data memory DM0 to DM65534
memory of the PLC (programmable logic controller) via the RS-232C interface and Control region Input device Y0 to Y7FF*2
Ethernet interface. MELSEC Series Response region Output device X0 to X7FF*2
Since the SR-D100 Series directly controls memory in the PLC, it eliminates the Data region Data register 0 to 32737
need for a communication program. Therefore, man-hours needed to create Control region CIO, internal auxiliary
programs can be reduced. 0 to 6143 ch
SYSMAC Series Response region relay
Data region Data memory D0000 to D9999
Important The following restrictions are imposed regarding the use of the
PLC link: • The available range is a maximum value of the device accessible when the PLC
• The SR-D100 configuration cannot be changed via PLC link. link function is used. To specify the DM front address, control region address, or
• Test mode cannot be activated via PLC link. response region address, configure by taking into account the number of
• Operation command and setup command cannot be sent via necessary devices.
PLC link. • The device region that can actually be used may not be configured up to a
• Due to long communication time, it is not suitable for a line that maximum value or may include unavailable area, depending on specifications
requires high-speed processing. and configuration. For more information on available regions, refer to the
• The amount of data that can be processed depends on the appropriate PLC manual.
output data length. A maximum number of digits is 100. *1 AutoID Network Navigator entry field range: 1 to 599
(Default output data length is 64 digits.) *2 AutoID Network Navigator entry field range: 0 to 7F
• Specifying the Control region address and the Response region address
Inputting 2 in the AutoID Network Navigator entry field means that the shaded
List of supported PLCs area as indicated below is specified.

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
RS-232C Interface 1
2 Front address
 KEYENCE 3
4
Series name Connection method Model
5
CPU built-in port KV-3000, KV Nano Series
KV Series KV-L20V/L20R,
10-2
Communication unit
KV-N10L/NC10L/NC20L
Configuration
 Mitsubishi Electric
This section describes the configuration of the SR-D100 Series and PLC.
QJ71C24N/-R2
MELSEC Series Serial communication unit
LJ71C24/-R2 SR-D100 Series configuration
Configure the SR-D100 Series using the AutoID Network Navigator as follows:
 OMRON
1 Set the interface to "RS-232C" or "Ethernet" under the PLC
Series name Connection method Model communication in the Communication 2 tab.
CS1 Series • When the interface is set to "RS-232C", command communication and PC
CJ1 Series host output interface configuration are switched to "Not used".
CPU built-in port
CJ2 Series* 2 Select the protocol appropriate for the PLC to be used.
CP1 Series*
• Mitsubishi MELSEC Series : MC Protocol
CP1W-CIF01 • OMRON SYSMAC Series : SYSWAY * RS-232C only
SYSMAC Series
Serial option board CP1W-CIF11 • KEYENCE KV Series : KV STUDIO
CP1W-CIF12
CJ1W-SCU□□(-V1)
3-1 When the interface is set to RS-232C, set "Baud rate", "Data
Serial communication unit length", "Stop bit length" to match the configuration in the PLC.
CS1W-SCU□□-V1
Communication board CS1-SUB□□-V1 3-2 When the interface is set to Ethernet, set "IP address" and "Port
number" in the PLC.
* A serial option board is necessary, depending on the model.
4 Set "PLC link timing input".
Ethernet Interface To perform read operation using A00: PLC timing area, set "PLC link timing
input" in the [Table] tab to "Enable".
 KEYENCE To input the timing signal directly into the SR-D100 Series, set it to "Disable".

5 Set "DM address", " Control region address", and "Response region
CPU built-in port KV-5000/5500
address".
KV Series Refer to "10-3 Device Assignment (Page 102)".
Ethernet unit KV-LE21V/LE20V, KV-NC1EP
 Mitsubishi Electric
Q03/04/06/10/13/20/26/50/
CPU built-in port 100UDECPU
MELSEC Series L02CPU/06CPU/26CPU-BT
Ethernet unit QJ71E71-100/-B5/-B2
E SR-D100 UM 100
Configuring the KV Series Ethernet Interface
RS-232C Interface  QJ71E71-100/-B5/-B2

Set communication conditions with the GX-Developer.
("I/O assignment configuration" in "PC parameters")
Operation KV BUILDER/KV STUDIO mode
Type Intelligent
Interface RS-232C *1
Type name Name of the unit to be installed
Division 0
Points 32 points
Baud rate Automatic *2
First XY First output signal of the target unit (hexadecimal number)
Data bit length 8 bits *2
*2
(Target unit number for "Ethernet/CC IE/MELSECNET" in "Network parameters")
Parity Even (e)
Network type Ethernet
Stop bit length 1 bit *2
*2 Number specified in "I/O assignment configuration" in PC
Checksum None First I/O No.
parameters
RS/CSFlow control Disable
Network No. Any number
*1 To use port2, set the interface to "RS-232C". Group No. Any number
*2 For KV BUILDER/KV STUDIO mode, a fixed value is used. Division Any number
Mode Online
Ethernet Interface ("Operation configuration" for "Ethernet/CC IE/MELSECNET" in "Network parameters")
Communication data code
Binary code communication
configuration
IP address 192.168.0.10 (default)
Initial timing configuration Always waiting for OPEN (Communication possible during STOP)
Subnet mask 255.255.255.0 (default)
IP address 192.168.0.20 *1
Port (VT) 8502 (default)
Writing permitted during
Check
RUN
MELSEC Series Configuration Send frame configuration Ethernet (V2.0)
TCPliving confirmation
KeepAlive is used.
RS-232C Interface configuration
*1 Configure so that it matches the network.
 QJ71C24N/-R2 * The port number set for SR-D100 is 5000 (decimal number).
Set communication conditions with the GX-Developer.  Q03/04/06/10/13/20/26/50/100UDECPU
("I/O assignment configuration" in "PC parameters")
Set communication conditions with the GX-Developer.
Type Intelligent
("Built-in Ethernet port configuration" in "PC parameters")
Type name Name of the unit to be installed
IP address 192.168.0.20 *1
Points 32 points
Subnet mask patterns 255.255.255.0 *1
First XY First output signal of the target unit (hexadecimal number)
Default router IP address 192.168.0.254 *1
("Option configuration" under "I/O assignment settings" in "PC parameters")
Unit type Serial communication/modem interface unit Binary code communication
configuration
Unit type name Name of the unit to be installed Writing permitted during
("Switch configuration" under "I/O assignment configuration" in "PC parameters") RUN Check
Setting item Value (FTP and MC protocol)
Operation configuration Independent *1 Configure so that it matches the network.

Data bit length 8 bits
(Select "PC parameters" - "Built-in Ethernet port configuration" – "Open
configuration".)
Parity bit Present
Protocol UDP
Odd/even parity Odd (o)
Open system MC protocol
Stop bit length 1 bit
Port number with Ethernet
Checksum code Present 232C (hexadecimal number) * Any number
module installed
Writing during RUN Allowed
* The port number of the SR-D100 Series must be specified in decimal number
Configuration change Allowed
while the Q Series port number with Ethernet module installed is specified in
Communication rate hexadecimal number.
9600 bps
configuration
Communication protocol
Example) Hexadecimal number Decimal number
MC protocol (format 5)
configuration 232C 9004
Division configuration 0
 L02CPU/26CPU-BT
Set communication conditions with the GX-Works2.
(Select "PC parameters" - "Built-in Ethernet port configuration" – "Open
configuration".)
IP address 192.168.0.20 *1
Subnet mask patterns 255.255.255.0 *1
Default router IP address 192.168.0.254 *1
Binary code communication
configuration
Writing permitted during
RUN Check
(FTP and MC protocol)
*1 Make the configuration appropriate to the network.
("Built-in Ethernet port configuration" in "PC parameters")
Protocol UDP
Open system MC protocol
Port number with Ethernet
232C (hexadecimal number) * Any number
module installed
* The port number of the SR-D100 Series must be specified in decimal number
while the Q Series port number with Ethernet module installed is specified in
hexadecimal number.
101 E SR-D100 UM
Configuring the SYSMAC Series 10-3 Device Assignment
RS-232C Interface To use the SR-D100 Series over the PLC link, functions of the SR-D100 Series
need to be assigned to the PLC devices.
Set communication conditions with the GX-Programmer. For the SR-D100 Series, the first address of each device is assigned in response
to target function.
 CPU built-in port
PLC system configuration  Upper link port (serial port) • Control region : Device used to write a command from the PLC. One channel
Communication is used for device assignment.
User configuration
configuration • Response region : Device used to write a response from the SR-D100 Series.
Baud rate 9600 bits/s One channel is used for device assignment.
Parameter 7,2,E • Data region : Device used to write alternate instructions of the SR-D100
Series and result data from the SR-D100 Series. Occupies a
Mode Upper link
maximum of 1610 devices with serial numbers.
ID No. 0
* When communication configuration is established as a standard, baud rate and
parameters are fixed as above. Function Assignment of Control Region, Response Region, and Data Region
 Serial communication unit/board This section describes assignment of functions of each region.
CJ1W-SCU□□(-V1)
CS1W-SCU□□-V1 Assignment of Control Region Functions
CS1-SUB□□-V1
I/O table/unit configuration When the control region address A is specified, functions are assigned in order as
shown below starting with the specified beginning address.
Presence or absence of
Optional configuration
optional configuration A15 A14 A13 A12 A11 A10 A09 A08 A07 A06 A05 A04 A03 A02 A01 A00
Communication mode Upper link Reserved area
Data length 7 bits
SR-D100
Stop bit 2 bits Address Description Data description PLC Write
Write
Parity Even
0: Instruction for timing OFF
Transmission rate 9600 bps A00 PLC timing area × ○
1: Instruction for timing ON
CTS control None Data write processing 0: Real time processing
A01 × ○
Upper link ID No 0 method 1: Sequential processing
Sequential processing 0: Data write disabled
A02 × ○
Data write enabled 1: Data write enabled
* When performing the trigger input ON/OFF using the PLC timing area, set "PLC
link timing input" to "Enable".
"5-4 Configuration - Table (Page 51)"
Assignment of Response Region Functions

When the response region address B is specified, functions are assigned in order
as shown below starting with the specified beginning address.
B15 B14 B13 B12 B11 B10 B09 B08 B07 B06 B05 B04 B03 B02 B01 B00
Reserved area
SR-D100
Address Description Data description PLC Write
Write
PLC timing input 0: Timing OFF
B00 ○ ×
response area 1: Instruction for timing ON
B01 Reserved area ― ― ―
Sequential processing 0: No data
B02 ○ ×
Data write request 1: Data write request
Sequential processing 0: Data write incomplete
B03 ○ ×
Data write complete 1: Data write complete
Real time processing 0: No data being written
B04 ○ ×
Data being written 1: Data being written
* Do not use the reserved area.
E SR-D100 UM 102
Assignment of Data Region Functions Detailed Description of Device Assignment Function
When the data region address D is specified, functions are assigned in order as
shown below starting with the specified beginning address.
Read timing area (A00, B00)
SR-D100 This function is used when "PLC link timing input" is set to "Enable".
Address Description Data description PLC Write
Write The usage varies depending on the measurement method.
0: Bank not specified
D+00 Specify read bank (alternate) × ○  Assigning read timing area
1 to 16: Bank n specified
Specify the Master/Slave ID for Address Description Data description
timing input when the Multi drop 0: Instruction for timing OFF
D+01 Specify ID*5 × ○ A00 PLC timing area
is set. 1: Instruction for timing ON
0 to 31: Unit ID 0: Timing OFF
B00 PLC timing input response area
Length of data output from the 1: Instruction for timing ON
SR-D100 Series • When the A00 switches to ON (1), the SR-D100 Series starts reading.
(Read data + Appended data)
D+02 Output data length ○ × • The B00 address is an area used to verify if the SR-D100 has recognized A00
* Length of data most recently
output when using the
correctly.
Master/Slave function When the SR-D100 recognizes A00 correctly (=LED emits light), B00 switches to
The number of times read data
ON (1).
Number of times data has has been written into the PLC
D+03
been written from the SR-D100 Series is
○ ×  Level trigger operation procedure
displayed.
2 characters of ASCII code *2 *3 *4
1 Set the A00 and B00 addresses to OFF (0).
D+04 Output data 1st, 2nd digit

Data of Master ID: 0 is
○ ×
2 To start the SR-D100 Series reading (turn on timing), set the A00
displayed when using the address to ON (1).
Master/Slave function.
D+05 Output data 3rd, 4th digit

2 characters of ASCII code
○ ×
3 When the SR-D100 Series recognizes the A00 address, the B00
*2 *3 *4
address switches to ON (1), and reading starts.
… … … If the B00 does not switch to ON (1), do not perform the following operations
2 characters of ASCII code because the SR-D100 Series has not recognized the A00 address.
D+53 Output data 99,100th digit *2 *3 *4 ○ ×
ID of Master/Slave unit to which

4 Once the code has been read, new data is written into D+04 to D+53.
D+54 Data writing ID*5 most recent data is written is
displayed.
○ × 5 To turn off the timing, set the A00 address to OFF (0).
D+55
Timing input count for Timing input count for Master is
○ ×
Master*5 displayed. address switches to OFF (0), and the timing turns OFF.
D+56 to
D+59
Reserved area × × 7 When a read error occurs, an error code is written into D+04 to D+53.
When using the Master/Slave
Point When the timing of the SR-D100 Series is turned ON/OFF at high
D+60 to Output data 1 to 100 function
○ ×
D+109 digits*5 Data of Slave ID: 1 is speed with the A00 address, the SR-D100 Series may miss the A00
displayed. address, causing an error such as failure to turn ON/OFF triggger
When using the Master/Slave input. In such a case, program to allow checking with the B00
D+110 to Output data 1 to 100 function address to see if the SR-D100 Series recognized the A00 address.
○ ×
D+159 digits*5 Data of Slave ID: 2 is
displayed.
… … … … …
 One-shot trigger operation procedure
When using the Master/Slave
D1560 to Output data 1 to 100 function
○ ×
1 Set the A00 and B00 addresses to OFF (0).
D+1609 digits*5 Data of Slave ID: 31 is
displayed. 2 To start the SR-D100 Series reading (turn on timing), set the A00
*1 When the next data reaches at the count of 65535, the value of count returns to address to ON (1).
1.
*2 When the output data length is an odd number, [NUL] (0x00) is written in the
address switches to ON (1), and reading starts.
"Output data length + 1".
*3 The order in which data of each PLC is stored is as follows: If the B00 does not switch to ON (1), do not perform the following operation,
MELSEC : Low order byte → High order byte because the SR-D100 Series has not recognized the A00 address.
SYSMAC : High order byte → Low order byte 4 Read operation is carried out for "one-shot trigger duration"
KV : High order byte → Low order byte configured for the SR-D100 Series.
*4 The data length output from the SR-D100 Series depends on the data output
length set in the SR-D100 Series. (Default: 64 digits) 5 Once the code has been read, new data is written into D+04 to D+53.
*5 Used only when Master/Slave function is set. When a read error occurs, an error code is written into D+04 to D+53.
* 0-byte data is output as data with a length of 0.
6 When the A00 address is set to OFF (0), the B00 address switches to
Point OFF (0).
If output data cannot fit in the output data region, data after that
length will be discarded.
However, for the length of D+02, the data length output by the SR-
D100 Series is written.
When append data is set for the read data of SR-D100, the total of
append data and read length is the data length.
103 E SR-D100 UM
Data write processing method (A01 to A02, B02 to B04, D+03)  Sequential processing operating procedure
The following 2 methods for writing data are available, depending on applications:
1 Set the A01 address to ON (1).
 Real time processing

2 When the SR-D100 completes reading codes, the B02 address
switches to ON (1). When the A02 address is set to ON (1), the SR-
D100 Series writes read data into the D+04 to D+53 address.
Address Description Data description
A01 Data write processing format

0: Real time processing 3 When read data writing is completed, the B03 address switches to
1: Sequential processing ON (1). When the switch of the B03 address to ON (1) is confirmed,
B04
Real time processing 0: No data being written set the A02 address to OFF (0).
Data being written 1: Data being written When the A02 address switches to OFF (0), the B03 address also switches to
• To conduct real time processing, set the A01 address to OFF (0) in advance. OFF (0). The B02 address switches to OFF (0) when there is no data in the SR-
• When data is being written into the PLC, B04 switches to ON (1), and it switches D100 Series, but stays ON (1) when data remains.
to OFF (0) when write is completed.
4 When the A02 address switches to OFF (0), program data in the D+04
Point When the SR-D100 Series reads bar codes at intervals faster than to D+53 address.
PLC communication, data that is not written into the PLC will be
stored in the send buffer of the SR-D100 Series. Specify read bank (D+00)
The SR-D100 can hold up to 100 pieces of data. When data
exceeds the limit, all data in the buffer is erased and "OVER" is Specify a bank used for read operation.
written into the D+04 to D+53 address.
Address Description Data description Data format
When a send buffer overflow occurs, the SR-D100 Series stops
0: Bank not specified (alternate)
operation, writes "OVER" into the PLC, and then returns to an D+00 Specify read bank Binary code
1 to 16: Bank n specified
operating state.
Output data length (D+02)
 Real time processing operating procedure The area is used to write data length output from the SR-D100.
1 Set the A01 address to OFF (0). Address Description Data description Data format
2 When the SR-D100 Series is writing read data into the D+04 to D+53 D+02 Output data length
Length of data output from the SR-
D100 Series: 0 to 100
Binary code
address, the B04 address switches to ON (1).
3 When writing of read data is complete, the B04 address returns to Point The output data means "Appended data + Read data".
OFF (0).
4 Confirm that the B04 address has returned to OFF (0) and program
data in the D+04 to D+53 address. Output data (D+04 to D+53)
The D+03 address value increments every time 1 piece of data is written. By
checking the D+03 address value when the B04 address returns to OFF (0), an
Address Description Data description Data format
omission can be prevented.
D+04 to 2 characters of ASCII code/address
Output data *1 *2 *3 ASCII code
 Sequential processing D+53
*1 When the output data length is an odd number, [NUL] (0x00) is written in the
Address Description Data description Data format "Output data length + 1".
0: Real time processing *2 The order in which data of each PLC is stored is as follows:
A01 Data write processing method MELSEC : Low order byte → High order byte
1: Sequential processing
Sequential processing 0: Data write disabled SYSMAC : High order byte → Low order byte
A02 KV : High order byte → Low order byte
Data write enabled 1: Data write enabled
Binary *3 The data length output from the SR-D100 Series depends on the data output
Sequential processing 0: No data
B02 length set in the SR-D100 Series main unit. (Default: 64 digits)
Data write request 1: Data write request
Sequential processing 0: Data write incomplete
B03
Data write complete 1: Data write complete
• To conduct sequential processing, set the A01 address to ON (1) in advance.
• When the A02 address value is ON (1), the SR-D100 Series writes code data
read into the D+04 to D+53 address,
• When data writing is completed, set the B03 address to ON (1).
• When read data is in the SR-D100 Series, the B02 address switches to ON (1).
• When the A02 address is OFF (0), the SR-D100 Series stores data in the send
buffer without writing new data.
Point • In sequential processing, when the A02 address is OFF (0), new
data is not sent to the PLC, but stored in the send buffer of the
SR-D100 Series. When the 101st data writing is attempted
beyond the upper limit of 100 pieces of data, buffer overflow
occurs.
In this case, 100 pieces of data are all cleared and the 101st data
is not stored. Instead, OVER is stored at the beginning of buffer.
• When the PLC is ready to receive data, be sure to set the A02 to
ON (1).
E SR-D100 UM 104
10-4 Reference Program Reference Program
This is a reference program for the use of the KV Series. In this program, error
This section introduces simple reference programs regarding the PLC link with the handling is not considered, thus program by taking into account error handling and
SR-D100 Series. test in actual operation.
In actual operation, program by taking into account error handling, etc.
 SR-D100 Series configuration
Timing diagram It is assumed that the SR-D100 Series is configured as follows:
• Timing : Level trigger
In the following timing diagram, an explanation of operation of devices and the SR- • Read mode : Single
D Series in real time processing and sequential processing is given. • Memory assignment DM front address: DM1000
Construct an operation program by referring to the timing diagram. Control region address: R100
Response region address: R200
 Real time processing • PLC link timing input : Yes
* To use on a trial basis, specify the PLC communication interface to the SR-D100
Reading success Reading error
Series and perform communication configuration for the KV Series.
Processing ON
method A+01 OFF
Control region
Timing instruction
A+00
ON  Real time processing
OFF
ON Reading OK Read error

Read operation (The light is illuminated.)
OFF
Specifying alternate function
Timing response ON
CR2008
Response B+00 OFF #0
region Data being written ON DW Write "0" into DM1000 and set to use
B+04 DM1000
OFF
the alternate function.
Timing input processing
Read bank Alternate instruction or the specified value of parameter bank
Instruction D+00 R000 R100
Data region
Data region Read Read
D+02~ data error
Input R000 as read timing.
Data processing
• When starting the program, specify the alternate function or parameter bank
R204
number to be used. (D+00 region) Program data to be written into DM1004
• Read data is overwritten in the data region (D+02 and over). To transfer data, do or later.
so at the timing for setting the flag (B+04) to OFF.

• Data from D+02 will be overwritten. As a result, if the length changes, since there END
may remain previous data in the region, program to delete data from D+04, after
ENDH
transferring data if necessary.
 Sequential processing  Sequential processing

Reading success Reading error
Specifying sequential processing and alternate function
Processing ON
method A+01 OFF CR2008 R101
Timing instruction
Control region A+00
ON
SET Set up the R101 and set it to sequential
OFF
Data write ON
processing.
enabled A+02 #0
OFF
ON
DW Write "0" into DM1000 and set to use
Read operation (The light is illuminated.)
OFF DM1000 the alternate function.
Timing response ON Timing input processing
B+00 OFF
R000 R100
Response Data write ON
region request B+02 OFF Input R000 as read timing.
Data write ON
complete B+03 OFF Sequential processing
Read bank R202 R203 R102
Alternate instruction or the specified value of parameter bank
instruction D+00
Data region Use the data write request flag (R202),
Data region Read Read
D+02~ data error data write enabled flag (R102), data
Data processing write complete flag (R203) to perform
• When starting the program, set the processing method (A+01) to sequential R203 sequential processing.
processing, and specify the alternate function or parameter bank number to be Program read data to be written into
DM1004 or later.
used in the D+00 region.
• When data write request (B+02) is ON and data write complete (B+03) is OFF, END
program to set data write enabled (A+02) to ON.
This setting makes it possible to obtain all data even when multiple pieces of data ENDH
are sent.
• When data write complete (B+03) is set to ON, new data is written into D+02 and
over. Perform a data transfer at the timing for setting data write complete flag
(B+03) to ON.
• Data after D+02 will be overwritten. As a result, if the length changes, since
previous data may remain in the region, program to delete data from D+04, if
necessary, after transferring data.
105 E SR-D100 UM
10-5 PLC Link Error
This section describes how to handle a communication error when it occurs during
PLC link.
 Operation when a PLC link error occurs

When a PLC link error occurs, the SR-D100 Series exhibits the following behavior:
• PWE/FILE LED (LED1) blinks in red.
• When ERR BUSY is set to the output terminal, the set output terminal turns on.
Since the operation is stopped during this period, no timing input signal is
accepted.
 Check points
When an error occurs, check the following points:
• Check that the cable between SR-D100 Series and PLC is correctly connected.
• Check that the correct communication cable, including wiring, is used. Check for
breaks.
• Is the SR-D100 Series correctly set to the PLC link?
• Was the PLC to be connected turned on again after setting is complete?
• Is the PLC configuration correct?
• Is the address configuration for each control within the range of use of the PLC?
• Are the devices specified for each control address within the range of use of the
SR-D100 Series?
 Procedure for PLC link error recovery

Use the following procedure to clear the PLC link error of the SR-D100 Series and
resume communication.
• Turn the SR-D100 Series back on.
• Hold the TEST button on the SR-D100 Series for 3 seconds.
• When Clear PLC link error is set to the IN terminal, turn on the IN terminal.
• Send the Clear PLC link error command (PCLR) from the command
communication port.
• Send the Reset command (RESET) from the command communication port.
When the PLC link error is cleared, data stored in the send buffer will be cleared.
If the problem persists despite the above action, contact your nearest KEYENCE
sales office.
E SR-D100 UM 106
11-1 Master/Slave function 11-2 Setting procedure
The Master/Slave function has two types of modes: Multi drop link mode and Multi Make the setting according to the following procedure.
head mode. This section describes the overview of each mode.
(1) Ethernet setting for each code reader
Multi drop link mode Change each reader's IP address avoiding duplication of IP address.
Make the same setting for Subnet mask.
Master unit/Slave unit settings

With this mode, one Master unit collects the read data of multiple units (up to 32 (2) Operation setting, group name and unit ID setting
units) of SR-D100 and SR-750 Series operating with different purposes and sends Target mode : Select either the Multi drop mode or the Multi head mode.
the data to the host. Group name : Set the same group name for all units. (Up to 1-byte
Because the host only has to communicate with the SR designated as Master, the 16 characters)
host does not need to consider the communication control for multiple units. Thus, If there is no problem with the default setting, no need
the system load is reduced with the simple program. Also for PLC, only one to change.
communication unit is necessary to control multiple units. This enables the simple Unit ID : Set Master ID and Slave IDs.
device configuration. Set different IDs for all units.
Host (3) Append data setting
Set append data for each unit. If read data is only necessary, this
PC
HUB setting is not required.
Edit data function can also be set for each unit.
Slave unit Slave unit Master unit (4) Multi-code reading setting *Only in the Multi head mode
Set the number of codes to be read. (Number of read data: 1 to 8)
(5) Communication method selection
PLC Decide which communication method the Master unit will use.
[Communication 2] setting
Master unit settings

• Master unit
Command port : Select a desired communication method.
Data port 1 and 2 : Select a desired communication method.
Master unit sends data of Slave units to the host. • Slave unit
Command port : Not used
Multi head mode Data port 1 and 2 : Not used
(6) Header, terminator, etc. setting

Use this mode when you do not know the position of a code in one reading target Set the header, terminator, data length and checksum on the Master unit.
workpiece or when the workpiece is larger than the field of view and the entire
(7) Data transmission timing setting *Only in the Multi head mode
workpiece cannot fit within the field of view using one unit.
Set the data transmission timing.
Because multiple units (up to 8 units) of SR-D100 and SR-750 Series can be
handled as one device, the host does not need to consider the control for multiple
units, and the program becomes simple. Important With the Master/Slave function, the following communication
methods cannot be set.
Host
• EtherNet/IP
PC • PROFINET
HUB
Slave unit • Multi 1 read mode
• Multi 2 read mode
• Burst read mode (Only for the Multi head mode)
For the following items, the Slave unit settings will not be
reflected. They depend on the Master unit settings.
PLC • Header • Terminator • Data length • Checksum
• Communication protocol: UDP
Slave unit
Communicates via Directed Broadcast.
When using the Master/Slave function, both Ethernet and RS-232C
can be selected for data output from Master. However, connection
between master and Slave must be made with Ethernet.
Master unit controls Slave units.
Master unit
Usable reading modes and protocols

 Usable reading modes
Reading mode Multi drop link Multi head
Single ○ ○
Multi 1 - -
Multi 2 - -
Burst ○ -
 Usable protocols with data port 1 and 2

Protocol Multi drop link Multi head
Non-procedure ○ ○
TCP ○ ○
MC protocol ○ ○
SYSWAY ○ ○
KV STUDIO ○ ○
EtherNet/IP - -
PROFINET - -
Advanced setting
 When creating multiple Master/Slave groups within the same network
With the Master/Slave function, communication with other units in the same group
is made. In this case, by making different group names, multiple Master/Slave
groups can be made in the same network.
107 E SR-D100 UM
11-3 Multi drop link mode Number of read data: 2, Data transmission timing: Send
after timing OFF
With the Multi drop link mode, reading operations of each SR-D100 or SR-750
Series are controlled by each unit. However, transmission of timing commands and • Reading success • Reading error
sending read data are collected and controlled by the Master unit.
Timing input
Reading OK
Control methods of Multi drop link mode Master (ID0)
operation
The Multi drop link mode has the following 3 control methods. Reading OK
• Control for reading by inputting the timing signal to each SR-D100 and SR-750
Slave (ID1)
Series operation
• Control for reading by sending commands to each SR-D100 and SR-750 Series
via Master unit [ID0 data]
Data ERROR
• Control for reading by making the PLC link communication to each SR-D100 and communication [ID1 data]
SR-750 Series via Master unit
(For memory map, etc., refer to Chapter 10 PLC Link.) If there are multiple read data and transmission is made after timing OFF, the data
is output from the smaller ID number regardless of the order of reading.
Important Only read data is sent to the Master unit.  Data format
Other data including test mode, preset registration results, etc. are
not output. ID0 (Master) Inter- ID1 (Slave) Inter-
Header … Terminator
read data delimiter read data delimiter
Usable commands in the Multi drop link mode Control methods of Multi head mode
The Multi head mode has the following 3 control methods.
 Timing ON command • Control for reading by inputting the timing signal to Master SR-D100 or SR-750
Send command %Tmm–LON mm: Master/Slave ID (00 to 31) Series
%Tmm–LON,bb bb: Bank No. (01 to 16) • Control for reading by sending the timing ON command to Master SR-D100 or
* For SR-750, bb: 01 to 10 are valid. SR-750 Series
If bb: 11 to 16 are assigned, no • Control for reading by making the PLC link communication to Master SR-D100 or
response is returned. SR-750 Series
Response %Tmm–OK,LON (For memory map, etc., refer to PLC Link.)
%Tmm–OK,LON,bb
 Timing OFF command Important • Only read data is sent to the Master unit.
Other data including test mode, preset registration results, etc.
Send command %Tmm–LOFF mm: Master/Slave ID (00 to 31) are not output.
Response %Tmm–OK,LOFF • Data transmission timing setting is made on the Master unit.
Set "Send after read" for all Slave units.
 Command to obtain model code and main unit version • Set the number of codes to be read to the total number of
Send command %Tmm–KEYENCE mm: Master/Slave ID (00 to 31) connected Master/Slave units or less. If the number of codes to
be read is more than the total number of units, reading cannot be
 CANCEL command (Cancels operations of the Master unit completed.
and Slave Units.)
Send command %Tmm–CANCEL mm: Master/Slave ID (00 to 31)
Usable commands in the Multi head mode
* Master unit ID and Slave unit IDs are shown below.
• Master unit ID: 00  Timing ON command
• Slave unit ID: 01 to 31
Send command LON
Response OK,LON
11-4 Multi head mode  Timing OFF command

Send command LOFF
Response OK,LOFF
With the Multi head mode, while the Master unit and Slave units are synchronized,
one reading operation is performed simultaneously and controlled. The timing input  Command to obtain model code and main unit version
instruction is made to the Master unit.
Send command %Tmm–KEYENCE mm: Master/Slave ID (00 to 31)
Read data format  CANCEL command (Cancels operations of the Master unit
and Slave Units.)
In the Multi head mode, the data format differs depending on the data transmission
timing. Send command CANCEL
Number of read data: 2, Data transmission timing: Send

after reading
 Timing chart
• Reading success • Reading error
Timing input
Reading OK
Master (ID0)
operation
Reading OK
Slave (ID1)
operation
Data ERROR
communication
Communication between Master unit and Slave unit
Read data of each ID are sent to the upper level via the Master unit.
E SR-D100 UM 108
12-1 EtherNet/IP  SR-D100 Series EtherNet/IP function overview
The following describes the functions that can control the SR-D100 Series using
EtherNet/IP.
This section describes an overview of EtherNet/IP.
Function Description
Reading instruction Performs reading instructions.
EtherNet/IP Also performs reading end, bank setting reading, etc.
EtherNet/IP is an industrial communications network proposed by ODVA (Open Preset instructions Records successfully read data as preset data.
Also registers or deletes preset data from the PLC.
DeviceNet Vendor Association, Inc.).
EtherNet/IP communication can share the network with normal Ethernet Calibration Performs calibration. Can save calibration results in the set bank.
instructions
communication.
Error-handling Checks the cause of the error that occurred in the main unit, and
 Scanner and adaptor returns the error.
(Example: Buffer overflow check/cancellation)
In EtherNet/IP communication, one device opens a communication line called Main unit status Checks the main unit status (BUSY status).
"connection" to another device. acquisition
The device which opens the connection is called the "scanner" (originator), and the Operation results Acquires read data.
receiving device is called the "adaptor" (target). A PLC is primarily used as the acquisition When set to silent mode, the read data is not updated.
scanner. The SR-D100 becomes the adaptor device. Terminal status Acquires input terminal and output terminal status.
acquisition
Cyclic communication and message communication Main unit reset Displays the SR-D100 Series software reset.
instructions
In EtherNet/IP, there is cyclic communication (Implicit message) that handles
periodic sending and receiving of data, and there is also message communication About the exclusion process
(Explicit message) which handles sending and receiving of commands/responses The SR-D100 Series can simultaneously give control instructions to
arbitrarily. multiple interfaces (I/O terminal, RS-232C, Ethernet Communication
NOTICE
(TCP/IP), EtherNet/IP communication, test key operation). However,
 Cyclic communication when a control instruction is being received from one interface,
In cyclic communication, RPI (communication cycle) can be set according to the instructions from other interfaces cannot be received.
priority of data that is sent and received. Overall communication load adjusted data
can be sent and received.
List of applicable PLC models
PLC
Refer to each PLC instruction manual for the corresponding PLC setting
Communication cycle (RPI) setting
SR-D100 (1): 10 ms EtherNet/IP procedures.
SR-D100 (2): 50 ms
SR-D100 (3): 1000 ms
PLC manufactured by KEYENCE
SR-D100 (1) SR-D100 (2) SR-D100 (3)
RPI = 10 ms RPI = 50 ms RPI = 1000 ms
The communication cycle (RPI) put together in order of priority can be set and network load can be adjusted. KV Series
EtherNet/IP Firmware Version of

 Message communication PLC model
Communication unit version
Software used
software used
In message communication, timing is controlled through commands/responses. KV-3000 KV-EP21V Ver. 2 or later KV STUDIO Ver. 6.0 or later
Scanner adaptor
KV-5000 KV-EP21V Ver. 2 or later
Command Receive KV-5500 -(KV-5500 built-in Ver. 2 or later
Send
port or KV-EP21V)
Process, operation
Receive Response
PLC manufactured by Rockwell Automation
Send
Data
PLC SR-D100
ControlLogix category PLC

SR-D100 Series EtherNet/IP Communication Specifications and Function Overview PLC model
Communication unit version
Software used
software used
1756 ControlLogix 1756-ENBT/1756- Ver. 13 or later RsLogix5000 Ver. 13 or later
 SR-D100 Series EtherNet/IP Communication Specifications EN2T
Number of 1769 -(SR-D100 built-in Ver. 13 or later

16* ConpactLogix port)
connections
Cyclic KEYENCE KV Series 4 to 1444 bytes
communication Rockwell Automation SLC5/05 category PLC
(Implicit message) Communication
ControlLogix 4 to 496 bytes
size EtherNet/IP Firmware Version of
CompactLogix PLC model Software used
Communication unit version software used
OMRON CJ/CS Series 4 to 1436 bytes 1747 SLC5/05 -(SR-D100 built-in OD firmware RsLogix500 Ver. 7.10 or later
Number of port) level Series C,
16*
Message connections FRN 10 or later
communication Applicable 1761/1766 -(SR-D100 built-in Series A,
UCMM (unconnected type), Class 3 (connected
(Explicit Message) messaging MicroLogix port)/1761-NET- Revision A,
type)
methods ENI FRN1
* There is a total of 16 connections in cyclic communication and message 1762/1763/1764 1761-NET-ENI

MicroLogix
communication.
PLC manufactured by Omron

PLC model Software used
Communication unit version software used
SYSMAC CJ2 -(CJ2 built-in port Ver. 1.0 or later CX-One Ver. 3.0 or later
or CJ1W-EIP21)
SYSMAC CJ1 CJ1W-EIP21 Ver. 1.0 or later
SYSMAC CS1 CJ1W-EIP21 Ver. 1.0 or later
109 E SR-D100 UM
12-2 Cyclic communication 2 Communication 2 tab
• Set the PLC communication interface and protocol.
Interface : Ethernet
This section describes the SR-D100 Series cyclic communication setting Protocol : EtherNet/IP
procedures and functions.
SR-D100 Series cyclic communication

When cyclic communication is performed in the SR-D100 Series using EtherNet/IP,
SR-D100 series functions are assigned to the PLC devices. Use the function
allocated to each device according to the intended usage.
IN area OUT area
Reading result Reading result
Handshake information Handshake information

3 PLC communication's EtherNet/IP settings
Click the EtherNet/IP setting button, open the EtherNet/IP setting screen, and
Device status Device status
perform the following settings.
Busy/error information Busy/error information • Input assembly (send)/ : Set "maximum result data size + 44 bytes" or
Statistical information Statistical information Output assembly (receive) size more.
Communication cycle (RPI)
Set with PLC • Data handshake : Put a check on this when performing a
handshake process.
OUT area IN area • Data area byte swap : The storage order of data memory (Read
Reading instruction Reading instruction result data/Preset data) can be changed.
Disable: Writes data in an ascending order.
Handshake instruction Handshake instruction
Enable: Writes data in a descending order.
Calibration Calibration
• Communication settings such as cyclic communication's

communication cycle and data size are performed in the PLC.
When there is a large load in the network which connects many
devices including EtherNet/IP devices, delays or packet loss
NOTICE may occur. Perform a thorough verification before operation.
• When performing EtherNet/IP communication with PLCs (SLC5/
05 MicroLogix Series manufactured by Rockwell, etc.) that do PLC settings
not support cyclic communication, use message
communication.
 About PLC settings
When performing cyclic communication, perform the following settings in the PLC.
Cyclic communication setting procedures (1) Settings for the connection used
(2) Device settings used in cyclic communication
This section describes the setting procedures when performing cyclic
(For setting procedures, refer to the manual of each PLC.)
communication.
* When using the KV Series, making a selection within KV STUDIO will
automatically set (1) and (2).
SR-D100 Series settings
 Connection used
For the SR-D100 Series, use the AutoID Network Navigator and perform the
Open a connection from the scanner using EtherNet/IP during cyclic
following settings.
communication.
There are various types of connections. Usable connections vary depending on the
1 Communication 1 tab device.
• IP address setting Connections that the SR-D100 Series can use are as follows:
• Subnet mask setting Connection type Data type Instance ID Size (byte) RPI (ms)
• Default gateway setting
Result data
Exclusive Owner 0X64(100) 40 to 1400
(Input Assemblies)
(Data transmission + 10 to 10000
Control data
control) 0X65(101) 8 to 1400
(Output Assemblies)
Result data
Input Only 0X64(100) 40 to 1400
(Input Assemblies)
(Data transmission 10 to 10000
Control data
only) 0XFE(254) 0
(Output Assemblies)
• Exclusive Owner
This connection can perform the following communications.
• PLC  SR-D100...... Control instruction
• SR-D100  PLC.............. Data Send
Use this connection to send read data of SR-D100, and also when PLC performs
control instruction to SR-D100 such as start of reading.
Multiple "Exclusive Owner" connections cannot be used for a single unit of SR-
D100.
E SR-D100 UM 110
• Input Only 3 Set the ETHERNET-MODULE as follows:
This connection can perform the following communications.
• SR-D100  PLC.............. Data Send
This connection is used only when sending read data of SR-D100.
Multiple "Input only" connections can be used for a single unit of SR-D100. (Max.
16) (1)
For multiple PLCs to receive data transmission from a single SR-D100, set the
PLCs as follows. (4) (5)
* Each connection's trigger timing is performed through cyclic. The SR-D100
(2) (6) (7)
Series connection type supports both Point to Point and Multicast.
* When using the KV series, the connection names are assigned as follows. (9)
(3) (8)
1: Exclusive Owner result data / control data Class1
2: Input-Only result data Class1(Input-Only)
KV-5500 Series settings

Information regarding connection for KV-5500 and SR-D100 has been prepared.
(1) Name : Optional setting
Download the information from KEYENCE homepage.
(2) Comm Format : Optional setting *1
Control/Compact Logix Series settings (3) IP Address : SR-D100 Series IP address setting
(4) Input (Assembly Instance) : 100 (fixed)… Input the instance ID of result
The following is the procedure for registering the SR-D100 Series in EtherNet/IP data (Input Assemblies) in
decimal number.
communication using Control Logix.
Compact Logix can also be set using the same operation. (5) Input (Size) : SR-D100 Series Input assembly size setting *4
(6) Output (Assembly Instance) : 101 (fixed)… Input the instance ID of control
data (Output Assemblies) in
1 Right-click the EtherNet/IP enabled device on the RSLogix5000 and decimal number.
select New Module. : SR-D100 Series Output assembly size setting
(7) Output (Size) *2*4
(8) Configuration : 1*3

(9) Configuration Size : 0*3
*1 This can be optionally set. However, considering the structure of the assembly
object, it is much easier to program if it set to a format in which 4-byte alignment is
possible.
*2 When operating using Input Only, set (6) to 254 and (7) to 0.
*3 The SR-D100 Series does not use Configuration. However, input the above value
since not doing so will result in an incomplete input error.
*4 Input assembly size for the SR-D100 Series is set in 8 bits (1-byte unit), the size for
RSLogix5000 is set in 32 bits (4-byte unit).
When setting, make sure that the SR-D100 Input assembly size and Output
assembly size are the same or more of the values for (5) and (7).
CJ Series settings
2 Click the Communications' [+] button, select ETHERNET-MODULE 1 Set the PLC network communication.
(Generic Ethernet Module), and click OK. Using the CX-Developper, make the communication settings of PLC's IP
address, etc.
2 Set the EtherNet/IP network configuration for PLC and SR-D100.

Using Network Configurator, set the network configuration.
* The EDS file for SR-D100 is in the EDS folder on disc1 of SR-H3W.
3 Register the transmission area tag and the reception area tag for
PLC.
Right-click the PLC icon on Network Configurator, select [Parameter] – [Edit],
enter the [Edit device parameter] setting screen, and edit the tag.
4 Make the setting to relate the PLC tag with the SR-D100 tag.
Register the device on the [Edit device parameter] setting screen and make the
connection assignment setting.
Transfer the configuration parameters to the PLC to complete the setting.
[Setting example]
Connection I/O type: Class1
Originator device (PLC) Target device (SR-D100)
Input tag set E0_00000 - [500byte]
Output tag set Input_100 - [500byte]
Connection type Multi-cast connection
Output tag set D00000 - [500byte]
Input tag set Output_101 - [500byte]
Connection type Point to Point connection
* For operation details of CX-Developper and Network Configurator, see

"SYSMAC CS/CJ Series EtherNet/IP Unit User's Manual" published by Omron.
111 E SR-D100 UM
Cyclic communication data assignment Parameter details of result data (Input Assemblies)
Data assignment during cyclic communication is performed as follows.
Input Assemblies (Address 0, Bit 0 to Bit 7) Handshake
Result data (Input Assemblies) and error status
Input Assemblies is a device that write responses from the SR-D100 Series to the Address Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
PLC. 0
When using this device, each device function is assigned as follows.
Device status, Result Data, etc. are written to the Input Assemblies. Address Bit Name Description Data contents
This Bit turns ON when either "6
0 : No error
 Input Assemblies memory map (Instance ID: 0x64) 0 0 Error Buffer Overflow Error" or "7
1 : Error
General Error" Bit is ON.
SR-D100  PLC
This Bit is used when using
Read Data
Address Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 handshake.* 0 : No read data
0 1 Update
Read Read This displays whether read data 1 : Read data available
Buffer Available
FILE ERR MODE LOCK TRG General Data Data exists or not.
0 BUSY Overflow Error
BUSY BUSY BUSY BUSY BUSY Error Update Update
Error This Bit is used when using
Complete Available Read Data
handshake.* 01: Result data update
External External 0 2 Update
Preset Data Preset Preset Data Preset This turns ON when read data complete
Instruction Tuning Reading Instruction Tuning Reading Complete
1 Registration Reading Registration Reading update is complete.
Operation Failure Error Operation Complete Complete
Failure Failure Complete Complete
Failure Complete Buffer Overflow This turns ON when buffer 0 : No error
0 6
SAE ISO/ Matching Error overflow error occurs. 1 : Error
AIM DPM OUT3 OUT2 OUT1 IN2 IN1
2 AS9132 IEC15415 Level Unstable
Unstable Status Status Status Status Status This turns ON when errors other
Unstable Unstable Unstable
than buffer overflow error occur.
3 0 : No error
0 7 General Error If this turns ON, the error code is
1 : Error
4 Matching Level output to "Address 16 General
5 ISO/IEC15415 Grade Error Cause".
6 AIM DPM Grade * Handshake is a communication procedure to make the permission system for
7 read data writing.
8 Reading Error Cause
9 Preset Reading Failure Cause
Input Assemblies (Address 0, Bit 8 to Bit 13) BUSY status
10 Preset Data Registration Failure Cause
11 Tuning Failure Cause
Address Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
12
0
13
14
Address Bit Name Description Data contents
15 External Instruction Operation Error Cause
This Bit turns ON when any of the
16 General Error Cause 0 : -
0 8 BUSY following BUSY Bits (9 to 13) is
17 1 : BUSY status
ON.
18 Read Data Ready Count
0 : -
0 9 TRG BUSY TRG BUSY
19 Read Data Update Count 1 : TRG BUSY status
20 0 : -
0 10 LOCK BUSY LOCK BUSY
21 Read Data Size 1 : LOCK BUSY status
22 and
Read Data 0 : -
above 0 11 MODE BUSY MODE BUSY
1 : MODE BUSY status
Gray parts are reserved areas for the system. 0 : -
0 12 ERR BUSY ERR BUSY
1 : ERR BUSY status
Control data (Output Assemblies) 0 13 FILE BUSY FILE BUSY
0 : -
1 : FILE BUSY status
Output Assemblies is a device that write instructions from the PLC to the SR-D100
Series. Input Assemblies (Address 1, Bit 0 to Bit 7) Completion status
When using this device, each device function is assigned as follows.
Output Assemblies performs device control instructions, error clear, handshake
process, etc.
1
 Output Assemblies memory map (Instance ID: 0x65)

PLC  SR-D100
Reading This turns ON when reading is 0 : -
1 0
Address Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Complete complete.*1 1 : Complete*2
Preset Data Preset Error Read Preset
Tuning Reading This turns ON when preset reading 0 : -
Registration Reading Clear Data 1 1 Reading
0 Start
Start Start
Start
Transmission Update is complete. 1 : Complete*2
Request Request Complete
Request Request Buffer Clear Permitted
Preset
External
Instruction Tuning
Preset Data Preset
Reading Data This turns ON when preset data 0 : -
1 2
1 Operation Complete
Registration Reading
Complete Registration registration is complete. 1 : Complete*2
Complete Complete
Complete Clear Clear Complete
Clear Clear
Clear
Tuning This turns ON when tuning is 0 : -
1 3
2 Bank Number Complete complete. 1 : Complete*2
3
This turns ON when "Reading",
External
4 "Preset reading" or "Tuning" is
Instruction 0 : -
1 7 performed with the IN terminal or
5 Preset Data Size Operation 1 : Complete*2
command and the operation is
6 and Complete
above
Preset Data complete.
Gray parts are reserved areas for the system. *1 This Bit also turns ON when the character string of "ERROR" is output when
reading error occurs.
*2 This returns to 0 when turning the applicable clear Bit ON or at next operation.
Important After "1 Preset Reading Complete", "2 Preset Data Registration
Complete" or "3 Tuning Complete", wait 5 seconds or more and
start reading operation. If reading operation starts before 5
seconds elapse, it does not operate normally.
E SR-D100 UM 112
Input Assemblies (Address 1, Bit 8 to Bit 15) Error status Input Assemblies (Address 4 to 6) Total evaluation grade
for matching level and code quality verification function
1
4
5
0 : -
This turns ON when reading error 6
1 8 Reading Error 1 : Reading error,
or comparison NG occurs.
Comparison NG*
Data
Preset This turns ON when preset reading 0 : - Address Bit Name Description Data type
1 9 contents
Reading Failure fails. 1 : Preset reading failure*
Matching Level
Preset
0 : - 4 Matching Level * If multiple codes are read, the 0 to 100 UINT
Data This turns ON when preset data
1 10 1 : Preset data minimum value is output.
Registration registration fails.
registration failure*
Failure 4 : A
3 : B
Tuning 0 : - ISO/IEC15415 Total evaluation grade for ISO/
1 11 This turns ON when tuning fails. 5 2 : C UINT
Failure 1 : Tuning failure* Grade IEC15415 verification
1 : D
External This turns ON when "Reading", 0 : F
0 : -
Instruction "Preset reading" or "Tuning" is
1 15 1 : External instruction 4 : A
Operation performed with the IN terminal or
operation failure* 3 : B
Failure command and the operation fails. AIM DPM Total evaluation grade for ISO/IEC
6 2 : C UINT
Grade TR 29158 (AIM DPM-1-2006)
* If any of the above errors occurs, the error code is output to "Failure cause status 1 : D
0 : F
(Input Assemblies address 8 to 16)".
* Use this status when the code quality verification function of SR-D100 is enabled.
Input Assemblies (Address 2, Bit 0 to Bit 6) Terminal status For the code quality verification function settings, refer to "3-10 Code quality verification function".
Input Assemblies (Address 8 to 16) Failure cause status
2
Address Bit Name Description Data contents 8
This represents IN1 terminal 0 : OFF 9
2 0 IN1 Status
status. 1 : ON 10
This represents IN2 terminal 0 : OFF 11
2 1 IN2 Status
status. 1 : ON
15
This represents OUT1 terminal 0 : OFF 16
2 4 OUT1 Status
status. 1 : ON
This represents OUT2 terminal 0 : OFF Data
2 5 OUT2 Status Address Bit Name Description Data type
status. 1 : ON contents
This represents OUT3 terminal 0 : OFF Reading Error
2 6 OUT3 Status 8 UINT
status. 1 : ON Cause
* The above chart shows the contents when the input polarity setting of the SR- Preset Reading
9 UINT
Failure Cause
D100 is Norm. open (normally open).
For Norm. closed (normally closed), the data is reversed as 0: ON 1: OFF. Preset Data
10 Registration When any of the error statuses UINT
* For assigning functions to terminals, refer to "3-5 Multi I/O". Failure Cause (Input Assemblies Address 1, Bit 8
Error code*
Tuning to Bit 15) turns on, the error code
Input Assemblies (Address 2, Bit 8 to Bit 12) Judgment result 11
Failure Cause is output to the applicable location. UINT
status for matching level and code quality verification function External Instruction
15 Operation UINT
Error Cause
Address Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 General Error
16 UINT
2 Cause
For error codes, refer to List of error codes (Page 114).

This Bit turns ON when any of the
2 8 Unstable following Unstable Bits (9 to 12) is
0 : Stable Input Assemblies (Address 18 to 19) Read data status
1 : Unstable
ON.
Matching Level 0 : Stable Address Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
2 9 Matching level judgment result
Unstable 1 : Unstable
18
ISO/IEC15415 ISO/IEC15415 verification 0 : Stable 19
2 10
Unstable judgment result 1 : Unstable
AIM DPM ISO/IEC TR 29158 (AIM DPM-1- 0 : Stable Data
2 11 Address Bit Name Description Data type
Unstable 2006) verification judgment result 1 : Unstable contents
SAE AS9132 SAE AS9132 Unstable verification 0 : Stable Read Data
2 12 18 Read Data Ready Count 0 to 65535* UINT
Unstable judgment result 1 : Unstable Ready Count
* Use this status when the code quality verification function of SR-D100 is enabled. Read Data
19 Read Data Update Count 0 to 65535* UINT
Update Count
For the code quality verification function settings, refer to "3-10 Code quality
verification function". * When the count number reaches 65535 and the next data arrives, the count number returns to 0.
Input Assemblies (Address 21 or above) Read data
21
22
…
Data
Address Bit Name Description Data type
contents
21 Read Data Size Read data length 0 and above* UINT
22 and
Read Data Read Data Read data* BYTE[]
above
* When the header, terminator and append data are set to the read data of SR-D100, the
header, terminator, append data and inter-delimiter are output. [CR] has been set to the
terminator as the default setting. Accordingly, [CR] is appended after the read data for output.
* If the silent mode is set for SR-D100, read data is not output.
* [NUL]0x00 is appended to the end of result data.
113 E SR-D100 UM
Parameter details of control data (Output Assemblies) Output Assemblies (Address 2) Bank number
Output Assemblies (Address 0, Bit 1 to Bit 7) Address Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
2
Handshake/Clear bit
Data
Address Bit Name Description Data type
contents
0 Input a bank number here and
start reading. Then, reading is
performed with the parameter
Address Bit Name Description Data contents Parameter
bank specified.
bank
This Bit is used when using 2 Bank Number Input a bank number here and UINT
Read Data 01: Writing read data is number:
handshake. start tuning. Then, the tuning result
0 1 Update permitted. 1 to 16*
This displays whether read data is stored to the specified
Permitted 10: - parameter bank.
exists or not.
The following Bits of Input
Assemblies are cleared. * If inputting a parameter bank number other than 1 to 16 to start reading, then the
• Buffer Overflow Error
Error Clear • General Error alternate reading is performed.
0 : No read data * If inputting a parameter bank number other than 1 to 16 to start tuning, then an
0 7 Transmission • Read Result Ready Count
1 : Read data available
Buffer Clear • Result Data Update Count error occurs.
• Read data stored in the
transmission buffer of the SR-
D100 Series Output Assemblies (Address 5 and above) Preset data
Output Assemblies (Address 0, Bit 8 to Bit 11) Reading Address Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
start request/Each operation instruction 5

6
…
0
Data
Address Bit Name Description Data contents Address Bit Name Description Data type
contents
Reading Start The SR-D100 Series starts 01: Reading start Preset Data
0 8
Request reading. *1 10: Reading stop 5
Size
Preset data length 0 and above UINT
Preset Reading 01: Preset reading start 6 and Preset data is specified.
0 9 Preset reading starts. Preset Data Preset data BYTE[]
Start Request 10: Preset reading stop above (Terminator is not necessary.)
Preset Data 01: Preset data
Specified preset data is registered
0 10 Registration registration start
to Address 5, 6 and above.*2
Start Request 10: - List of error codes
Tuning Start 01: Tuning start
0 11 Tuning starts.*3
Request 10: Tuning stop
Error code Type of error Error description
*1 When specifying a bank, specify "Address 2 Bank number" 0 No error -
*2 Preset data can be deleted by setting "1" for Address 5, setting "0xFF" for Values with 100 added to the "Command communication
100 to 199 Command error
Address 6 and then registering the preset data. response error code" (page 9-4) are applicable.
*3 Before starting tuning, specify "Address 2 Bank number". 201 Reading error Reading failed.
If the bank number is illegal, a tuning error occurs. 202 Comparison error The read data did not match the preset data.
The code could not be found within the field of view while
210 Tuning failure
tuning.
Point Exclusive control of reading Start/each operation instruction 213 Tuning failure Tuning was aborted.
For reading Start/each operation instruction, priority is given to Another operation instruction was received during
Operation
the operation performed first. An error will occur if another 120 operation. In this case, the incoming instruction is not
instruction error
operation is performed during operation. performed.
The parameter bank number specification is invalid.
102 Bank number error Example: A number other than 01 to 16 is specified in
tuning operation.
Output Assemblies (Address 1, Bit 0 to Bit 7) Completion The preset data specification is invalid.
220 Preset data error Example: The specified preset data size is invalid when
bit clear preset data is registered.
EIP data update Read data larger than the specified size in the cyclic
230
error communication was received.
1
Cyclic communication operation procedures

Reading
"Reading Complete" Bit of Input
The SR-D100 Series offers two trigger input measurement methods: "Level trigger"
1 0 Complete 01: Bit clear and "One-shot trigger".
Assemblies is cleared.*
Clear
Refer to "4-2 Timing Mode (Page 30)"
Preset Reading "Preset Reading Complete" Bit of
1 1 01: Bit clear
Complete Clear Input Assemblies is cleared.*
This section describes the SR-D100 Series cyclic communication operation
Preset Data "Preset Data Registration
1 2 Registration Complete" Bit of Input Assemblies 01: Bit clear procedures for each trigger input measurement method.
Complete Clear is cleared.* The following timing chart and operation descriptions use Output Assemblies
Tuning "Tuning Complete" Bit of Input "Read Start Request" (Address 0 Bit 8) for read start instruction of the SR-D100
1 3 01: Bit clear
Complete Clear Assemblies is cleared.* Series. The procedure without handshake is used for description.
External
"External Instruction Operation
Instruction
1 7 Complete" Bit of Input Assemblies 01: Bit clear
Operation
is cleared.*
Complete Clear
* When Complete Bits are cleared, Error/Failure Bits of each operation are also
cleared.
E SR-D100 UM 114
Level trigger operation procedure One-shot trigger operation procedure
This section describes the example when the trigger input measurement method of This section describes the example when the trigger input measurement method of
the SR-D100 Series is set to the level trigger. the SR-D100 Series is set to the one-shot trigger.
 Timing chart  Timing chart

The attributes (signal directions) are described using the following directions.
Attribute Signal name When reading successful When reading fails
Iutput Output
: PLC←SR-D100 → Read Request
←
Iutput
Output ← TRG BUSY
→ : PLC→SR-D100
Barcode/2D code One-shot trigger One-shot trigger
Attribute Signal name When reading successful When reading fails Read Complete duration duration
Output Iutput
→ Read Request Read Complete
←
Iutput Output
← TRG BUSY Read Complete Clear
→
Barcode/2D code Iutput
Read Complete ← Reading Error
Iutput Iutput
← Read Complete Reading Error Cause 0 201
←
Output Iutput
→ Read Complete Clear OUT1 Status (OK)*1
←
Iutput Iutput
← Reading Error OUT2 Status (ERROR NG)*1
←
Iutput Iutput
← Reading Error Cause 0 201 Read Data Ready Count*2
← m m+1 m m+1
Iutput Iutput
← OUT1 Status (OK)*1 Read Data Update Count*2 m m+1 m m+1
←
Iutput Iutput
← OUT2 Status (ERROR NG)*1 Read Data and Data Size Read data ERROR
←
Iutput
Read Data Ready Count*2
← m m+1 m m+1
*1 Operations of OUT1 status and OUT2 status are described using the default
Iutput
← Read Data Update Count*2 m m+1 m m+1
settings of the SR-D100 Series operation and multi I/O.
Iutput
← Read Data and Data Size Read data ERROR *2 The read data ready count value and read data update count value may differ
*1 Operations of OUT1 status and OUT2 status are described using the default depending on the operation status and communication frequency.
settings of the SR-D100 Series operation and multi I/O. For example, when a code is read and then the next reading is complete before
*2 The read data ready count value and read data update count value may differ updating the PLC data is complete, the result data ready count value will have
depending on the operation status and communication frequency. one more count value.
For example, when a code is read and then the next reading is complete before
updating the PLC data is complete, the result data load count value will have
 When reading is successful
one more count value. 1 When "Read Request" of PLC turns OFF (0)ON (1), the SR-D100
Series starts reading operation and turns "TRG BUSY" ON (1).
 When reading is successful
1 When "Read Request" of PLC turns OFF (0)ON (1), the SR-D100
2 The SR-D100 Series operates as follows when reading a code within
the specified one-shot time.
• It turns "TRG BUSY" OFF(0) and "Read Complete" ON (1), and then writes
2 The SR-D100 Series operates as follows when reading a code. the read operation result code to "Read Result Code".
• It turns "TRG BUSY" OFF(0) and "Read Complete" ON (1), and then writes • It writes the output data and number of characters of output data to "Result
the reading error cause to "Reading Result". Data" and "Result Data Size".
• It writes the output data and number of characters of output data to "Read * When reading is successful, the reading error cause is "0" (No error).
Data" and "Read Data Size".
* When reading is successful, the reading error cause is "0" (No error).
3 When "Read Complete" of the SR-D100 Series is ON (1), turn "Read
Complete Clear" of PLC ON (1).
4 When "Read Complete Clear" of PLC turns ON (1), the SR-D100
Series turns "Read Complete" OFF (0).
4 When "Read Complete Clear" of PLC turns ON (1), the SR-D100 When "Read Complete" OFF (0) is confirmed, turn "Read Complete
Series turns "Read Complete" OFF (0). When "Read Complete" OFF Clear" of PLC OFF (0).
(0) is confirmed, turn "Read Complete Clear" of PLC OFF (0).
 When reading fails
 When reading fails
1 When "Read Request" of PLC turns OFF (0)ON (1), the SR-D100 Series starts reading operation and turns "TRG BUSY" ON (1).
2 When the one-shot time elapses before the SR-D100 Series read the
2 When "Read Request" of PLC turns OFF (0) before the SR-D100 code, the SR-D100 Series operates as follows.
Series read the code, the SR-D100 Series operates as follows. • It turns "TRG BUSY" OFF (0) and "Read Complete" and "Reading Error" ON
• It turns "TRG BUSY" OFF (0) and "Read Complete" and "Reading Error" ON (1), and then writes the "Reading Error Cause".
(1), and then writes the "Reading Error Cause". • It writes the output data and number of characters of output data to "Read
• It writes the output data and number of characters of output data to "Read Data" and "Read Data Size".
Data" and "Read Data Size". * When reading error occurs, "201" is written to "Reading Error Cause".
* When reading error occurs, "201" is written to "Reading Error Cause".
3 When "Read Complete" of the SR-D100 Series is ON (1), turn "Read Complete Clear" of PLC ON (1).
4 When "Read Complete Clear" of PLC turns ON (1), the SR-D100
4 When "Read Complete Clear" of PLC turns ON (1), the SR-D100 Series turns "Read Complete" and "Reading Error" OFF (0).
Series turns "Read Complete" and "Reading Error" OFF (0). When "Read Complete" OFF (0) is confirmed, turn "Read Complete
When "Read Complete" OFF (0) is confirmed, turn "Read Complete Clear" of PLC OFF (0).
Clear" of PLC OFF (0).
When [Read Request] is turned ON/OFF at high speed while the
NOTICE EtherNet/IP cyclic cycle (RPI) is slow, the change of rising/falling
of [Read Request] may not be transmitted to the SR-D100 Series.
115 E SR-D100 UM
Data processing procedure using the handshake process 8 When "Read Data Update Permitted" of PLC turns OFF (0), the SR-
D100 Series turns "Read Data Update Available" and "Read Data
This section describes the data processing procedure using the handshake Update Complete" OFF (0).
process.
The SR-D100 Series is equipped with the send buffer of 10 KB.
The following procedure is described using the example when the trigger input
Even if the data processing on the PLC is unfinished, the next
measurement method of the SR-D100 Series is set to the level signal trigger.
reading operation is possible. (Operations 1 to 5 are possible.)
When the next result data is ready on the SR-D100 Series, even if
 Timing chart
"Read Data Update Permitted" of PLC changes ON (1)  OFF(0),
NOTICE "Read Data Update Available" of the SR-D100 Series maintains
Attribute Signal name When reading successful When reading failed
Output ON (1) status without changing to OFF (0).
→ Read Request
Iutput
Repeat turning "Read Data Update Permitted" of PLC ON (1)/OFF (0)
← TRG BUSY
until "Read Data Update Available" turns OFF (0). Or, send the
Barcode/2D code
Read Complete transmission buffer clear command (BCLR) from the command port
Iutput
← Read Complete and delete data in the transmission buffer.
Output
→ Read Complete Clear
12-3
Iutput
Reading Error
Message Communication
←
Iutput
← Reading Error Cause 0 201
Iutput
← Read Data Update Available
Output
→
Read Data Update Permitted
This section describes how to use message communication.
Iutput Read Data Update Complete
←
Iutput OUT1 Status (OK)*1
←
Iutput OUT2 Status (ERROR NG)*1
Message communication (Explicit message)
←
Iutput Read Data Ready Count *2
←
Message communication overview
m m+1 m m+1
Iutput Read Data Update Count*2 m m+1 m m+1

←
Iutput Read Data and Data Size
← Read data ERROR
Message communication is a function that uses objects and services (Service
*1 Operations of OUT1 status and OUT2 status are described using the default Code) prepared in the EtherNet/IP device and then issues and transmits
settings of the SR-D100 Series operation and multi I/O. commands arbitrarily. Message communication is used for applications such as
*2 The read data ready count value and read data update count value may differ reading and writing adaptor device settings.
depending on the operation status and communication frequency. There are established standard items, as well as device specific items in the
For example, when a code is read and then the next reading is complete before objects and services in message communication.
updating the PLC data is complete, the result data ready count value will have The SR-D100 Series uses specific objects and services and can perform
one more count value. operations such as parameter reading/writing and resetting.
 Data processing flow Reference The SR-D100 Series message communication function is compatible
with UCMM (unconnected type) and CLASS 3 (connected type).
Series starts reading operation and turns "TRG BUSY" ON (1). Objects and services
2 The SR-D100 Series operates as follows when reading a code.
In message communication, data are sent and received using objects and
• It turns "TRG BUSY" OFF (0) and "Read Complete" ON (1), and then writes
services.
the read operation result code to "Read Result Code".
When services for SR-D100 Series objects are executed, data output, settings
• It turns "Read Data Update Available" ON (1).
reading, and specified operations are executed.
* When reading is successful, the reading error cause is "0" (No error).

Message communication basic format and process flow
4 When "Read Complete Clear" of PLC turns ON (1), the SR-D100 During message communication, the EtherNet/IP scanner and the SR-D100 Series
communicate by sending and receiving Explicit messages. The following shows a
Series turns "Read Complete" OFF (0).
basic example of sent Explicit message command formats and response formats
When "Read Complete" OFF (0) is confirmed, turn "Read Complete
returned from the SR-D100 Series.
Clear" of PLC OFF (0).
5 If "Read Data Update Available" of the SR-D100 Series is ON (1), turn Commands
"Read Data Update Permitted" ON (1).
The following are the command formats sent from the EtherNet/IP scanner to the
6 When "Read Data Update Permitted" of PLC turns ON (1), the SR- SR-D100 Series.
D100 Series operates as follows.
• It turns "Read Data Update Complete" ON (1).  Command formats
• It writes the read data and read data length to "Read Data" and "Read Data
Size". Item Description
(If append data has been set, the append data and delimiter are also Service code Specifies the Service.
included.) Class ID Specifies the Class ID according to service.
7 When "Read Data Update Complete" of the SR-D100 Series turns ON

Instance ID
Attribute ID
Specifies the Instance ID according to service.
Specifies the Attribute ID according to service.
(1), process the obtained result data on PLC and turn "Read Data
Service data Specifies the Service Data according to service.
Update Permitted" OFF (0).
E SR-D100 UM 116
Responses 2 Communication 2 tab
Set the PLC port interface and protocol.
The following are the response formats sent from the SR-D100 Series to the • Interface : Ethernet
EtherNet/IP scanner. • Protocol : EtherNet/IP
 Response formats
Item Description
General status Returns the General Status in response to the command.
(1 byte) Returns 00H when operation is successful.
Additional status
Returns Additional Status.
(2 bytes)
Service response Returns the result data in response to the command.
Message communication operation
Operation of the SR-D100 Series

This section introduces some operations that are available when using message
communication.
3 PLC port's EtherNet/IP settings
Click the "EtherNet/IP setting" button, open the EtherNet/IP setting screen, and
perform the following settings.
Command sending
• Data handshake : Put a check on this when performing a
handshake process.
Response sending • Input assembly (send)/ : Set to maximum read data size + 44 bytes
Output assembly (receive) size or more.
• Data area byte swap : Specify the byte swap for the result data
area and user data area.
Commands are sent from the scanner to execute services for the SR-D100 Series. Disable : Retrieves data in an ascending
The SR-D100 Series sends back a response as a service execution result. order.
The service code, class ID, instance ID, and attribute ID is specified in the Enable : Retrieves data in a descending
command and then sent. order.
The setting value (service data) is necessary when writing parameters.
Command Response
Service code General status
Class ID Additional status
Instance ID Service response data
Attribute ID
Service data
* The attribute ID and service data may not be necessary depending on the
command used.
Point The storage order of the data memory can be changed by
Service response data may not be generated depending on the command used.
changing the availability of the data area's byte swap. By using
this function, storing data is made possible so that program
Message communication setting procedure processing can be performed easily for PLC data memories of
various brands.
This section describes the setting procedure when performing message
communication with the SR-D100 Series.
SR-D100 Series settings SR-D100 Series object configuration

 SR-D100 Series settings Objects that the SR-D100 Series can use are as follows:
1 Communication 1 tab  Object configuration

• IP address setting
• Subnet mask setting Reference
Class ID Object name Description
page
• Default gateway setting
105 SR AutoID Reader Object which delivers the SR-D100 Series 118
(0x69) Object* status and parameter writing/reading. Page
1 Object which delivers general information, 119
Identity Object
(0x01) main unit reset, etc. Page
* The SR AutoID Reader Object is not an object within EtherNet/IP standards but
rather it is an object that KEYENCE developed to make the SR-D100 Series easier
to operate.
117 E SR-D100 UM
How to decipher the SR-D100 Series object table SR-D100 Series Object Details
This section describes the SR-D100 Series object configuration.
Reading the object table (attribute)
SR AutoID Reader Object (Class ID: 105 (0x69))
(1) (2) (3) (4)
Response parameter This object delivers the SR-D100 Series connected status and device writing/
Instance Attribute
Name Data reading.
ID ID Description
Type This is an object specific to the SR-D100 Series.
bit0: IN1 Status
bit1: IN2 Status  Attributes
1 108 IN/OUT
UINT bit4: OUT1 Status
(0x01) (0x6C) Status The SR AutoID Reader Object supports the following attributes.
bit5: OUT2 Status
bit6: OUT3 Status Instance Attribute Response parameter
Name
ID ID Data Description
Item Description bit0 : Error
(1) Instance ID The instance ID is shown in decimal (hexadecimal). bit1 : Result Data Available
(2) Attribute ID The attribute ID is shown in decimal (hexadecimal). bit2 : Result Data Strobe
bit3 to 5 : Reserved
(3) Name Denotes the attribute name.
bit6 : Buffer Overflow Error
(4) Response Displays the receiving parameter's data type and each parameters bit7 : General Error
parameter description. UINT bit8 : BUSY
bit9 : TRG BUSY
Reading the object table (service) bit10 : LOCK BUSY
bit11 : MODE BUSY
100 bit12 : ERR BUSY
Read Status
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (0x64) bit13 : FILE BUSY
Service data
Instance Service bit0 : Read Complete
Data Name Description UINT
ID code Data bit1 : Read Failure
type
bit0 : Unstable
1 Bank Read bit1 : Matching Level Unstable
0x4B UINT Starts reading.
(0x01) Number Start UINT bit2 : ISO/IEC 15415 Unstable
bit3 : AIM DPM Unstable
Item Description bit4 : SAE AS9132 Unstable
(1) Instance ID The instance ID is shown in decimal (hexadecimal). UINT Read Result Code
(2) Service code The service code is shown in decimal (hexadecimal). bit0 : Error
bit1 : Result Data Available
(3) Service data Displays the type of the service data and service data description.
bit2 : Result Data Strobe
(4) Name Displays the service name. bit3 to 5 : Reserved
(5) Description Displays the service function description. bit6 : Buffer Overflow Error
bit7 : General Error
Data type UINT bit8 : BUSY
bit9 : TRG BUSY
bit10 : LOCK BUSY
The data types are defined as follows. 101
Preset Status bit11 : MODE BUSY
(0x65)
Range bit12 : ERR BUSY
Data type Description bit13 : FILE BUSY
Min. Max.
BOOL Boolean 0: FALSE 1: TRUE
bit0 : Preset Complete
SINT Short integer -128 127
UINT bit1 : Preset Failure
INT Integer -32768 32767 bit2 to 15 : Reserved
1
DINT Double precision integer -231 231-1 UINT Reserved
(0x01)
LINT Long integer -263 263-1 UINT Preset Result Code
USINT Unsigned short integer 0 255 bit0 : Error
UINT Unsigned integer 0 65535 bit1 : Result Data Available
UDINT Unsigned double precision integer 0 232-1 bit2 : Result Data Strobe
ULINT Unsigned long integer 0 264-1
String String (1 byte/character) - - bit7 : General Error
SSTRING String (1 byte/character) - - UINT bit8 : BUSY
BYTE Bit sequence: 8-bit - - bit9 : TRG BUSY
bit10 : LOCK BUSY
WORD Bit sequence: 16-bit - - 102 Register Preset
bit11 : MODE BUSY
(0x66) Data Status
DWORD Bit sequence: 32-bit - - bit12 : ERR BUSY
LWORD Bit sequence: 64-bit - - bit13 : FILE BUSY
bit0 : Register Preset Data Complete
UINT bit1 : Register Preset Data Failure
UINT Reserved
UINT Register Preset Data Result Code
bit0 : Error
bit1 : Result Data Available
bit2 : Result Data Strobe
UINT
bit8 : BUSY
bit9 : TRG BUSY
103 bit10 : LOCK BUSY
Tune Status
(0x67) bit11 : MODE BUSY
bit12 : ERR BUSY
bit13 : FILE BUSY
bit0 : Tune Complete
UINT bit1 : Tune Failure
UINT Reserved
UINT Tune Result Code
E SR-D100 UM 118
Instance Attribute Response parameter  Service
Name
ID ID Data Description The SR AutoID Reader Object supports the following services.
bit0 : Error
Instance Service Service data
bit1 : Result Data Available Name Description
bit2 : Result Data Strobe ID code Data type: Data
bit3 to 5 : Reserved 14 Get_Attribute
- Obtains the attribute's one item.
bit6 : Buffer Overflow Error (0x0E) _Single
UINT 16 Set_Attribute_
bit8 : BUSY - Obtains the attribute's one item.
(0x10) Single
bit9 : TRG BUSY
75 UINT: Bank
bit10 : LOCK BUSY Read Start Starts reading.
(0x4B) Number
bit11 : MODE BUSY
107 EXT. Request bit12 : ERR BUSY 76
- Read Stop Stops reading.
(0x6B) Status bit13 : FILE BUSY (0x4C)
bit0 : EXT. Request Complete 77
- Preset Start Starts preset data reading.
UINT bit1 : EXT. Request Failure (0x4D)
bit2 to 15 : Reserved 78
- Preset Stop Stops preset data reading.
bit0 : Unstable (0x4E)
bit1 : Matching Level Unstable UINT: Preset
Registers preset data.
UINT bit2 : ISO/IEC 15415 Unstable 79 Data Size Register
Preset data can be deleted when Size is
bit3 : AIM DPM Unstable (0x4F) BYTE[]: Preset Data
bit4 : SAE AS9132 Unstable (1) and Data is (0xFF).
Preset Data
UINT EXT. Request Result Code 80
- Tune Start Starts calibration.
bit0 : IN1 Status (0x50)
bit1 : IN2 Status 81
bit2 to 3 : Reserved - Tune Stop Stops calibration.
(0x51)
108
IN/OUT Status UINT bit4 : OUT1 Status
(0x6C) 83
bit5 : OUT2 Status - Error Clear Clears the error.
1 (0x53)
bit6 : OUT3 Status
(0x01) EXT. Request
bit7 to 15 : Reserved 84 Clears the operation status from the
- Complete
UINT Read (Comparison) OK Count (0x54) external command.
Clear
UINT Comparison NG Count Acquires read data.
1
109 UINT Read Error Count
Statistics (0x01) UINT: Result
(0x6D) UINT Stable Reading Count 85 Get Result Response data
Data Size
(0x55) Data UINT : Result Data Size
UINT Read Input Count UINT: Offset
UINT : Rest Result Data Size
UINT Reserved BYTE[] : Result Data
110 UINT Result Data Ready Count
Result Data Count Clears the following information:
(0x6E) UINT Result Data Update Count • Result Data Ready Count
111 86 Sequence • Result Data Update Count
General Error Code UINT General Error Code -
(0x6F) (0x56) Reset • Main unit statistical information
• Buffering data
112 Read (Comparison)
UINT Read (Comparison) OK Count • Sequence bit
(0x70) OK Count
87
113 Comparison NG - Lock Sets the operation lock command.
UINT Comparison NG Count (0x57)
(0x71) Count
88
114 - Unlock Sets the operation unlock command.
Read Error Count UINT Read Error Count (0x58)
(0x72)
Read
116 90 Clears the Read Complete and Read
Read Input Count UINT Read Input Count - Complete
(0x74) (0x5A) Failure bits.
Clear
128 Result Data Ready
UINT Result Data Ready Count Preset
(0x80) Count 91 Clears the Preset Complete and Preset
- Complete
129 Result Data Update (0x5B) Failure bits.
UINT Result Data Update Count Clear
(0x81) Count
Register
Clears the Register Preset Data
92 Preset Data
Instance Service Attribute Response parameter - Complete and Register Preset Data
Name (0x5C) Complete
ID code ID Failure bits.
Data Description Clear
bit0 : Matching Level Tune
Inspect Valid 93 Clears the Tune Complete and Tune
- Complete
(0x5D) Failure bits.
Get_ bit1 : ISO/IEC15415 Clear
Attribute_ Inspect Valid
144 Unstable Inspect
Single
(0x90) Configuration
UINT bit2 : AIM DPM Identity Object (Class ID: 1 (0x01))
14 Inspect Valid
(0x0E) bit3 : SAE AS9132
Inspect Valid This object is used to acquire equipment information.
bit4 to 7 : Reserve The SR-D100 Series offers the hardware reset service.
145 Matching Level
1 Set_ (0x91) Threshold
UINT 99 to 00  Service
(0x01) Attribute_
146 ISO/IEC15415 0: Disabled The Identity Object supports the following services.
Single UINT
(0x92) Threshold 1(D) to A(4)
16 Service data
147 AIM DPM 0: Disabled Instance Service
(0x10) UINT Name Description
ID code Data type Data
(0x93) Threshold 1(D) to A(4)
152 1 5
Get_ Matching Level UINT 100 to 00 - - Reset Performs hardware reset.
(0x98) (0x01) (0x05)
Attribute_
153 ISO/IEC15415
Single UINT 4(A) to 0(F)
(0x99) Grade
14
(0x0E) 154
AIM DPM Grade UINT 4(A) to 0(F)
(0x9A)
119 E SR-D100 UM
SR-D100 Series typical operation examples (8) Get result data
Acquires the SR-D100 Series operation results.
(1) Start reading (Read Start) Command details Response details (normal termination)
Gives the command to start reading for the SR-D100 Series. Class ID : 105 (0x69) General status : None
Command details Response details (normal termination) Instance ID :1 Additional status : None
Service code : 85 (0x55) Service data
Class ID : 105 (0x69) General status : None
Attribute ID : None UINT : Result Data Size
Instance ID :1 Additional status : None
Service data UINT : Rest Result Data Size
Service code : 75 (0x4B) Service data : None
UINT : Data size BYTE[] : Result Data
Attribute ID : None
UINT : Offset
Service data
UINT : Bank No. (9) Get attribute (Get_Attribute_Single)
(2) Stop reading (Read Stop) Acquires the SR-D100 Series attribute value.
Gives the command to stop reading for the SR-D100 Series. Command details Response details (normal termination)
Command details Response details (normal termination) Class ID : Class ID General status : None
Instance ID : Instance ID Additional status : None
Service code : 14 (0x0E) Service data : Attribute parameter
*Get_Attribute_Single
Service code : 76 (0x4C) Service data : None
Attribute ID : Attribute ID
Attribute ID : None
Service data : None
Service data : None
12-4
(3) Preset reading start (Preset start)
Gives the command to start preset reading for the SR-D100 Series.
Command details Response details (normal termination)
Reference Program
This section introduces a reference program when performing communication
Service code : 77 (0x4D) Service data : None using EtherNet/IP on the SR-D100 Series.
Attribute ID : None
Service data : None
Reference Program
(4) Preset reading stop (Preset Stop)
Gives the command to stop preset reading for the SR-D100 Series. This section introduces a reference program when performing communication
using EtherNet/IP on the SR-D100 Series.
Command details Response details (normal termination) During actual operation, perform programming while taking error processing into
Class ID : 105 (0x69) General status : None account.
Service code : 78 (0x4E) Service data : None
Attribute ID : None
[Cyclic communication] without handshake
Service data : None
This is a reference program when using the setting without handshake in EtherNet/
(5) Preset data registration IP setting on AutoID Network Navigator.
Performs the preset data registration command for the SR-D100 Series.
 For the KV Series
Reference program chart
Instance ID :1 Additional status : None (O) : Output Assemblies
Service code : 79 (0x4F) Service data : None (I) : Input Assemblies
Attribute ID : None REQ
(O) Read Request
Service data
Row 1
UINT : Data size
BYTE[494] : Data
(I) Read Complete BMOV
* Sets the data size to 1 and the data to 0xFF. If sent, preset data can be cleared. WOE DM1000 #100
Row 2 ↑ Result Data
(6) Calibration instructions

Gives the command to start reading for the SR-D100 Series.
Command details Response details (normal termination) (I) Read Complete
(O) Read Complete Clear
Class ID : 105 (0x69) General status : None Row 3
Service code : 80 (0x50) Service data : None
Attribute ID : None Description of the reference program
Service data
UINT : Bank No. Row 1 : This starts Read Request and starts reading.
Row 2 : When Result Complete is ON, the data written to Result Data are
(7) Stop calibration copied to DM1000.
Gives the command to stop reading for the SR-D100 Series. Row 3 : When Read Complete is ON, Read Complete Clear turns ON.
Service code : 81 (0x51) Service data : None
Attribute ID : None
Service data : None
E SR-D100 UM 120
 For the Control Logix/Compact Logix (RSLogix 5000)  For the Control Logix/Compact Logix (RSLogix 5000)
Description of tags used in the sample Description of tags used in the sample
Name Data type Description Name Data type Description
REQ BOOL Bit to order to start/stop reading REQ BOOL Bit to order to start/stop reading
READ_DATA SINT[256] Memory to store read data READ_DATA SINT[256] Memory to store read data
Reference program chart Reference program chart

(O) : Output Assemblies
(I) : Input Assemblies
(I) : Input Assemblies
REQ
REQ (O) Read Request
(O) Read Request Rung1 ( )
Rung1 ( )
(I) Read Data Reception Available (I) Read data Reception Complete
(O) Read Data Update Permitted
(I) Read Complete
Source (I)Result Data[0] Rung2 / ( )
Rung2 ONS Dest READ_DATA[0]
Length (I)Result Data Size (O) Read Data Update Permitted
(O) Read Complete

Rung3 ( ) (I) Read data Reception Complete
Source (I) Read Data [0]
Rung3 ONS
Dest READ_DATA[0]
Description of the reference program Length (I) Read Data Size
Rung1 : This starts Read Request and starts reading. (I) Read Complete
Rung2 : With the rising of Result Complete, the data written to Result Data are Rung4 ( )
copied to READ_DATA.
Rung3 : When Read Complete is ON, Read Complete Clear turns ON.
[Cyclic communication] with handshake

Description of the reference program
This is a reference program to start/stop reading or load data by using the cyclic Rung1 : When the timing (REQ) signal turns ON, Read Start Request turns ON.
communication with handshake. Rung2 : When Read Data Reception Available turns ON and Read Data
Reception Complete turns OFF, Read Data Update Permitted turns ON.
 For the KV Series Read Data Update Permitted is self-retained.
Reference program chart * Read Data Reception Available turns ON when read data is buffered
to SR-D100.
(I) : Input Assemblies Rung3 : When Read Data Reception Complete turns ON, read data is
REQ transferred to READ_DATA.
(I) Read Request
Row 1
* Read Data Reception Complete turns ON when writing read data from
SR-D100 to PLC is complete.
Rung4 : When Read Complete is ON, Read Complete Clear turns ON.
(I) Read Data Reception Available (I) Read Data Reception Available (O) Read Data Update Permitted
Row 2 [Message communication] with handshake
(O) Read Data Update Permitted This is a reference program to start/stop reading or load data in message
communication.
BMOV
 For the Micro Logix (RSLogix 500)
(I) Read data Reception Complete
Row 3 ↑
WOE DM1000 #100 Description of tags used in the sample
Name Data type Description
(I) Read Complete B9:0/0 Binary Bit to order to start/stop reading
Row 4 T10 Timer Timer
N11 Integer Memory that stores Bank No.
MG20 Message to perform Read Complete Clear
Description of the reference program MG21 Message to perform Read Start
Row 1 : When the timing (REQ) signal turns ON, Read Request turns ON. Message to perform Get Attribute Single for Read
MG22 Message
Row 2 : When Read Data Reception Available turns ON and Read Data Status
Reception Complete turns OFF, Read Data Update Permitted turns ON. MG23 Message to perform Get Result Data
Read Data Update Permitted is self-retained. MG24 Message to perform Read Stop
* Read Data Reception Available turns ON when read data is buffered
Memory that stores Get Attribute Single result of
to SR-D100. N25 Integer
MG22
Row 3 : When Read Data Reception Complete turns ON, the data for the
N26 Integer Message command to receive the result data
specified bytes are transferred from read data to DM1000.
N27 Integer Memory that stores Get Result Data result of MG23
* Read Data Reception Complete turns ON when writing read data from
RIX30 Extended Routing Information for MG20
SR-D100 to PLC is complete.
Row 4 : When Read Complete is ON, Read Complete Clear turns ON. RIX31 Extended Extended Routing Information for MG21
RIX32 Routing Extended Routing Information for MG22
RIX33 Information Extended Routing Information for MG23
RIX34 Extended Routing Information for MG24
121 E SR-D100 UM
Reference program chart [Message communication] Buffer Overflow Error and
B9:0/0 N25:1/0 N25:1/1
MSG
Communication Command CIP Generic
General Error occurred.
Size in byte(Receive) 0
Rung1 ONS / / Data Table Address(Receive) - ( EN )
Size in byte(Send) 2 This is a reference program to disable Buffer Overflow Error and General Error
( DN )
Data Table Address(Send)
Service
N11
Custom
using the message communication.
Service Code 4b(Hex) ( ER )
Class
Instance
69(Hex)
1  For the KV Series
Attribute 0
MSG(MG22)
T10:1/DN Communication Command CIP Generic REQ
Size in byte(Receive) 8 ' Data are stored using the box script.
Rung2 ONS Data Table Address(Receive) N25 ( EN ) ↑
Size in byte(Send) 0
' Data can also be stored with the MOV command.
Data Table Address(Send) - ( DN )
Service Get Attribute DM0 = 192 ' IP address the first byte (arbitrary)
Single Service Code ( ER ) DM1 = 168 ' IP address the second byte (arbitrary)
E(Hex)
Class 69(Hex) DM2 = 100 ' IP address the third byte (arbitrary)
Instance 1 DM3 = 100 ' IP address the fourth byte (arbitrary)
Attribute 64 DM4 = 83 ' service cord (0x53)
Timer DM5 = 105 ' class ID (0x69)
( U ) DM6 = 1 ' instance ID (0x01)
DM7 = 0 ' attribute ID (0x00)
MSG(MG23) DM100 = 0 ' Sent data in message communication
N25:1/0 Communication Command CIP Generic
Size in byte(Receive) 100 R30700 R31700
Rung3 ONS Data Table Address(Receive) N27 ( EN ) Message communication Message communication
Size in byte(Send) 4 REQ start request complete
Data Table Address(Send) N26 ( DN ) U_MSGTO KV-5500
N25:1/1
Service Custom ↑ Message
Service Code 55(Hex) ( ER ) Unit No. communication
Class 69(Hex)
Instance 1 #0 DM0
Attribute 0 R30700
U_MSGTO KV-5500
Message
Unit No. communication
#0 DM100
MSG(MG20)
MG23:0/DN Communication Command CIP Generic R30700
Size in byte(Receive) 0 Message communication
Rung4 ONS Data Table Address(Receive) - ( EN ) start request
Service Custom
Service Code 5A(Hex) ( ER )
Class 69(Hex)
Instance
Attribute
1
0
 For the Control Logix/Compact Logix (RSLogix 5000)
MSG (MG24) MSG
B9:0/1 Communication Command CIP Generic
Size in byte(Receive) 0 Service Type Custom
Rung5 ONS Data Table Address(Receive) - ( EN ) Service Code 53(Hex)
ONS ( EN )
Size in byte(Send) 0 Class 69(Hex)
Data Table Address(Send) - ( DN ) Instance 1
Service Custom Attribute 0 ( DN )
Service Code 4C(Hex) ( ER ) Source Element -
Class 69(Hex) Source Length - ( ER )
Instance 1 Destination -
Attribute 0
TON
Rung6 Timer T10:1

Time Base 0.01
Preset 100 ( DN )  For the Micro Logix (RSLogix 500)
Description of the reference program
MSG
Rung1 : When Read Complete and Read Failure are OFF, the read start Communication Command CIP Generic
message is sent at the rising of B9:0:0. ONS
( EN )
Data Table Address(Receive) -
Rung2 : For each timeout of the timer, Get Attribute Single is performed for Read Size in byte(Send) 0
Status. Data Table Address(Send)
Service
-
Custom
( DN )
The result is written to Read Status Res. Service Code 53(Hex) ( ER )

Class 69(Hex)
Rung3 : At the rising of either Result Status Res[1].0(Read Complete) or 1(Read Instance 1
Failure), Get Result Data is performed. Attribute 0
The result is written to Read Data Res.

Rung4 : Read Complete Clear is performed.
Point With this operation, the Error Clear operation is performed for the
Rung5 : This starts B9:0/1 and sends the read end message.
Rung6 : The timer is being performed to perform Rung2. SR-D100.
Buffer Overflow Error and General Error are cleared, and the result
data within Result Data Available, Result Data Strobe and SR-D100
are cleared.
When performing using the cyclic communication, the operation
will become the same by setting the Error Clear bit to ON.
E SR-D100 UM 122
[Message communication] Hardware reset processing
This is a reference program for hardware reset (restart) in message
communication.
 For the KV Series

R30700
Message communication
REQ start request
' Data are stored using the box script.
↑
' Data can also be stored with the MOV command.
DM0 = 192 ' IP address the first byte (arbitrary)

DM1 = 168 ' IP address the second byte (arbitrary)
DM2 = 100 ' IP address the third byte (arbitrary)
DM3 = 100 ' IP address the fourth byte (arbitrary)
DM4 = 5 ' service cord (0x05)
DM5 = 1 ' class ID (0x01)
DM6 = 1 ' instance ID (0x01)
DM7 = 0 ' attribute ID (0x00)
DM100 = 0 ' Sent data in message communication
R30700 R31700
Message communication Message communication
REQ start request complete
U_MSGTO KV-5500
↑ Message
#0 DM0
R30700
U_MSGTO KV-5500
Message
#0 DM100
R30700
Message communication
start request
 For the Control Logix/Compact Logix (RSLogix 5000)

MSG
Service Type Custom

ONS Service Code 5(Hex) ( EN )
Class 1(Hex)
Instance 1
( DN )
Attribute 0
Source Element -
Source Length - ( ER )
Destination -
 For the Micro Logix (RSLogix 500)

MSG
Communication Command CIP Generic
ONS ( EN )
Data Table Address(Receive) -
Service Custom
Service Code 5(Hex) ( ER )
Class 1(Hex)
Instance 1
Attribute 0
Point
With this operation, the software reset operation can be performed
for the SR-D100.
This operation returns the SR-D100 Series to the state when the
power is turned on.
This operation cannot be performed in cyclic communication.
123 E SR-D100 UM
13-1 PROFINET PROFINET device naming rule
1. PROFINET device name length: 1 to 240 characters
PROFINET is the open communication standard specified by PI (PROFIBUS & 2. 1 label length: 1 to 63 characters
PROFINET International). PROFINET compatible devices can communicate 3. Only [a to z] (alphabet lower case) [0 to 9] (numbers), [-] (hyphen), [.] (period)
regardless of vendor. The SR-D100 Series is compliant with Conformance Class A. can be used for a device name.
Also, the SR-D100 Series supports cyclic communication. 4. [-] (hyphen) cannot be used at the beginning of the label.
5. [-] (hyphen) cannot be used at the end of the label.
Cyclic communication 6. port-xyz, port-xyz-abcde cannot be the name of the first label.
a, b, c, d, e, x, y, z means [0 to 9] (numbers)
Cyclic communication enables high-speed control at several ms to several tens of 7. Device names cannot be made in the IP address format (n.n.n.n n=0,…,999).
ms intervals by communicating at update time interval. The SR-D100 Series can 8. Labels cannot start with xn-.
be controlled by referring to and updating variables or devices within PLC without 9. The first character of labels cannot be a number.
considering communication. This makes programs on the PLC side simpler.
Important When controlling the SR-D100 Series, set the update time of cyclic
communication to 8 ms or longer.
13-2 Cyclic communication
When cyclic communication is performed in the SR-D100 Series using PROFINET,
SR-D100 series functions are assigned to the PLC devices. Use the function
SR-D100 Series PROFINET function overview allocated to each device according to the intended usage.
Function Description
Controls timing input ON/OFF.
Timing input control
Timing input with the parameter bank specified is possible.
SIMATIC
S7-300
Read OK data can be set as preset data.

Preset data control
Also, preset data can be registered or deleted from PLC.
Tuning Tuning can be performed by specifying the parameter bank. SR information area SR information area
Data handshake Whether to write read data to PLC can be controlled. Reading result Reading result
Errors that occurred on the main unit can be checked.
Handshake information Handshake information
Error handling After eliminating error factors, the SR-D100 Series can be restored from
the error state. Device status Device status
Statistical Busy/error information Busy/error information

information Read count and read data update count can be checked.
acquisition Statistical information Statistical information
Communication cycle
Set with PLC
Operation status Read data can be acquired, and I/O status or marking verification result
acquisition can be checked.
PLC instruction area PLC instruction area
Reading instruction Reading instruction

Important Maximum read length is 246 digits.
Handshake instruction Handshake instruction
Tuning Tuning
Operation flow to start PROFINET communication
(1) Check specifications. Important Communication settings such as cyclic communication's

• Check if the PLC to be connected is compatible with PROFINET connection. communication cycle and data size are performed in the PLC.
• Check the input and output data allocation status. When there is a large load in the network which connects many
devices including PROFINET devices, delays or packet loss may
(2) Make the PROFINET communication setting for the SR-D100 Series.
occur. Perform thorough verification before operation.
Make this setting for PROFINET connection of SR-D100 Series.
Setting items: IP address, subnet mask, default gateway, PROFINET
communication enable/disable, PROFINET device name, data
handshake enable/disable
SR information area
Important Set the PROFINET device name avoiding the same device name The SR information area is divided into areas as follows.
within the network.
The PROFINET communication cannot be made with the Bit area
temporary IP address set for the SR-D100 Series. Be sure to set
the IP address. In the following areas, information is divided by bit.
When "Send Configuration" is performed after setting Information is represented with 0 or 1.
PROFINET for the SR-D100 Series, the SR-D100 Series main
Module Bit
unit restarts. Slot Size
name address
Name Description Data contents Remarks
0 : No error
0 Error Error status indication
1 : Error
(3) Establish PROFINET communication. Read data
0 : No read data * Only when data
When registering the SR-D100 information to PLC, use the GSDML file of SR- 1
Result Data Transmission buffer
1 : Read data handshake is
Available retention status
D100. indication
available enabled
(4) Perform necessary tasks. Read data

01: Read data
update
2 Result Data Strobe PLC update complete
complete
Handshake flag
10: -
List of applicable PLC models 1 1 byte
and General
3 (Reserved) Reserved area
Error Status
Bits 4 (Reserved) Reserved area
Siemens PLC 5 (Reserved) Reserved area
Buffer overflow error
Buffer Overflow 0 : No error
6 Cleared by Error
PLC series Software used Version of software used Error 1 : Error
Clear Bit
S7-300 STEP 7 V5.5.0.0 and later versions SR operation failure
error 0 : No error
S7-400 STEP 7 V5.5.0.0 and later versions 7 General Error
Cleared by Error 1 : Error
S7-1200 STEP 7 Basic Version V11Update 1 Clear Bit
E SR-D100 UM 124
Module Bit Module Bit
Slot Size Name Description Data contents Remarks Slot Size Name Description Data contents Remarks
name address name address
OR of each BUSY 0 : No BUSY status Unstable reading
0 BUSY 0 : Stable
signal 1 : BUSY status 0 Unstable status
1 : Unstable
OR of each Unstable
0 : No TRG BUSY
Main unit in TRG
1 TRG BUSY status Matching level
BUSY status Matching Level 0 : Stable
1 : TRG BUSY status 1 judgment result
unstable
0 : No LOCK BUSY
Main unit in LOCK status ISO/IEC 15415
2 LOCK BUSY ISO/IEC 15415 0 : Stable
BUSY status 1 : LOCK BUSY 2 verification result
status unstable
Unstable
0 : No MODE BUSY 6 1 byte Read Status ISO/IEC TR 29158
BUSY Status Main unit in MODE status AIM DPM (AIM DPM) 0 : Stable
2 1 byte 3 MODE BUSY Bits 3
Bits BUSY status 1 : MODE BUSY Unstable verification result 1 : Unstable
status unstable
0 : No ERR BUSY SAE AS9132
Main unit in ERR Cancellation is SAE AS9132 0 : Stable
4 ERR BUSY status 4 verification result
BUSY status required. Unstable 1 : Unstable
1 : ERR BUSY status unstable
0 : No FILE BUSY 5 (Reserved) Reserved area
Main unit in FILE
5 FILE BUSY status
BUSY status 6 (Reserved) Reserved area
1 : FILE BUSY status
Read operation
Word area and byte area
0 : Incomplete
0 Read Complete completion
1 : Complete
notification
In the following areas, information is represented with the following units.
Preset read
1 Preset Complete completion
0 : Incomplete This is cleared at the • Word areas : Areas where 0 to 65535 is represented as a 2-byte unsigned
1 : Complete
notification start of Clear Bit in integer
each status or at the
Preset data start of the next • Byte area : Areas where a character code such as ASCII code is represented
Register Preset registration 0 : Incomplete operation.
2
Data Complete completion 1 : Complete Module Representation
Slot Size Name Description Data contents Remarks
notification name method
Completion Tuning completion 0 : Incomplete Word Matching Level Matching level 100 to 0
3 1 byte 3 Tune Complete
Status Bits notification 1 : Complete
4 : A
4 (Reserved) Reserved area 3 : B
ISO/IEC15415 ISO/IEC15415 total
Word 2 : C
5 (Reserved) Reserved area Matching Grade evaluation grade
1 : D If multiple codes are
6 (Reserved) Reserved area Level and 0 : F read, the smallest
7 8 byte Total value is displayed.
1 is output when Evaluation 4 : A
"Reading", "Preset Grade Status ISO/IEC TR 29158 3 : B
External instruction reading" and "Tuning" Word AIM DPM Grade (AIM DPM) total 2 : C
EXT. Request 0 : Incomplete
7 operation completion are performed via evaluation grade 1 : D
Complete 1 : Complete
notification external terminals or 0 : F
commands and
Word (Reserved) Reserved area
results are obtained.
Reading operation
The cause of failure Word Read Result Code Error code
result code
can be checked with
Read Result Code. Preset Result Preset data read
Word Error code
Reading error 0:- This is cleared at the Code result code
0 Read Failure Refer to List of error
notification 1 : Reading error start of Read
Preset data codes.
Complete Clear Bit or Register Preset
Word registration result Error code
at the start of the next Data Result Code
code
operation.
Tuning operation
The cause of failure Word Tune Result Code Error code
Operation result code
can be checked with 8 20 byte
Preset Result Code. Result Status Word (Reserved) Reserved area
0:-
Preset reading error This is cleared at the
1 Preset Failure 1 : Preset reading Word (Reserved) Reserved area
notification start of Preset
Error
Complete Clear Bit or Word (Reserved) Reserved area
at the start of the next
EXT. Request External instruction
operation. Word Error code
Result Code operation result code Refer to List of error
The cause of failure codes.
General Error
can be checked with Word General error code Error code
Code
Preset Data Result
Code. Word (Reserved) Reserved area
Preset data 0:-
Register Preset This is cleared at the
2 registration failure 1 : Preset data Result Data Ready Result data reception
Data Failure start of Register Word The number returns
notification registration failure Count count
Preset Data to 0 if it exceeds
Complete Clear Bit or Result Data Result data update 65535.
Word
at the start of the next Update Count count
operation. • Read Data Word (Reserved) Reserved area
Error Status The cause of failure 32Byte
4 1 byte Result data size
Bits can be checked with • Read Data Word Result Data Size
8+ 64Byte (byte)
Tune Result Code.
Tuning failure 0:- This is cleared at the (data • Read Data • 32 • When append data
3 Tune Failure 9
notification 1 : Tuning failure start of Tune size) 128Byte bytes has been set, the
Complete Clear Bit or byte • Read Data • 64 append data is
at the start of the next 246Byte bytes output.
operation. * Select one • 128 • When the silent
Result data output
of them. bytes Result Data Result data output mode is set, this
4 (Reserved) Reserved area (Array of bytes)
• 246 area is not
5 (Reserved) Reserved area bytes updated.
• NULL (0x00) is
6 (Reserved) Reserved area appended after
1 is output when result data.
"Reading", "Preset
reading" and "Tuning"
are performed via
external terminals or
commands and the
0:- operation fails. The
External instruction
EXT. Request 1 : External cause of failure can
7 operation failure
Failure instruction be checked with
notification
operation failure EXT.Request Result
Code.
This is cleared at the
start of EXT. Request
Complete Clear Bit or
at the start of the next
operation.
Input terminal 1 0 : OFF
0 IN1 Status
status 1 : ON
Input terminal 2 0 : OFF
1 IN2 Status
status 1 : ON
Terminal
5 1 byte Output terminal 1 0 : OFF
Status Bits 4 OUT1 Status
status 1 : ON
Output terminal 2 0 : OFF
5 OUT2 Status
status 1 : ON
Output terminal 3 0 : OFF
6 OUT3 Status
status 1 : ON
7 (Reserved)
125 E SR-D100 UM
PLC instruction area Word area and byte area
The PLC instruction area is divided into areas as follows. In the following areas, information is represented with the following units.
• Word areas : Areas where 0 to 65535 is represented as a 2-byte unsigned
Bit area integer
• Byte area : Areas where a character code such as ASCII code is represented
In the following areas, information is divided by bit. Module Bit
Information is represented with 0 or 1. name address
Bank Number
Module Bit • For reading start
name address request
0 (Reserved) Reserved area 1 to 16:
Bank setting read
01: Writing to Other than 1 to 16:
result data This functions only Parameter
Result data update Alternate read
1 Result Data Latch device when handshake is 13 2 byte Bank Word Bank Number Bank Number 1 to 16
permitted • For tuning start
permitted enabled. Number
request
10: - 1 to 16:
2 (Reserved) Reserved area Tuning result
storage bank
3 (Reserved) Reserved area Other than 1 to 16:
4 (Reserved) Reserved area Error
• User Data Specify preset data
5 (Reserved) Reserved area Word User Data Size Preset data size
Latch and 32byte size.
10 1 byte Error Clear 6 (Reserved) Reserved area • User Data
2+
Control Bits 64byte
The following error (user
• User Data Bytes
statuses and data are 14 data Specify preset data.
128byte (preset
cleared. size) User Data Preset data (Terminator is not
• User Data data
• Buffer Overflow byte necessary.)
252byte size)
Error
* Select one
• General error
01: Error clear of them.
7 Error Clear Error clear • Result data
10: -
acquisition count
• Result data update
count Error code
• Result data stored
in the transmission
buffer
Error Error code Meaning
When specifying the
0 Read Request Reading start request
01: Start reading
bank, specify to Bank No error 0 Reading success/operation success
10: Stop reading
Number module. Reading error 201 Reading error
01: Preset read
Comparison error 202 The read code does not match the preset data.
Preset reading start start Reading not possible
1 Preset Request
request 10: Preset read in the specified bank Tuning failure The code could not be found within the field of
stop 210
(Symbol unclear) view while tuning.
Specify to User Data
Size/User Data Tuning failure
213 Tuning was aborted midway.
Module. (Aborted)
01: Preset data
Register Preset Preset data When deleting preset
Operation 2
Data Request registration request
registration
data, set the user Another operation instruction was received
11 1 byte instruction 10: - Control instruction reception
data size to 1, set the 120 during operation. (Operation instruction is not
Control Bits user data to 0xFF and error
performed.)
register preset data.
The bank number specification is invalid (other
Specify the tuning Bank No. error 102
01: Start tuning target bank number than 1 to 16).
3 Tune Request Tuning start request
10: Stop tuning to Bank Number
Preset data specification is invalid.
module. Preset data error 220
(Specified size is outside the range.)
Shortage of specified size (Result data and
5 (Reserved) Reserved area PROFINET data update error 230
present data size is beyond the limit.)
Read completion
Read Complete Reading complete 01: Complete clear notification and read
0
Clear clear 10: - failure notification
clear
Preset read
completion
Preset Complete Preset reading 01: Complete clear
1 notification and
Clear complete clear 10: -
preset read failure
notification clear
Preset data
registration
Register Preset Preset data completion
01: Complete clear
2 Data Complete registration complete notification and
10: -
Clear clear preset data
Completion registration failure
12 1 byte Clear Control notification clear
Bits
Tuning completion
Tune Complete Tuning complete 01: Complete clear Notification and
3
Clear clear 10: - tuning failure
notification clear
operation completion
EXT. Request 01: Complete clear and external
7 operation complete
Complete Clear 10: - instruction operation
clear
failure notification
clear
E SR-D100 UM 126
14-1 Installing MultiMonitor 7 Click [Install].
This section describes how to install, start and shut down the MultiMonitor.
Installation Procedure
This section assumes that MultiMonitor will be installed on a Windows 7-based
computer with the following drive configuration:
Drive C: Hard disk drive
Drive E: CD-ROM drive
1 Turn on the PC and start Windows.

8 Click "Finish".
Important • To install AutoID Network Navigator, you need to log on as a When the [InstallShield Wizard
user with the privileges to change the system, such as Completed] window appears,
Administrator or Computer Administrator. MultiMonitor install is complete.
• Quit all active applications before starting the installation. The
installation may take longer if antivirus software or other
2 Insert the "AutoID Network Navigator DISC1" into the CD-ROM drive
of the PC.
3 Select a language to install and press [OK].
"The AutoID Network Navigator installer"
will start.  Uninstall Method
From the Start menu, select [Control
panel] - [Programs] - [Programs and
Features] - [Uninstall or change a
4 Click [Install MultiMonitor]. program], select the program to
uninstall from the list, and click
[Uninstall].
5 Click "Next".
Startup Procedure
Start up MultiMonitor.
1 From the Start menu, select [Programs (P)]  [KEYENCE

Applications]  [AutoID]  [MultiMonitor (EN)].
Or, double-click on the desktop.
2 The following window will appear.
If the SR-D100 Series is within the same network, then this will be automatically
detected.
6 Click "Next".
[Destination Folder] is displayed.
Click on the "Change" button to
change to the folder in which the
Shutdown Procedure
Shut down MultiMonitor.
1 Click the button at the right end of the title bar. Or, press the
Alt + F4 keys.
The MultiMonitor will shut down.
127 E SR-D100 UM
14-2 Using MultiMonitor Double-clicking any of the images can enlarge the image.
[Enlarged image]
Software for real time monitoring of the SR-D100 Series. This can display up to 16
SR-D100 Series at once.
This can be used as easy-to-understand monitoring software.
(1)
(2)
(4)
(3)
(5) Status area
Area that displays results data for the SR-D100 Series.
 Notes for MultiMonitor

(5)
• While AutoID Network Navigator is running, MultiMonitor cannot be started.
• While MultiMonitor is running, AutoID Network Navigator cannot be started.
• The SR-D100 Series cannot be controlled from MultiMonitor
(1) Menu Bar

You can operate MultiMonitor functions and check software versions.
• View ··········· Change the display method of MultiMonitor.
Reader list: Select from display/hide for the reader view.
LiveView display: Select from display/hide for the LiveView area.
Status display: Select from display/hide for the status area.
• Layout ········ Specify the number of devices displayed on the MultiMonitor.
• System ······· Register and delete the SR-D100 Series.
• Settings ······ Select network cards, automatic search at start-up, and
LiveView quality settings.
• Help············ Confirm the version of MultiMonitor.
• File ············· Shut down MultiMonitor.
(2) System icon
Register in MultiMonitor, delete, and change the display order in the reader
view.
(3) Reader view
Display the SR-D100 Series registered to the MultiMonitor.
• Right-clicking on any of the reader name, IP address, or model will enable
selection of registration, deletion, or changing of configuration of the reader.
• Double-click the IP address to specify the IP address of the connected
reader.
• Clicking the indicator to the left of the reader name will change the
communication status between MultiMonitor and the SR-D100 Series.
Lamp status Description
MultiMonitor and the SR-D100 Series are communicating. This
displays images in real time, and also displays read data.
MultiMonitor and the SR-D100 Series are not communicating.
(4) LiveView area

Confirm the images obtained with the SR-D100 Series in real time.
From the menu bar, you can confirm the number of devices displayed. (1 to 16)
[Display illustrates 16 devices]
E SR-D100 UM 128
15-1 Installing FileView 7 Click [Install].
This section describes how to install, start and shut down the FileView.
Installation Procedure
This section assumes that FileView will be installed on a Windows 7-based
computer with the following drive configuration:
Drive C: Hard disk drive
Drive E: CD-ROM drive
1 Turn on the PC and start Windows.

8 Click "Finish".
Important • To install AutoID Network Navigator, you need to log on as a When the [InstallShield Wizard
user with the privileges to change the system, such as Completed] window appears,
Administrator or Computer Administrator. FileView install is complete.
• Quit all active applications before starting the installation. The
installation may take longer if antivirus software or other
2 Insert the "AutoID Network Navigator DISC1" into the CD-ROM drive
of the PC.
3 Select a language to install and press [OK].
"The AutoID Network Navigator installer"
will start.  Uninstall Method
From the Start menu, select [Control
panel] - [Programs] - [Programs and
Features] - [Uninstall or change a
4 Click [Install FileView]. program], select the program to
uninstall from the list, and click
[Uninstall].
5 Click "Next".
Startup Procedure
Start up FileView.
1 From the Start menu, select [Programs (P)]  [KEYENCE

Applications]  [AutoID]  [FileView (EN)].
Or, double-click on the desktop.
2 The following window will appear.
The SR-D100 Series registration is required to confirm files.
6 Click "Next".
[Destination Folder] is displayed.
Click on the "Change" button to
change to the folder in which the
Shutdown Procedure
Shut down FileView.
1 Click the button at the right end of the title bar. Or, press the
Alt + F4 keys.
The FileView will shut down.
129 E SR-D100 UM
15-2 Using FileView
Software that isolates the FileView software function from AutoID Network
Navigator. Without starting AutoID Network Navigator, you can manipulate image
data and configuration files stored in the SR-D100 Series RAM/ROM.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(5)
(4)
(1) Menu Bar

• System········· Register readers.
• Settings········ Select network cards.
• Help ············· Confirm the version of FileView.
• File··············· Shut down FileView.
(2) Reader view
Displays the reader name, model and IP address of the SR-D100 Series
connected to FileView.
• Click the indicator to change the status of communications between FileView
and the connected SR-D100 Series.
Lamp status Description
FileView and the SR-D100 Series are communicating. Operations
on images saved to the SR-D100 Series are available.
FileView and the SR-D100 Series are not communicating. In this
status, operations on internal files are not available.
(3) Remote Drive/File

Select the drive for Remote Drive and the file type to display in FileView.
(4) File list
Displays files selected in (3).
Right-click on the file name to display the menu, from where you can perform
[Open], [Delete], and [Save] operations.
(5) [Update] button
Updates the file list.
 Notes for FileView

• While AutoID Network Navigator is running, FileView cannot be started.
• While FileView is running, AutoID Network Navigator cannot be started.
• The SR-D100 Series cannot be controlled from FileView
E SR-D100 UM 130
16-1 SR-D100 Series Specifications Important To support VeriCode, the license registration is necessary.
For VeriCode compatibility, consult KEYENCE sales personnel.
Specifications
Model
Type
SR-D100
Standard
SR-D110
Wide range
SR-D130
Long-range
16-2 SR-DR10/DR15/DS3
Internal
memory
RAM
ROM
Save 80 images
Save 1000 images
Specifications
Light-receiving Sensor CMOS image sensor
part Number of pixels 752×480 pixels
Model SR-DR10 SR-DR15 SR-DS3
Lighting Light source High intensity red LED
Code type QR, MicroQR, DataMatrix(ECC200), GS1 DataMatrix Type 100 ring light 150 ring light Surface lighting
Focal distance 100 mm 150 mm 300 mm Lighting Light source Super luminosity red LED
Reading
Cell size (Focus position) 0.15 mm 0.22 mm 0.22 mm Power supply
View range (Focus position) 32.1×20.5 mm 47.4×30.3 mm 56.6×36.2 mm 12 V DC
voltage
Communication standard RS-232C compliant Rating
Serial Current
Communication rate 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, 115200 bps 500 mA 1000 mA 400 mA
Communication consumption
Supported protocol Non-procedure, MC Protocol, SYSWAY, KVSTUDIO
Communication standard IEEE802.3 compliant 100Base-TX Enclosure rating IP65 -
Ethernet TCP/IP, EthetNet/IP, PROFINET, MC Protocol, Ambient
Supported protocol 0 to 45°C
KVSTUDIO, FTP, BOOTP temperature
No. of connection ports 2 Ambient
Input type Bidirectional voltage input Environmental 35 to 95% (No condensation)
humidity
Input terminal Maximum rating 26.4 V DC resistance
Operating
Minimum ON voltage 15 V DC Location without dust or corrosive gas
environment
Maximum OFF current 0.2 mA or less
No. of connection ports 3 10 to 57 Hz double amplitude, 0.75 mm
Vibration
Output type Photo MOS relay X, Y and Z directions, 3 hours respectively
Maximum rating 30 V DC Weight (including the cable) Approx. 500 g Approx. 800 g Approx. 250 g
Output terminal
Maximum load current 1 Output: 50 mA, 3 Total output: 100 mA
16-3
Leakage current at OFF 0.1 mA or less
Residual voltage at ON
Enclosure rating
1 V or less
IP65 compliant SR-M80 Specifications
Ambient temperature 0 to 45°C
Relative humidity 35 to 95 % (No freeze, no condensation)
Environment Usable degree of Sun light: 10000lx, incandescent lamp: 6000lx, Model SR-M80
resistance ambient light fluorescent lamp: 2000lx Display element TFT color LCD
Operating atmosphere No dust or corrosive gas present
Display dots 640 × 480
10 to 57 Hz double amplitude 0.75 mm
Vibration Effective display
XYZ each direction 3 hours 170.9 × 128.2 mm
Power supply voltage* 24 V DC ±10 % Display panel area
1100 mA (when mounting the SR-DR15) Life (at normal
Rating 850 mA (when mounting the SR-DR10) temperature and Approx. 50,000 hours
Current consumption
800 mA (when mounting the SR-DS3) normal humidity)
600 mA (SR-D100 Series only) Maximum display units 4 units
Weight Approx. 300 g
Type Cold-cathode tube (replaceable)
Backlight
Model SR-D100HA SR-D100H Life Approx. 40,000 hours
Type Super high-resolution High-resolution Operating force 0.98 N or less
Internal RAM Save 80 images Touch switch
Life 1 million times or more
memory ROM Save 1000 images
Function Possible with the SR-D100 Series only
Light-receiving Sensor CMOS image sensor
part Number of pixels 752×480 pixels Transmission
10 BASE-T, 100 BASE-TX
Lighting Light source High intensity red LED rate
Code type QR, MicroQR, DataMatrix(ECC200), GS1 DataMatrix Ethernet Maximum cable
100 m
Focal distance 40 mm 85 mm communication length
Reading
Cell size (Focus position) 0.025 mm 0.063 mm Maximum
View range (Focus position) 5.5×3.5 mm 13.5×8.6 mm number of hub 2
Communication standard RS-232C compliant connections
Serial
Communication rate 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, 115200 bps
Communication Panel installed type, only front operation part is IP65f-
Supported protocol Non-procedure, MC Protocol, SYSWAY, KVSTUDIO Enclosure rating
compliant dust-tight, splash-proof enclosure
Communication standard IEEE802.3 compliant 100Base-TX
Ethernet TCP/IP, EthetNet/IP, PROFINET, MC Protocol, Ambient
Supported protocol 0 to 50°C *1
KVSTUDIO, FTP, BOOTP temperature
No. of connection ports 2 Ambient
35 to 85% (No condensation)
Input type Bidirectional voltage input humidity
Input terminal Maximum rating 26.4 V DC Environment Operating
Minimum ON voltage 15 V DC Location without dust or corrosive gas
environment
Maximum OFF current 0.2 mA or less
Overvoltage
No. of connection ports 3
category
Output type Photo MOS relay
Maximum rating 30 V DC Pollution degree 2
Output terminal
Maximum load current 1 Output: 50 mA, 3 Total output: 100 mA Power supply
24 V DC ± 10%
Leakage current at OFF 0.1 mA or less voltage
Residual voltage at ON 1 V or less Rating
Current
Enclosure rating IP65 compliant 950 mA or less
consumption
Ambient temperature 0 to 45°C
Weight 1,500 g
Relative humidity 35 to 95 % (No freeze, no condensation)
Environment Usable degree of Sun light: 10000lx, incandescent lamp: 6000lx, *1 When ambient temperature exceeds 40°C, use under conditions of absolute
resistance ambient light fluorescent lamp: 2000lx humidity of 40°C 85% RH or less.
Operating atmosphere No dust or corrosive gas present
10 to 57 Hz double amplitude 0.75 mm
Vibration
XYZ each direction 3 hours
Power supply voltage* 24 V DC ±10 %
1100 mA (when mounting the SR-DR15)
Rating 850 mA (when mounting the SR-DR10)
Current consumption
800 mA (when mounting the SR-DS3)
600 mA (SR-D100 Series only)
Weight Approx. 300 g
* To comply with CSA No.61010-1/UL61010-1/IEC61010-1, use the following power supply.
The power supply that provides Class 2 output as defined in the CEC and NEC,
or the power supply that has been evaluated as a Limited Power Source as
defined in CAN/CSA-C22.2 No.60950-1/UL60950-1/IEC60950-1.
• The number of writing times to the internal ROM is approx. 2 million.
131 E SR-D100 UM
16-4 Dimensions  SR-D100 Series mounting bracket
• Mounting bracket A
 SR-D100 Series 7 12.5 12.5 17 8 12.5 12.5
15.5
15.5
8
(SR-D100/D110/D130/D100H/D100HA)
7
8-R2.65
21
4-4.7
40
25
21
3-φ4.5
4-5.3
2-5.3
25
6-φ4.5 4-R2.65
2-4.7
R5
0
( L5 ) 90
R3
3
0
• Mounting bracket B
14 28.3
11.7 8
0
R5
2-M 3 2-φ3.9
40
41.1 37 2-R2.65 45°
45°
3
28.3
5.
2-M5
φ5.3 Screw hole dimensions
10.5
36.1 51
( L1 ) 6.6 25.8
46.1 φ14.5 11.8
1.7
3 7 42 6-φ4.5
12.5 12.5 7
4-M 2
11 11
46.4
45
φ11
3
φ45.3 3-M 3 φ14.95
1.7
51
1.7 ( L2 ) 42
( L3 ) 51
20
SR-D100/D110
 Control cable (OP-87224/87225/87226/87353/87354/87355)
SR-D130
10 D100H/D100HA
L1 92.6 97.8
2000
L2 34.4 39.6 5000
L3 36.1 41.3 10000 45
L4 41.1 46.3
10.5
L5 (198) (203)
φ15
5 120
φ6.7
( L4 ) 37 6.4
5 150
2-M 3 16
5 180
2-φ3.2
 Diffuser plate for main unit  Control cable (OP-87527/87528/87529)

2000
5000
38 10000 45
φ39.6
φ12
φ10
180
26 150
120
3 2
φ15
36.8
φ6.7
Thickness 16
180 mm: Brown, blue and black tubes

150 mm: Black, pink, light blue and white
120 mm: Gray, green and white-blue
 Ethernet cable (OP-87227/87228/87229)

φ6.2
16.8
φ14
2000
5000
44.7 10000 44.1
 Ethernet cable (NFPA79-compliant) (OP-87230/87231/87232)

φ6.5
14.7
φ15
2000
5000
51.3 10000 ±50 47
 Laser guide lens (OP-87235)

28.2
40.1 3 3
 Conversion cable for external light (OP-87236)

90
40
φ12
φ32
E SR-D100 UM 132
 SR-DR10  SR-DS3 mounting bracket
6.6 2.5 4-φ3 Dedicated mounting bracket Mounting bracket on the SR-D100 side
3-M3 9.2 285 40 4-M3
φ16
7.8
φ46.3 2-R1.7 10.5 10.5 10.5 10.5 3.6
35.8
31 6
6
1
φ12
56.2
3.6 3.6
φ5.8
2 2
° 45°
.4
φ96.9
18
55.3
3.4
120
4
4 13
40
90°
°
124.7
116.7
15
96.8
3.4
70 2.2
4 23 2-R1.7
.2
6
1.6
23.6 2
2.5
91
47
2
28.7 2-φ3.4 18
 SR-DR15 R3
2-R1.5
3.1
6 12
18
12
φ3.1 1.5
6.6 2.5 9.2 285 4-φ3 5.5
3-M3 40 φ16
34
42
78
4-M3 R3
φ46.3
7.8
16 13
31 6
6
1
φ12
51.1
20
81.2
φ5.8
8
2-M3
146.9
1.5° 45°
120°
90°
Anti-slip bracket (Incorporated into the mounting bracket on the SR-D100 side.)
42.2
10
70 2.2
5
.2
6
21.1 φ3.2
1.6
23.6 2
2-R3.5
6.8 28.6 6.8
2.7
2.7
0.3
1.2
 SR-DS3 1.2
4.4
4.4
46
43
32  SR-DR10 Diffuser plate  SR-DR15 Diffuser plate
2xφ3.5 (OP-87233) (OP-87234)
40 3-1
20 3-1
° 20
°
φ12
40
63
62
L=400 3x
e) 2-
(Hol 3-R1.6 C2
φ46 .0
3x
3-3.2
e) 2-
(Hol 3-R1.6 C
2.
φ46 0
8.2
3-3.2
φ102.8
 Mounting bracket for SR-DR10/15

φ152.8
Light mounting bracket (large) L Light mounting bracket (large) R
5
φ112.4
10.5 10.5 10.5 10.5 10.5 10.5 10.5 10.5
3.6 3.6
6
3
φ162.4
6 6
 SR-M80
70
70
237 67
105.3
105.3
170.9 6 43
(Effective display area)
186
186
178
178
146.8
146.8
(Affective display area)

128.2
178
167
3.6 3.6 3.6 3.6

70
70
51
4 4
22 22
2
2-φ3.4 2-φ3.4
φ3.1 2-R1.5 φ3.1 2-R1.5
3.1
3.1
22
22
12
12
When installing the mounting bracket Panel notch

1.5 1.5
5.5 5.5
48.7 48.7
Light mounting bracket (small) L Light mounting bracket (small) R

+1
0167.5
Panel thickness: Mounting bracket

10.5 10.5 10.5 10.5 10.5 10.5 10.5 10.5 99 99 1.6 to 4.0mm Installation screws
3.6 3.6
6
(Mounting bracket dimensions)
+1
226.5 0
6 6
190
55.3
55.3
136
136
128
128
100
100
96.8
96.8
50mm
3.6 3.6 3.6 3.6
(When the panel thickness is 4 mm)
4 4
22 22
2
2-φ3.4 2-φ3.4
φ3.1 2-R1.5 φ3.1 2-R1.5
3.1
3.1
22
22
12
12
1.5 1.5
5.5 5.5
48.7 48.7
133 E SR-D100 UM
16-5 Troubleshooting Unable to connect with AutoID Network Navigator
If the SR-D100 cannot be connected with the AutoID Network Navigator, check the
If you suspect that your SR-D100 Series device is operating abnormally, check the following 5 STEPs.
following:
If this does not solve the problem, contact your nearest KEYENCE sales office. STEP1 Check the LED of the SR-D100 Series
Unable to read codes STEP2 Network settings of the PC
 Is the SR-D100 Series turned ON?

STEP3 Check the security software of the PC
Check the power activation state of the SR-D100 Series. The SR-D100 Series
supports the power supply from the control cable. Confirm the power supply state
according to the configurations to be used. STEP4 Check the AutoID Network Navigator
"2-1 Connecting the Control Cable and Wiring (Page 8)"
STEP5 Temporary IP address setting for the SR-D100 Series
 Is the lighting LED on?
• Check that the power supply and the trigger input are properly connected.
• Is "Internal light" set to "Disable"? Reset it and try again.
• Have the buttons on the reader been activated? The buttons prevent reading
when they are being used. STEP1 Check the LED of the SR-D100 Series
Check the buttons and turn them off.
Is "ENET LINK LED" lighting?
 Is the code configuration correct? If the above LED is not lighting (blinking), wiring may be incorrect.
Confirm the following configuration in the AutoID Network Navigator. Check the following.
• Recorded code type • Is the SR-D100 Series turned ON?
• Read length • Is the Ethernet cable securely connected?
• Other code advanced settings • Is the Ethernet cable not damaged?
• Is the network HUB turned ON?
 Has the device been calibrated for these codes?
• It may be necessary to perform a quick calibration after confirming the settings in
STEP2 Network settings of the PC
the AutoID Network Navigator.
There are 16 different parameter banks that can be registered with calibration.
Registering parameters such as the worst print quality or the fastest movement Is the correct IP address set for the PC?
may prevent read errors from occurring.
• When any part of several codes exist in the scan range, decoding may take
longer.
Set the decode timeout to a longer limit and try reading again.
 Is the installation distance and angle optimal?

• Check the distance from the SR-D100 Series device to the target code.
The focal distance is 100 mm for the SR-D100, 150 mm for the SR-D110, 85 mm
for the SR-D100H, and 40 mm for the SR-D100HA.
• Use the test mode to determine the code reading rate.
 Is the scanner dirty?

Wipe off any water, oil or dust from the scanner with a soft cloth.
 Is there a problem with the print quality?

It may be difficult to read codes that have many cracks, chips, specks or blurs.
The above problems may occur depending on conditions of the surface of a work
piece on which codes are marked or environment where read operation is
performed.
The above problems also may occur depending on conditions of the product on
which codes are marked or the marking size.
Check the [Local Area Connection] and check if the IP address has been input. If
"Obtain IP address automatically" has been selected, connecting with the SR-D100
Series is impossible. Make sure to input the IP address.
STEP3 Check the security software of the PC
Has the communication been blocked by security software of the PC?

If security software is operating on the PC, it may be blocking the communication.
Disable the security software, and then make communication again.
* Restarting the PC may be necessary after disabling the security software.
STEP4 Check the AutoID Network Navigator
Is the correct Ethernet port selected?

When connecting with the SR-D100 using the AutoID Network Navigator, specify
the Ethernet card to which the SR-D100 is connected.
From [Setting (S)] - [Network card selection (N)] on the AutoID Network Navigator,
select the adaptor for which the IP address set in [STEP2] is displayed.
* If the PC has a wireless LAN port, this is considered as the same state that
multiple Ethernet cards exist. Select the correct Ethernet card.
E SR-D100 UM 134
Unable to communicate via Ethernet correctly
STEP5 Temporary IP address setting for the SR-D100 Series
 Are the command port, data port and PLC port set to
Was the temporary IP address set?
Press and hold the [TEST] switch of the SR-D100 Series for 5 seconds. After LED
Ethernet?
1 to 4 light up in yellow, release your finger. To control the SR-D100 Series using the Ethernet, set any of the command port,
data port and PLC port to Ethernet.
Using the AutoID Network Navigator, check the "Communication 2" tab.
"5-4 Configuration - Communication2 (Page 47)"
 Is there a response to a ping?

Send a ping from the host to the SR-D100 Series and check the network for
problems.
 When there is no response:
If the [TEST] switch is pressed for 6 seconds or more, LED 1, 3 and 5 will
• Check that the cable is connected correctly.
blink. In this case, the temporary IP cannot be assigned. Press the [TEST]
Check for disconnected cable or check that HUB is turned on.
switch again, and press and hold the [TEST] switch for 5 seconds.
• Check that the SR-D100 Series is turned on correctly.
SR-D100 Series operates on 24 V DC.
• Check that network configuration on the SR-D100 Series are configured
correctly.
Check the IP address and subnet mask port number of the SR-D100 Series.
 When there is a response
• Check that the port number of the SR-D100 Series is set correctly.
• Check that the IP address and the port number of the device to which SR-D100
Series is connected are set correctly.
Click the temporary IP address setting icon on the AutoID Network Navigator.
 Check that communications are established between the
host and SR-D100 Series on a one-to-one basis but
communications fail on a one-to-multiple basis.
Check for the same IP address set in multiple SR-D100 Series. An overlapped IP
address in the same network interferes with normal communication.
Click the [Auto detection] button. When the reader is detected, connection is
successful. 16-6 Checksum Calculation
If connection still fails even with the above operation, check the following as well. Method
• When a network HUB is being used, directory connect the SR-D100 to the PC
without using the HUB. • A checksum can be appended to the read data when it is being sent.
* No checksum can be appended to commands or responses.
• The checksum allows you to check if garbled text was caused during the RS-
Unable to communicate via the RS-232C properly. 232C communication.
If the checksum does not match due to concurrent use of the PASS/RTRY and
 SR-D100 Series may be connected with AutoID Network ACK/NAK protocols, create a program that requests to send again (RTRY or
N A K ).
Navigator.
* Checksums cannot be appended when using a PLC link.
Is the indicator lamp of the AutoID Network Navigator lighting in blue? This state
means that the SR-D100 Series is being operated from the AutoID Network Checksum calculation range and location
Navigator.
Finish the operations performed using the AutoID Network Navigator and click the
The checksum is calculated using all characters that are not a part of the header or
status indicator. When the color changes to the one other than blue, communicate
the terminator and 2 characters of ASCII code are appended immediately before
again.
the terminator.
(If a command is sent via RS-232C to the SR-D100 Series communicating with
AutoID Network Navigator, the error response (Error No. 23) will be output.  Data format
 Are the command port and data port set to RS-232C?
Header Read data Checksum Terminator
To control the SR-D100 Series using the RS-232C, set the command port and data
port to RS-232C.
Using the AutoID Network Navigator, check the "Communication 2" tab.
 With appended data
 Are the RS-232C communication settings set properly?
Check if the RS-232C settings both for the SR-D100 Series and the control host
Header Data size Time : Read data : : Image file name Checksum Terminator
are set properly.
Using the AutoID Network Navigator "Communication 1" tab, confirm the RS-232
settings of the SR-D100 Series.
 Is the RS-232C cable properly connected?

Check if the control cable of the SR-D100 Series is connected to RS-232C port of
the control host properly.
"2-1 Connecting the Control Cable and Wiring (Page 8)"
135 E SR-D100 UM
Checksum calculation method 16-8 Copyright indications
The checksum (cc) is calculated, assuming that the read data is "ABC123".
The characters are converted to ASCII code and the converted codes are TOPPERS/JSP Kernel
expressed in 8-bit binary numbers as shown below. Toyohashi Open Platform for Embedded Real-Time Systems/Just Standard
A bitwise exclusive OR operation (XOR) is performed on each character. Profile Kernel
Header ABC 123 Checksum Terminator Copyright (C) 2000-2003 by Embedded and Real-Time Systems Laboratory
Toyohashi Univ. of Technology, JAPAN
ASCII code bit
A  41h  0100 0001 The above copyright holders grant permission gratis to use, duplicate, modify, or
B  42h  0100 0010 redistribute (hereafter called use) this software (including the one made by
C  43h  0100 0011 modifying this software), provided that the following four conditions (1) through (4)
1  31h  0011 0001 are satisfied.
2  32h  0011 0010 (1) When this software is used in the form of source code, the above copyright
3  33h  0011 0011  notice, this use conditions, and the disclaimer shown below must be retained in
the source code without modification.
 
(2) When this software is redistributed in the forms usable for the development of
0111 0000  70h
*
other software, such as in library form, the above copyright notice, this use
The exclusive OR generates 1 when there is an odd number of 1 bit and 0 when conditions, and the disclaimer shown below must be shown without
there is an even number of 1 bit. modification in the document provided with the redistributed software, such as
The checksum is the character representation of the hexadecimal value in 2-digit ASCII the user manual.
code after the above operation. (3) When this software is redistributed in the forms unusable for the development
Therefore, cc = 70 (37h 30h) of other software, such as the case when the software is embedded in a piece
Example: of equipment, either of the following two conditions must be satisfied:
(a) The above copyright notice, this use conditions, and the disclaimer shown
Header ERROR Checksum Terminator leads to a cc of 58. below must be shown without modification in the document provided with
the redistributed software, such as the user manual.
Header KEYENCE : 100% Checksum Terminator leads to a cc of 74. (b) How the software is to be redistributed must be reported to the TOPPERS
Project according to the procedure described separately.
(4) The above copyright holders and the TOPPERS Project are exempt from
Reference Exclusive OR equation
responsibility for any type of damage directly or indirectly caused from the use
Perform a bitwise operation based on the following equation:
of this software and are indemnified by any users or end users of this software
00 = 0
from any and all causes of action whatsoever.
01 = 1
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS." THE ABOVE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS
10 = 1
AND THE TOPPERS PROJECT DISCLAIM ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
11 = 0
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, ITS APPLICABILITY TO A
*: PARTICULAR PURPOSE. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE ABOVE COPYRIGHT
Exclusive OR operator
HOLDERS AND THE TOPPERS PROJECT BE LIABLE FOR ANY TYPE OF
DAMAGE DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY CAUSED FROM THE USE OF THIS
Conversion from hexadecimal number to binary number
SOFTWARE.
Refer to the following chart for converting ASCII code to binary number.
Hexadecimal This software uses the following libraries:
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
number
Lua:
Binary number 0000 0001 0010 0011 0100 0101 0110 0111 Copyrighy© 1994 -2012 Lua.org, PUC-Rio.
Hexadecimal
8 9 A B C D E F
number
Binary number 1000 1001 1010 1011 1100 1101 1110 1111
16-7 ASCII Code List

High-order 4 bits
Hexadecimal 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Binary 0000 0001 0010 0011 0100 0101 0110 0111
0 0000 DLE (SP) 0 @ P ‘ p
1 0001 SOH DC1 ! 1 A Q a q
2 0010 STX DC2 “ 2 B R b r
3 0011 ETX DC3 # 3 C S c s
4 0100 EOT DC4 $ 4 D T d t
5 0101 ENQ NAK % 5 E U e u
6 0110 ACK SYN & 6 F V f v

Low-order 4 bits
7 0111 BEL ETB ‘ 7 G W g w
8 1000 BS CAN ( 8 H X h x
9 1001 HT EM ) 9 I Y i y
A 1010 LF SUB * : J Z j z
B 1011 VT ESC + ; K [ k {
C 1100 CL FS , < L \ l |
D 1101 CR GS - = M ] m }
E 1110 SO RS . > N ^ n ~
F 1111 SI US / ? O _ o del
E SR-D100 UM 136
MEMO
137 E SR-D100 UM
Revision History WARRANTIES AND DISCLAIMERS
(1) KEYENCE warrants the Products to be free of defects in materials and
Date of printing Version Revision contents
workmanship for a period of one (1) year from the date of shipment. If any
May 2013 2nd edition models or samples were shown to Buyer, such models or samples were used
September 2013 3rd edition Erroneous descriptions corrected merely to illustrate the general type and quality of the Products and not to
Arial 2015 4th edition represent that the Products would necessarily conform to said models or
samples. Any Products found to be defective must be shipped to KEYENCE
with all shipping costs paid by Buyer or offered to KEYENCE for inspection and
examination. Upon examination by KEYENCE, KEYENCE, at its sole option,
will refund the purchase price of, or repair or replace at no charge any Products
found to be defective. This warranty does not apply to any defects resulting
from any action of Buyer, including but not limited to improper installation,
improper interfacing, improper repair, unauthorized modification, misapplication
and mishandling, such as exposure to excessive current, heat, coldness,
moisture, vibration or outdoors air. Components which wear are not warranted.
(2) KEYENCE is pleased to offer suggestions on the use of its various Products.
They are only suggestions, and it is Buyer's responsibility to ascertain the
fitness of the Products for Buyer's intended use. KEYENCE will not be
responsible for any damages that may result from the use of the Products.
(3) The Products and any samples ("Products/Samples") supplied to Buyer are not
to be used internally in humans, for human transportation, as safety devices or
fail-safe systems, unless their written specifications state otherwise. Should
any Products/Samples be used in such a manner or misused in any way,
KEYENCE assumes no responsibility, and additionally Buyer will indemnify
KEYENCE and hold KEYENCE harmless from any liability or damage
whatsoever arising out of any misuse of the Products/Samples.
(4) OTHER THAN AS STATED HEREIN, THE PRODUCTS/SAMPLES ARE
PROVIDED WITH NO OTHER WARRANTIES WHATSOEVER. ALL
EXPRESS, IMPLIED, AND STATUTORY WARRANTIES, INCLUDING,
WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT OF
PROPRIETARY RIGHTS, ARE EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMED.
IN NO EVENT SHALL KEYENCE AND ITS AFFILIATED ENTITIES BE
LIABLE TO ANY PERSON OR ENTITY FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, PUNITIVE, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY DAMAGES RESULTING FROM
LOSS OF USE, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, LOSS OF INFORMATION,
LOSS OR INACCURACY OF DATA, LOSS OF PROFITS, LOSS OF
SAVINGS, THE COST OF PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTED GOODS,
SERVICES OR TECHNOLOGIES, OR FOR ANY MATTER ARISING OUT OF
OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE
PRODUCTS, EVEN IF KEYENCE OR ONE OF ITS AFFILIATED ENTITIES
WAS ADVISED OF A POSSIBLE THIRD PARTY'S CLAIM FOR DAMAGES
OR ANY OTHER CLAIM AGAINST BUYER. In some jurisdictions, some of the
foregoing warranty disclaimers or damage limitations may not apply.
BUYER'S TRANSFER OBLIGATIONS:

If the Products/Samples purchased by Buyer are to be resold or delivered to a
third party, Buyer must provide such third party with a copy of this document, all
specifications, manuals, catalogs, leaflets and written information provided to
Buyer pertaining to the Products/Samples.
E 1101-3
BarcodeReader.com
http://www.barcodereader.com/
You can download technical documents useful for BL/SR/RF introduction and
operation.
Download the latest manual from this Web page.
Copyright (c) 2013 KEYENCE CORPORATION. All rights reserved.
E SR-D100 UM 138 193031E 1045-4 299GB Printed in Japan

SR-D100 User's Manual - E PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

SR-D100 User's Manual - E PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

299GB

Fixed Mount 2D Code Reader Safety Precautions ............................................................................ 2

SR-D100 Series Software License Agreement ............................................................ 4

User's Manual Rev.4.0 1-1

3-1 Using the SR-D100 Series .............................................................. 11

6-1 Outline of the SR-M80 ..................................................................... 70

8-1 Communication of the SR-D100 Series........................................... 83

9-1 Details of Command Communication .............................................. 90

10-1 PLC Link ........................................................................................ 100

• Since the SR-D100 Series is a  EMC Directive (2004/108/EC)

 SR-D100 Series (Fixed mount 2D code reader)

Diffuser plate for main unit Mounting brackets Instruction Manual

A: pale, B: dark * Use for managing

 SR-D100 Series Main unit options

 SR-D100 Series dedicated monitor SR-M80

PWR IN1 OK/NG ENET ENET

 Other options  During normal operation

1-2 Part Names and Functions When power is ON

*1 Do not turn off power during file access.

(9) Light port

Important *2 Lights up when "IN LED synchronization" setting is set to

 When an error occurred.

The SR-D100 Series is used with the following devices.

Number Name Function Ethernet PLC

(1) Irradiator (3) Connector

Configuration tool External light

SR-D100 Series dedicated monitor AutoID Network Navigator OP-87236

1 After unpacking the package, first check the package contents.

4 Install the SR-D100 Series according to the location.

5 Adjust the reading conditions of the SR-D100 Series.

z Control wire (Input/Output signal wire)

Wire color Symbol Description

Control cable color and the meaning of signal

RxD 2 Yellow TxD

• Input rating : 15 - 26.4 V DC

KV-L20V/L20R (Port 2) SR-D100 Series

OUT2 (Aqua blue),

Ethernet cable connection method

• If the connector is not inserted correctly, pins may break or

Wrap a ferritic core (CAT3035-1330 manufactured by TDK or OP-84289 by

 Connecting the Ethernet port

* Use Category 5 or higher cable.

(3) Determination of operation BOOTP connection mode is activated.

• "3-2 Alternate Function" (Page 12) seconds and

• "3-10 Code quality verification function" (Page 21)

Code Start reading

BUSY signal (OUT3)

This section describes the alternate function. NO

Level trigger turned off?

The following settings are stored in the parameter bank.

3-3 Preset/Comparison Function

PR nn : Result data nn = Preset registration result (00 to 05)

02 The preset effective digit is specified as 0.

The number of digits of read data is less

The preset registration is not possible [null]

05 Two or more "!" exist in preset data.

Output terminal operation

Point By default, the PRESET OK output is not assigned to any of the

Function Description 5 bars lit 81 to 100% Up to 99 LEVEL5

Test commands Timing ON Timing OFF

a = Parameter bank No.

 Starting read time test mode

Read data : a : level = b  Input polarity setting